Home

HP LaserJet 8000 Service Manual

1. ww 688 Ul GE Figure 2 1 Printer Space Requirements Top view ww 674 Ul 9 67 Figure 2 2 Printer Space Requirements Side view EN Space Requirements 47 66 25 in 1683 mm ao Ci mi Do Co CO 3 14 5 in 368 mm 19 5 in 485 mm E 5 Co a a w N N DI O 3 3 3 33 in 838 mm Figure 2 3 Printer Space Requirements with Multibin Mailbox and Input Device 48 Chapter 2 Site Requirements EN Environmental Requirements EN Keep the printer within the following environmental conditions for optimum performance Table 2 1 Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions Operating Storage Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 0 to 40 C 50 to 90 5 F 32 to 105 F Humidity 20 to 80 RH 15 to 90 RH with no condensation with no condensation For printer weights see table 1 4 Printer and Accessory Dimensions on page 7 Environmental Requirements 49 50 Chapter 2 Site Requirements EN EN Operating Overview Chapter Contents Using the Control Panel 52 Resetting the Printer 55 Control Panel Menus 58 Service Mode
2. Figure 1 5 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN Optional Paper Handling Accessories 1 Envelope Feeder Duplexer internal 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 Not shown 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 8 bin Mailbox provides mailbox job separation and job stacking 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler provides mailbox job separation job stacking collating and stapling Not shown e 8 bin Multibin Mailbox e 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox EN Accessories and Options 19 Ordering Information Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer To order an accessory contact an HP authorized service or support provider Table 1 7 Accessories and Options Item Description or Use Order Number Paper 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Two 500 sheet trays and C4780A Handling feeder 2000 sheet Input Tray One 2000 sheet tray and C4781A feeder Tray 2 500 sheet Input Holds 500 sheets adjustable C4098A or Tray 4 2 x 500 sheet for Letter Legal ISO A4 Input Tray JISB4 Tray 3 500 sheet Input Holds 500 sheets adjustable C4099A or Tray 5 2 x 500 sheet for Letter Legal Ledger Input Tray 11 x 17 ISO A4 ISO A3 JISB4 Envelope Feeder Automatically feeds up to C3765B 100 envelopes Duplex Printing Allows automatic printing on C4782A Accessory duplexer both sides of paper 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Each of the 7 face down output C4783A bins holds 120 sheets of paper One face up
3. Exchange Service Ref Description Product Number Part Number Number QTY not shown Stapler Cartridges 3 pack C3772A not shown Power Box includes clip C4781 60500 not shown Jumper Cable short C4781 60501 not shown Jumper Cable long C4781 60502 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 447 LL MIU A SEE FIGURE 8 4A Printer Covers and Doors 2 Figure 8 EN 448 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 2 Printer Covers and Doors Ref Description Part Number QTY 01 Left Access Door RB1 6667 000CN 1 02 Left Access Door Struts RF5 1440 000CN 2 03 Hinge Plate RB1 6507 000CN 1 04 Label Operation Special Order RS5 8596 000CN 1 05 Cover Assembly RG5 1870 000CN 1 07 Right Cover Assembly RG5 1915 040CN 1 07D Open Close Stopper RB1 6484 000CN 1 08 Front Cover RB1 6494 000CN 1 09 Front Door RB1 6495 000CN 1 10 Front Door Latch XZ9 0379 000CN 1 11 Cover Left Lower Special Order RB1 6480 000CN 1 12 AC Access Cover RB1 6489 000CN 1 13 Left Output Bin Special Order RB1 6490 000CN 1 14 Cover Switch Special Order RB1 6492 000CN 1 15 Spring Compression Special Order RB1 6493 000CN 1 16 Right Lower Cover Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal RB1 6498 000CN 1 17 Rear Cover RF5 1402 000CN 1 18 Spring Torsion Special Order RB1 6509 000CN 1 19 Front Panel Control Panel Display RG5 4384 000CN 1 22 Cable Assembly RG5 472
4. 241 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Drive Gear 242 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Encoder 243 Mailbox with Stapler Bin Removal 244 Mailbox with Stapler PCA Removal 245 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Lower Connection 246 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Upper Connection 247 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Middle Connection 248 Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal 249 Back Plate 1 of 2 250 Back Plate 2 of 2 251 Stapler Controller PCA 1 of 3 252 Stapler Controller PCA 2 of 3 253 Stapler Controller PCA 3 of 3 254 Top Cover Assembly 255 Stapler Bed Assembly 256 Hinges eee eee ee ee ee eee 258 Orientation of the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 259 Front cover 1 of 3 260 Front cover 20f3 261 Front cover 3 of 3 262 Back cover 1 of 2 263 List of Figures xvii Figure 6 94 Figure 6 95 Figure 6 96 Figure 6 97 Figure 6 98 Figure 6 99 Figure 6 100 Figure 6 101 Figure 6 102 Figure 6 103 Figure 6 104 Figure 6 105 Figure 6 106 Figure 6 107 Figure 6 108 Figure 6 109
5. INTR From the input of the PRNT signal from the Stabilize the photosensitive drum initial rotation Formatter PCA until the laser diode intensity has sensitivity in preparation for been stabilized printing Clean the Transfer Roller PRNT From the end of the initial rotation until the Scanner Form images on the photosensitive print Motor stops drum based on the VDO signal from the Formatter PCA Transfer the image to the media 138 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Table 5 7 Printer Timing continued Period Timing Purpose LSTR From the primary voltage DC off until the Main Deliver the last sheet of paper and last rotation Motor stops clean the Transfer Roller If another PRNT signal is sent from the Formatter PCA the printer returns to the INTR period If not it returns to the STBY period EN Printer Timing 139 seq ebryon ybiH seig 1840 Husn saddp seig J0 Bu pwe a6JEYo MEIS abeyoa saysuesy 0a seig Buidoja rag Ov seig Suidojanag 00 aBrjon Aewug lov abeyon ewig i Zot L sd Josues Aranap Aen umop aor4 EOP L Sd sosues Asanap yun husna Sc s0Suas Jaded vogeasibey ZSd Josuas Jaded yun dn y id 179 yanp uoneasibey 27 yano paay HIS piouajos dn yord ayasse9 LLNS 2010W an Yoig LLW 200w urew EN 1 of 2 iagram ing D Im
6. 75 Testing the Printer 80 Cold Reset 85 Chapter Contents 51 Using the Control Panel Control Panel Layout The control panel contains a 2 line 16 character per line display panel six keys and three indicator lights Cancel Job Go M Value Select D CHC Read Data Attention Figure 3 1 Control Panel Layout Table 3 1 Control Panel Keys Key Function Go Switches the printer online or offline Stops printing when memory clears MENU Provides a menu system for obtaining status information or changing the printer configuration ITEM Cycles through the items on the selected menu Menu items that appear depend on the options installed and the configuration of other menu choices VALUE Steps through the item choices SELECT Selects a desired menu item an asterisk indicates the selected item CANCEL Allows the user to end the job in progress at the printer JOB 52 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN EN Indicator Lights The control panel indicator lights are described in the following table Table 3 2 Indicator Lights Indicator State Ready On Flashing Off Data On Flashing Off Explanation Ready to receive data Going offline Printer is offline Data is resident in the printer and processed as far as possible More data is expected but no
7. 158 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Control Panel Figure 6 3 Control Panel 1 While pushing in on the center area figure 6 3 callout lift up on the forward edge of the control panel to release the plastic retaining tab 2 Remove the cable from the retainer and unplug the control panel connector To Reinstall Plug in the cable replace the cable in its retainer insert the rear edge of the control panel under the top cover lip and press down on the forward edge to snap it into place EN Control Panel 159 Covers There are five cover assemblies in this printer e AC Access Cover located at the left rear of the printer e Back Cover provides access to the High Voltage Power Supply DC Controller Low Voltage Power Supply and Main Motor e Front Cover including front access door e Left Lower Cover located below the Diverter Access Door Top Cover provides access to the Face down Delivery Unit and Laser Scanner Assembly AC Access Cover Figure 6 4 AC Access Cover 1 Remove the Formatter PCA 2 Remove 3 screws figure 6 4 callout 1 160 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN To Reinstall 1 Insert the panel edge figure 6 4 callout 2 inside the back cover if installed 2 Be sure to insert the three alignment tabs figure 6 4 callout 3 into their slots before replacing the screws Covers 161 Back Cover Figure 6 5 Back Cover Note Remove the metal back
8. Device 1 2000 sheet Input Tray Device 2 Multibin Mailbox Verify that the C link cables are installed correctly see figure 7 8 on page 346 Remove all C link connections and visually inspect for connector damage on the cable pins and connector ends Try using a different cable to connect the problem device directly to the Paper Handling Controller All C link cables are wired the same but are different lengths Device 3 Stapler If a device is not recognized replace the device controller or defective C link cable Device 1 Verify that AC power is present in the 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 2 x 500 sheet and 2000 sheet Input Tray Verify that the C link cable is connected properly to the Paper Handling Controller or the tray will not lift Device 2 7 bin Multibin Mailbox EN Verify that the DC power supply is receiving power Verify that the DC power supply output is connected to the Multibin Mailbox controller Verify that the C link cables are properly installed and external power applied Check if Fuse F202 in the 2 x 500 sheet or 2000 sheet Input Tray s Controller PCA is blown Replace the DC power supply Replace the Multibin Mailbox controller After verifying that the configuration page accurately reflects the installed devices proceed to Image Quality on page 394 Information Pages 345 Communication Ask the customer to run a print job from the host system If the print jo
9. RF5 2766 000CN Top Cover Includes label table 8 8 on page 462 RF7 1395 000CN Reversing Mechanism Motor table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3814 000CN Full Bin amp Interlock sensor PCA table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3815 000CN Empty Bin Sensor PCA table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3816 000CN RG1 3817 000CN Face up Bin Full amp Sensor PCA LED PCA table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3836 000CN Odd Face down Bin Assembly table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3837 000CN Even Face down Bin Assembly table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3838 000CN Top Cover Assembly Upper Guide table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3840 000CN Right Cover Assembly 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3844 000CN Diverter Assembly Flipper table 8 9 on page 465 RG1 3853 000CN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly table 8 9 on page 465 RG5 1833 040CN Registration Assembly table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1834 000CN RG5 1843 000CN Feeder Assembly Sensor Cable Feeder Assembly table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RG5 1844 050CN DC Controller PCA table 8 5 on page 456 RG5 1845 000CN Paper Size Sensing PCA Trays 2 and 3 table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1845 000CN Cassette Size Sensing PCA table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 1846 000CN RG5 1847 000CN Switch Sensor PCA Main Gear Assembly table 8 5
10. 125 C link Connection 129 C Link Configuration Recommended 130 Stapler Motors Sensors and Switches 132 Stapler Cycles 135 General Timing Diagram 1 of 2 140 General Timing Diagram 2 of 2 141 XV Figure 5 25 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 6 35 Figure 6 36 Figure 6 37 Figure 6 38 Figure 6 39 Figure 6 40 Figure 6 41 Figure 6 42 Figure 6 43 Figure 6 44 Figure 6 45 Figure 6 46 xvi Parallel Cable Pin Assignments C2946A 142 Phillips vs Posidriv Screwdrivers 146 DISK Diiva ie S Sch pa tee Tma AA ATE en Sh ee 148 Control Panels sok seat a BOF a Seed a er eee ace 159 AG Access Gover s Ha sunis Bor se poses eee ene eons 160 BachiGoveb ma AA GA aa mala Geel ait oF Sig crs 162 Front Cover O02 tn ete st See mos a ee eee 163 Front Cover 2 of 2 GAS See See hee ate 164 Left Lower Cover tose
11. 2 Remove 1 screw from the front side and the bushing below the handle EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 271 Figure 6 102 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 2 of 4 3 Open the right door assembly paper path cover 272 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 103 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 3 of 4 4 Remove the holding arm s screw and release the Right Door Assembly EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 273 Figure 6 104 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 4 of 4 5 Release the plastic pin on the right end and remove the paper path cover as shown in figure 6 104 274 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Down Bins Face Down Bins 1 of 3 Bins 1 3 and 5 each have one rear roller Bins 2 4 and 6 each have 2 rear rollers The procedure for removing and replacing each of the bins is the same 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 and the Back Cover page 263 Open the right door assembly paper path cover callout 1 Remove 3 screws at the right engine side of the unit from the bin that needs to be replaced callout 2 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 275 Figure 6 106 Face Down Bins 2 of 3 4 Push the bin to the right until it releases callout 1 Next pull it straight out as shown Note the position of the 2 tabs callout 2 276 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 107 Face Down Bins 3 of 3 To Reinstall 1 Guide the empt
12. 10 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Media Selection Guidelines Note CAUTION EN More detailed specifications are in the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers User Guide and the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide See Technical Assistance on page 31 Paper To achieve the best possible print quality and avoid paper jams follow these guidelines for selecting paper e Use only copier grade paper that meets all specifications in the paper specification guide Avoid paper with embossed lettering perforations or texture that is too smooth or too rough e Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white photocopy paper The pigments must withstand the fusing temperature of 392 F 200 C for 0 1 second without deterioration Do not use paper with a colored coating that was added after the paper was produced e Pre printed forms must be printed with non flammable heat resistant inks that do not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the fusing temperature of 392 F 200 C for 0 1 second e Asmall sample of a new print media should be tested before purchasing large quantities Envelopes To prevent severe damage to the printer do not use envelopes that have windows clasps snaps or any non paper materials Print Envelopes to the Left Output Bin only Envelopes can be printed from Tray 1 and from the optional Envelope Feede
13. 179 Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing 180 Fan 4 Exhaust Delivery Unit 182 Feeder Assembly 183 Formatter Assembly 185 Fusing Assembly 187 Laser Scanner Assembly 189 Main Gear Assembly 191 Main Motor Assembly 194 Paper Input Unit PIU 195 PCA DC Controller 197 PCA Output Paper Sensor 198 Chapter contents 143 Power Supply High Voltage HVPS 205 Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS 206 Registration Assembly 207 Roller and Separation Pad Tray 1 210 Rollers Tray Pickup Feed and Separation 212 Sensor Paper Input Unit PS2 214 Sensor Registration PS1 216 Solenoid Assembly SL3 Face Up 218 Transfer Roller Assembly 219 Tray 1 Assembly 221 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies 222 Mailbox With Stapler 223 Stapler Assembly 249 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 259 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 295 144 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Removal and Replacement Strategy WARNING CAUTION EN fa ESD Th
14. 29 Printer Space Requirements Top view 47 Printer Space Requirements Side view 47 Printer Space Requirements with Multibin Mailbox and Input Device 48 Control Panel Layout 52 Configuration Page 81 Menu Map Page 83 Image Area Margins 92 Tray Position Adjustment 93 Tray 4 Position Adjustment 94 Printer Functional Block Diagram 98 Low Voltage Power Distribution System 99 Low Voltage Power Supply 100 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 101 Normal Mode vs EconoMode 104 Image Formation Block Diagram 107 Photosensitive Drum 109 Drum Cleaning 110 Primary Charging Roller 111 Image Writing 112 Image Development 114 Image Transferring and Media Separation 115 Image Fusing 116 Printer Paper Paths 117 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans 118 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Paper Path 122 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components 1 of 2 124 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components 2 of 2
15. Cleaning the Printer and Accessories on page 88 Clean the Fusing Assembly using alcohol If the problem persists replace the Fusing Assembly See Fusing Assembly on page 187 for instructions Inspect the gears driving the toner cartridge and the Fuser Replace the Main Drive Assembly if necessary See Main Gear Assembly on page 191 for Try a different media or paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Recommended Action Replace the toner cartridge Table 7 15 Repetitive Defects continued AaBbCc AQBbCC Possible Cause AaBbCc AaBbCc 3 Rollers are dirty Any dirty roller in the Ac amp OC amp paper path may result in a repetitive print l U defect 4 Fusing Assembly is dirty or defective 5 Gears are worn causing slippage or jumping instructions 6 Paper does not meet specifications The surface of the paper may be too coarse causing repeated marks AaBbCc Table 7 16 Line at Edge of Paper AaBbCc Possible Cause AaBbCc AaBbCc T tridge is defective Th oner cartridge is defective The AaBbCc photosensitive drum is wearing out The line will grow wider with cross hatching Shaking the cartridge does not relieve the problem A Table 7 17 Misshapen Characters Voids ABCC Possible Cause 1 Paper surface too rough Toner migrates to low spots leaving higher areas void 402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Turn EconoMode off Use
16. Hold the Transfer Roller wiper up figure 6 52 callout 3 and slide the assembly to the right until the gear on the left end is in position Carefully press the left end of the shaft into the retainer clip Press the Transfer Roller wiper down figure 6 52 callout 3 until the retaining clips snap into place 220 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Tray 1 Assembly Figure 6 53 EN Tray 1 Assembly 1 a db O N 6 Remove the front cover see figure 6 6 on page 163 and the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 Open the top cover and remove the toner cartridge Open the right lower door Remove 4 screws figure 6 53 callout 1 Carefully pull the assembly out from the printer and unplug the connector inside the right end figure 6 53 callout 2 Continue sliding the assembly out of the printer chassis To Reinstall Make sure that the alignment pins and plastic gears are properly aligned Tray 1 Assembly 221 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies Note The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory If you are replacing Tray 2 or Tray 3 with a tray other than the original factory installed unit you may have to adjust the new tray For details see Tray Adjustment Procedure on page 92 1 2 Open the tray and pull it out to the stop Carefully lift up on the outer end to release the tray stop mechanism at the right rear while continuing to pull the tray free of
17. Note Be sure to orientate the new adjustable foot tip properly 324 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Locating Pins Figure 6 155 Locating Pins 1 Remove the engine 2 Remove 2 screws each from the 3 locating pins EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 325 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA Figure 6 156 Front LED PCA 1 Remove the Front Top Cover page 304 2 Unplug the cable 3 Release the tabs and remove the LED PCA Note Guide the cable into the correct position when you replace it 326 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN Troubleshooting Chapter contents Troubleshooting Process 328 Power On 332 Display 336 Information Pages 340 Communication 346 Printer Messages 351 Image Quality 394 Troubleshooting Checks 412 Diagnostics on Accessories 418 General Troubleshooting Information 426 Chapter contents 327 Troubleshooting Process The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses the major problems first and then other problems as you identify the causes for printer malfunctions and errors The Troubleshooting Process figure 7 1 on page 330 and figure 7 2 on page 331 illustrates the major steps for troubleshooting the printing system Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting s
18. PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions Power On 333 Fan 4 Exhaust Fan 1 Exhaust Exhaust Figure 7 3 Fan Location and Airflow Table 7 3 Fans Fan Name 1 Laser Scanner Fan 2 Low voltage Power Supply Fan 3 Formatter Fan intake 4 Standard Output Delivery Fan Fan Location Exhaust air flows from the back of the printer on the left hand side of the fusing assembly Lower right hand corner of the printer Intake fan directly above the input power receptacle Directly above the center of the fusing assembly 334 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note Engine Test Button Access Figure 7 4 EN Engine Test The engine test verifies that the print engine is functioning correctly This test is very useful for isolating printer problems since the Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an engine test This test is very useful for isolating printer problems The engine test prints a full page of horizontal lines across the entire printable area and is also useful for checking and adjusting registration The engine test prints from Tray 3 only and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed Tray 3 must be installed and loaded with paper to perform an engine test Also make sure that the EP toner cartridge is installed in the printer Engine Test Button Location The engine test button is located on the DC Controller PCA It is accessible through a hole at the right
19. This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory default settings This item also clears the input buffer for the active 1 0 Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers for the active I Os only Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output buffers for all I Os 74 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Service Mode EN The Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel While in Service Mode you can Verify and set the Page Count and serial number These are displayed on the Configuration Page Set the Cold Reset Paper Size Default This sets the factory default paper size to either Letter or A4 Clear the Event Log Initiate the Service Mode as follows 1 3 Hold down SELECT and JOB CANCEL while powering on the printer until all lights are illuminated and the Display is blank If the Display Panel reads i TEST at this point the keys were released too soon Repeat this step until successful Press MENU then SELECT The message is Se briefly then the printer automatically begins an After several seconds both Control Panel indicators turn off The printer may display JF if it has not warmed up aa After the printer has warmed up and passed the self test s displayed Press MENU
20. e Ifthe LED does not come on there is a problem with the sensor Replace the corresponding field replaceable unit To stop the test set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position see table 7 26 on page 418 Note Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position normal settings when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly Replace the back cover 420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray LED Status Interpretation If the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is working properly it will pick up paper from the tray and feed it though the VTU and the bottom service LED will flash regularly every 0 5 seconds Table 7 27 Patterns of LED flashing 2 second pause between each pattern Recommended Action Verify that the tray lifts up freely by lifting it by hand Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly in the same corresponding slots and are not bent If neither of these is the problem replace The media did not reach the sensor Open the VTU door and remove the media Replace the paper feed VTU assembly or the paper pickup assembly Open the VTU door and remove the media Check the sensors and replace the corresponding field replaceable unit The media did not reach the sensor Open the VTU door and remove the media Replace the paper feed VTU assembly or the
21. on page 88 and replace the cartridge Inspect the Fusing Assembly for toner build up or scratches on the fuser rollers Try cleaning with alcohol Replace the Fusing Assembly if damaged See Fusing Assembly on page 187 for instructions Clean using compressed air See the Repetitive Image Defect Ruler figure 7 10 on page 408 Image Quality 399 MaBbCc AaBbCce AaBbCce AaBbCce AaBbCce Table 7 13 Toner Smear Possible Cause 1 Paper does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish of the media being printed may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process 2 Fusing Rollers are dirty Toner build up can cause the print on a page to smear 3 The Static Eliminator Strip is dirty or is not grounded allowing a static charge to remain on the page 4 Fusing Assembly is defective The print will smear if the Fusing Assembly is not heated sufficiently to bond the toner image to the paper 5 DC Controller is defective The DC Controller regulates fusing roller temperature Table 7 14 Background Scatter Possible Cause Random Background Scatter 1 Paper does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process 2 Inside of printer is dirty toner may have leaked out of the toner cartridge 400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Ac
22. 16 Fan 1 RH7 1266 000CN 1 18 Cable Assembly RG5 1924 000CN 1 19 Scanner Motor Cable RG5 1925 000CN 1 20 BD Cable RG5 1926 000CN 1 21 ILS Cable RG5 1927 000CN 1 30 Switch Sensor PCA RG5 1846 000CN 1 31 High Voltage Power Supply RG5 1888 000CN 1 31A High Voltage Power Supply Exchange C3166 69005 32 DC Controller PCA RG5 1844 050CN 1 32A DC Controller PCA Exchange C3166 69010 CH101 Screw with Washer M3X8 XA9 0872 000CN 8 CH104 Screw CT M3X3 XB5 7303 007CN 2 CH105 Screw w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN 4 CH106 Screw tapping truss head M3X8 XB4 7300 809CN 3 CH107 Screw tapping pan head M4X10 XB4 7401 009CN 3 Thermal Control PCA C3125 60002 1 i Thermal Control PCA Cable C3125 00001 1 456 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN 12 uate J12 11 QC iza B J13 FANS J56 J222 J10 2 NG J50 NG 3 951 nG J213 EE 319 A cmo KS 20 CH101 N 31601B RP 3215 13B Nana QD LAT 13 13A 3209 CH101 15 CH104 Figure 8 6 Printer Internal Components 4 of 4 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 457 Table 8 6 Printer Internal Components 4 of 4 Ref Description Part Number QTY 02 Fuser Cable 1 RG5 1849 000CN 1 03 Fuser Cable 2 RG5 1850 000CN 1 04A Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V RG5 1876 000CN 1 04B Low Voltage Power Supply Universal RG5 1878 000CN 1 04C Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V Exchan
23. 426 Paper Gurl sessar bka EE RA Peewee dee ee eae beads 431 Diagrams 0 eee 432 8 Parts and Diagrams How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams 442 Ordering PartS 00000 c eee eee 442 Accessories and SupplieS 0 000 0c cee eee 443 Common Hardware 00 00 cece eee eens 443 Illustrations and Parts Lists 0 2000 c eee eee 444 Alphabetical Parts List 00000 e eee 467 Numerical Parts List 0 0 0 0 ccc ee eae 475 Table of Contents xiii xiv EN List of Figures Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 4 3 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 5 7 Figure 5 8 Figure 5 9 Figure 5 10 Figure 5 11 Figure 5 12 Figure 5 13 Figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 Figure 5 16 Figure 5 17 Figure 5 18 Figure 5 19 Figure 5 20 Figure 5 21 Figure 5 22 Figure 5 23 Figure 5 24 EN Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the Printer 6 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN Engine Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open 14 HP Mopier 240 Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open 16 Rear and Left Side View 18 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN Optional Paper Handling Accessories 19 Sample 5 Page Coverage
24. L when the 200 V main heater is installed L when the 200 V sub heater is installed DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 5 of 5 General Troubleshooting Information 439 Two dots ee te x STAPLE OUT 3 Rx Reserve 4 TERM OUT device STAPLER HOT 6 CLOCK connector 42 STROBE in STAPLER 43 POWER ON IN CLink DC MOTOR 2 7 8 11 GND 24V RACK MOTOR STAPLING RACK SENSOR UNIT CONTROLLER THROAT SENSOR PCA OAT SENSO J2 1 SLIDER One dot 2 MOTOR 1 Tx id 3 3 IR Next H 4 TTERMIN devices Ls 6 CLOCK connector 6 i gt STROBE in SLIDER SENSOR 43 POWERON OUT Clink 8 2 7 8 11 GND 3 BIN FUL SENSOR NO CONNECTION 4 t0 DAS 2 INPUT SENSOR 13 NO RETAINER L RETAINER CONNECTION MOTOR HOME DC SENSOR SECURITY SWITCHES Figure 7 21 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram 440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Parts and Diagrams Chapter contents How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams 442 Accessories and Supplies 443 Illustrations and Parts Lists 444 Alphabetical Parts List 467 Numerical Parts List 475 Chapter contents 441 How to Use the Part Lists and Diagrams The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassembli
25. Plastics Printer and Parts Paper Acoustics Plastic parts have material identification markings according to international standards which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer s life The plastics used in the printer housing and chassis are technically recyclable Design for recycling has been incorporated into the printer and its accessories The number of materials has been kept to a minimum while ensuring proper functionality and high product reliability Dissimilar materials have been designed to separate easily Fasteners and other connections are easy to locate access and remove with common tools High priority parts have been designed to be accessed quickly for efficient disassembly and repair Plastic parts have been primarily designed in two colors to enhance recycling options A few small parts are colored specifically to highlight customer access points HP disposes of returned products in an environmentally sound manner Many of the functional parts are recovered tested and reused as fully warrantied service parts Used printer parts are not placed into new product manufacturing The remainder of the product parts are recycled if possible For product take back information contact your local HP Sales and Service Office The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specif
26. Switch Sensor PCA SW1401 sW1e01C sw16020 EN oe sw1603 _ PS1205 SW1604 S7 PS1206 pauseuasisasscdarasaoscentavecssvsoonasozesvaranies op EN PER OLERE ET PS1207 7O SW1601 le sw1602 PS1201 Sw1603 AZ PS1203 SAM ce SZ PS1204 FACE DOWN TRAY DELIVERY SENSE signal FDOUTS FACE DOWN TRAY PAPER FULL SENSE signal FDDULS FUSING UNIT DELIVERY SENSE signal FPOUTS TRAY 2 PAPER SIZE SENSE signal TRAY 3 PAPER SIZE SENSE signal TRAY 3 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 1 LVPS1 TRAY 3 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 2 LVPS2 TRAY 3 SENSE signal LDECKC TRAY 3 PAPER OUT SENSE signal LDECKS TRAY 2 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 1 UPVS1 TRAY 2 PAPER LEVEL SENSE signal 2 UPVS2 TRAY 2 SENSE signal UDECKC TRAY 2 PAPER OUT SENSE signal UDECKS REGISTRATION PAPER SENSE signal REGS TRAY 1 PAPER SENSE signal MPTPS PS1 Registration paper sensor PS2 Pick up unit paper sensor PS1201 Tray 3 present sensor PS1202 Tray 2 present sensor PS1203 Tray 3 paper level sensor 1 PS1204 Tray 3 paper level sensor 2 PS1205 Tray 2 paper level sensor 1 PS1206 Tray 2 paper level sensor 2 PS1207 Tray 3 paper out sensor PS1208 Tray 2 paper out sensor PS1301 Tray 1 paper present sensor PS1302 Lifting plate position sensor PS1401 Face down tray paper full sensor PS1402 Face down tray delivery sensor PS1403 Fixing unit delivery sensor Figure 7 14 LIFTING PLA
27. Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray and Tray 5 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray not shown transfer door 5 Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray and Tray 5 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray not shown 6 Front door POON EN 7 Tray 2 and Tray 3 8 Fusing Assembly Area 9 Left door 10 Multibin Mailbox 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox not shown 11 Mailbox with Stapler Troubleshooting Checks 413 General Paper Path Troubleshooting Paper jams occur in the printer when paper either does not reach or clear a photosensor along the printer s paper path in a specific amount of time If a paper jam occurs a 13 message is displayed on the printer s Control Panel The following lists general questions you should ask and topics you should explore prior to troubleshooting Table 7 25 General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions Problem What is the frequency of the paper jams e g continuous one jam per 100 pages one jam per 1000 pages etc Do paper jams only occur when the paper is fed from a particular paper input source e g Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Tray 5 or Envelope Feeder Do jams only occur when paper is output to a specific output bin e g standard output bin left output bin mailbox bin duplex operation stapler Do paper jams occur with a specific type of media Where does the leading edge of the first sheet of paper in the printer s paper path stop when a jam occurs Are any sheets of
28. table 8 5 on page 456 C3166 67905 Packaging Kit Printer table 8 1 on page 446 C3166 69001 Fusing Assembly 100 120V Exchange table 8 3 on page 451 C3166 69001 Fuser Assembly 110V Exchange table 8 4 on page 453 C3166 69005 High Voltage Power Supply Exchange table 8 5 on page 456 C3166 69006 Laser Scanner Assembly Exchange table 8 5 on page 456 C3166 69007 Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V Exchange table 8 6 on page 458 C3166 69008 C3166 69010 Low Voltage Power Supply Universal Exchange DC Controller PCA Exchange table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 5 on page 456 C3166 69011 Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange table 8 3 on page 451 C3166 69011 Paper Input Unit PIU table 8 4 on page 453 C3166 69013 Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 4 on page 453 C3762 60500 Packaging Kit duplexer table 8 1 on page 446 C3763 60500 Packaging Kit 2000 sheet Tray table 8 1 on page 446 EN Numerical Parts List 475 Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued C3763 70000 C link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to 2000 sheet Input Tray table 8 1 on page 446 C3764 60500 Packaging Kit Multibin Mailbox table 8 1 on page 446 C3764 70000 C3765 60500 C link Cable Assembly 178 cm 2000 sheet Input Tray to Multibin Mailbox Packaging Kit Envelope Feeder tab
29. 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Components Components of the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray paper path are illustrated in figure 5 16 and described in table 5 2 Laser Scanner _ Toner Cartridge Photosensor Drum Transfer Roller Registration Assembly Face Down Delivery Assembly Tray 1 Feed Roller Envelope Feeder Face Up Bin Output to Multi Bin Mailbox Tray 1 Drive Assembly Upper PIU Feed Roller Tray 2 Pick Up Roller Tray 2 Feed Roller Tray 2 Separation Roller IN 2000 Sheet Input Unit Path a Turnover Path Tray 3 Pick Up Roller Tray 3 Feed Roller Paper Path gt Tray 3 Separation Roller Paper Input Unit PIU Figure 5 16 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Paper Path Table 5 2 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger Portrait OFF OFF OFF OFF A3 Portrait OFF ON OFF OFF B4 Portrait ON OFF OFF OFF Legal Portrait ON ON OFF OFF Letter Landscape OFF OFF OFF ON A4 Landscape OFF OFF ON OFF 122 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Operation The 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is an input paper handling device that provides two additional input trays that hold up to 500 sheets each The device is designed to support different printer platforms with variable engine input speeds from 6 to 32 pages per minute and provide storage space for printer supplies or consumables The
30. 3 3 Scanner fog motor a4 1 5 1 es ee ete ee J701 A1 J220 A1 A2 A2 A6 TAG A7 AT A8 A8 B1 B1 B2 B2 B3 B3 B4 B4 B5 B5 B6 B6 B7 B7 B8 A9 B9 00 A10 B10 Figure 7 18 EN DC Controller PCA LLCONT The analog signal is output to adjust the intensity of laser beam PD LENBL The voltage in proportion to intensity of LON N ase beam is input VDO L to switch the laser on according to the VDO signal L to switch the laser on forcibly 5V Switches the laser on when the LENBL signal and this signal are L BDI BD input signal pulse 5V SCNRDY L when the scanner motor reaches the SCND prescribed speed SCNCLK L to drive the scanner motor Scanner motor reference clock signal 24VA HVTS Transfer bias monitor signal HVTRVSD Transfer negative bias drive signal DENADJ Image density adjustment signal DBACD Developing AC bias drive signal OBFRQ Developing bias frequency output signal HVTVLTO Transfer bias drive signal HVTCRTD Transfer bias constant current drive signal HRLBD Fusing roller bias drive signal OCHGBD Discharge bias drive signal HVIFRQ Primary bias frequency output signal DCHGUP Discharge bias switch signal HV1DCD Primary DC bias drive signal DBDCD Developing DC bias drive signal 24VB DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 3 of 5 General Troubleshooting Information 437
31. 3 DC Controller PCA s micro processor is functional If the fans are NOT working turn off the printer and remove the printer s Formatter PCA Disconnect all the printer s paper handling options Then turn on the printer and check the fans again If the fans are still not working perform the following steps 1 Verify that all fans are connected to the DC Controller PCA according to figure 7 19 on page 438 2 Replace the low voltage DC power supply See Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS on page 206 for instructions 3 Replace the DC Controller PCA See PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions 332 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 2 Power On continued Problem EN YES Action If the fans are working but the printer s Control Panel is blank print an engine test See Engine Test on page 335 If the engine test was successful perform the following steps 1 Reseat or replace the cable from the Control Panel that is connected to J203 of the DC Controller PCA see the main wiring diagram in the back of the manual 2 Replace the printer s Formatter PCA See Formatter Assembly on page 185 for instructions 3 Replace the Control Panel assembly See Control Panel on page 159 for instructions If the engine test was not successful verify that there is no paper in the paper path Retry the engine test If the engine test is still unsuccessful replace the DC Controller PCA See
32. Accessories and Options 27 Service Approach Repair of the printer normally begins with a three step process e Step 1 Isolate the problem to the major system i e the host computer the network and or server or the printer system e Step 2 Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine e Step 3 Troubleshoot the problem using the procedures in Chapter 7 Once a faulty part is located repair is usually accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable Units FRUs Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the subassembly level Replacement of components on the printed circuit assemblies is not supported by Hewlett Packard Ordering Parts Field replaceable part numbers are listed in Chapter 8 of this manual Replacement parts may be ordered from HP s Support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME Phone numbers SMO Support Materials Organization 1 800 227 8164 U S Only SME Support Materials Europe 49 7031 142253 HP s Distribution Center HPD 1 303 353 7650 HP Support Line 1 800 633 3600 28 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Exchange Program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts These are identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Parts Direct Ordering PDO Support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME Consumables The printer has two consumables the toner cartridge an
33. Figure 6 110 Figure 6 111 Figure 6 112 Figure 6 113 Figure 6 114 Figure 6 115 Figure 6 116 Figure 6 117 Figure 6 118 Figure 6 119 Figure 6 120 Figure 6 121 Figure 6 122 Figure 6 123 Figure 6 124 Figure 6 125 Figure 6 126 Figure 6 127 Figure 6 128 Figure 6 129 Figure 6 130 Figure 6 131 Figure 6 132 Figure 6 133 Figure 6 134 Figure 6 135 Figure 6 136 Figure 6 137 Figure 6 138 Figure 6 139 Figure 6 140 xviii Back cover 2 of 2 264 Top cover 1 of 4 265 Top cover 2 of 4 266 Top cover 3 of 4 e 267 Top cover 4 of 4 268 Mailbox Controller PCA 269 Mailbox Power Supply 270 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 1 of 4 271 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 2 of 4 272 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 3 of 4 273 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 4 of 4 274 Face Down Bins 1 of 3 275 Face Down Bins 2 of 3 276 Face Down Bins 3 of 3 277 Empty Bin Sensor PCA 1 of 2 278 Empty Bin Sensor PCA 2 of 2 279 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA 1 of 2 280 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA 2 of 2 281 LEDuP GA
34. Print and evaluate the event log B After evaluating the event log Go to Step 6 Can the customer print successfully from the host system A Run a print job from the customer host system B After successful completion of the print job Go to Step 7 HP LaserJet Troubleshooting Process 2 of 2 Verification Does the printer pass the verification tests A Run a paper path test to verify operation B Run a print job from the customer host system Troubleshooting Process 331 Power On Overview It is important to have the printer s Control Panel functional as soon as possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer s diagnostics can assist in locating printer errors Table 7 2 Power On Problem 1 Is AC power available at printer s power receptacle the 2 Is the printer s on off switch set to on 3 Are the printer s fans on See figure 7 3 on page 334 to locate the fans NO Action Verify See table 1 5 Electrical Specifications on page 9 Push the switch to the on position Note Fan operation is significant since all fans are controlled by the printer s DC Controller PCA When the printer is in PowerSave mode the fans are off Make sure that the printer is not in PowerSave mode Press Go Operational fans indicate 1 AC power is present in the printer 2 DC power supply is functional both 24V DC and 5V DC are being generated
35. RESET MEMORY RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS RESET ACTIVE 1 0 CHANNEL RESET ALL I O CHANNELS Figure 7 6 EN Sample Menu Map Information Pages 341 Configuration Page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings help troubleshoot printer problems or verify installation of optional accessories such as memory DIMMs paper trays and printer languages To print a configuration page 1 Press MENU until 2 Press ITEM until appears 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration page See figure 7 7 on page 343 for a sample configuration page The content of the configuration page varies depending on the options currently installed in the printer If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page verify that the C link cabling is correctly connected and functional figure 7 8 on page 346 and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices Check and reseat suspect cable connections If any of the cables are replaced you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again The Menu Map shows current control panel settings See figure 7 6 on page 341 for a sample Menu Map See chapter 3 for information about the default settings 342 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Printer Information Lists the serial number HP JetSend IP addresses page counts and other information for the printer Memory Lists printer memory PCL Driver Work Space DWS
36. RG5 4440 000CN Main Cable table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 4441 000CN RG5 4442 000CN Front LED PCA 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 4726 000CN Cable Assembly Control Panel table 8 2 on page 449 RG9 1150 000CN Diverter Assembly table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 4 on page 453 RH3 2205 000CN Power Supply table 8 9 on page 465 RH7 1260 000CN Main Motor table 8 3 on page 451 RH7 1262 000CN Pickup Motor table 8 4 on page 453 RH7 1266 000CN RH7 1266 000CN Fan 1 Fan 2 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 6 on page 458 RH7 1271 000CN Fan 3 table 8 6 on page 458 RH7 1289 000CN Fan 4 table 8 4 on page 453 RH7 5119 000CN Electromagnetic Clutch table 8 3 on page 451 RH7 5120 000CN RH7 5223 000CN Electromagnetic Clutch Paper Feed Solenoid Reversing Mechanism table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 9 on page 465 RH7 5225 000CN Solenoid Flipper table 8 9 on page 465 RS5 0758 000CN 20T Gear table 8 4 on page 453 RS5 1101 000CN Conductive Bushing table 8 4 on page 453 RS5 2463 000CN RS5 2466 000CN Compression Spring Front Compression Spring Rear table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RS5 2490 000CN RS5 8596 000CN Tension Spring Label Operation Special Order table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 2 on page 449 RS5 8605 000CN Paper Size G
37. Testing the Printer 0 0 0 cc ee eee 80 Papen Path Tess naapi ESEAS ANAE Geena dad 80 Configuration Page cece ee 80 Cold ReSCte ccs cect awed ceva esas ee eae eek a ees 85 EN EN 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Cleaning the Printer and Accessories 88 Cleaning Spilled Toner a 90 Preventative Maintenance 0 00 91 Tray Adjustment Procedure 0 000 cee eee ee eee 92 Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure 94 5 Functional Overview Printer Functional Block Diagram 0 000000 eee 98 Power Distribution System 00 00 eee eee 99 AC Power Distribution 0c eee eee 100 Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection 100 High Voltage Power Distribution 5 101 Formatter System 0 2 0 00 cece eee 102 DC Controller System 0000 ee 105 Laser and Scanner Drive ceca eee eee 105 Paper Motion Monitoring and Control 105 SC 105 Engine Test Microswitch a 106 MOOS 1 705 kak Dap WG bee L KP BELA DAN AE AA HUAG bead 106 Image Formation System cece eee eee 107 Toner Cartridge ee eee 108 Drum Cleaning 00 c eee ee 110 Drum Conditioning 00060 ee 111 Image Writing 0 0 cee eee 112 Image Developing 00 0c cee eee eee 113 Image Transferring and Media Separation 115 Image
38. activity on the channel at this time Data is being received or processed No data is being received or processed in the printer Action No action required No action required Press Go to place printer online No action required No action required No action required Attention On Flashing Off Catastrophic error Printer system is halted The printer needs attention There are no messages or error conditions requiring attention Turn printer off then on If problem persists see Chapter 7 Read and respond to display panel message No action required Using the Control Panel 53 Note Settings and Defaults The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary settings or factory permanent defaults Settings you send from software applications override printer defaults Temporary Settings are the values set for the current print job by your software application Temporary settings remain in effect until the current print job is finished Control Panel Defaults are the values entered by selecting a control panel item and pressing SELECT An asterisk next to the item name indicates that it is now the default The printer retains default settings even when power is turned off Factory Defaults are the permanent default values for each menu item set at the factory These values are listed in table 3 3 on page 56 Printer Driver Information You can ove
39. adjustable foot tip 2 x 500 sheet input tray 324 anti curl strings mailbox 246 anti static wrist wrap 147 attention light 53 back cover removing and replacing 162 back plate stapler 250 background scatter troubleshooting 400 bins mailbox with stapler 244 multibin mailbox 244 specifications 5 black lines troubleshooting 399 black page troubleshooting 396 blank page troubleshooting general 396 middle of page 407 partial 406 Index 483 484 Index blind cover mailbox 244 bubble print troubleshooting 405 C cables c link troubleshooting 346 main 2 x 500 sheet input tray 318 ordering 23 parallel 142 cancel job key 52 capacity paper trays 4 cartridge slots 2 cassette size sensing PCA 2 x 500 sheet input tray 315 casters 2 x 500 sheet input tray 323 characters improperly formed voids 402 cleaning printer and accessories 88 spilled toner 90 toner cartridge drum 110 c link cables 7 bin tabletop mailbox 128 troubleshooting 346 clutches diagram 434 drive signals 105 locations 117 cold reset 55 paper size 54 75 79 printer memory 85 communications link see c link cables compressed print troubleshooting 406 CompuServe forum 32 configuration menu 67 configuration page printing 80 troubleshooting 342 consumables printer 29 control panel default settings 54 display selecting a menu item 58 keys 52 language 55 layout 52 lights 53 overriding settings 54 416 removing and replacing 159 status 80 82
40. any key No action required No action required No action required No action required Printer Messages 363 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message Status The PCL or PS personality typeface list is printing The printer returns to the online state when printing is completed Status The menu map is printing The rinter returns to the online state when printing is completed printer returns to the online state when printing is completed Status The printer is processing or printing collated copies Copy X of Y total copies is being processed The printer is processing the current job but has not started picking pages When paper movement begins this message is replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from The printer is printing from the envelope feeder 364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting A paper path test is printing The Recommended Action No action required No action required No action required No action required No action required No action required EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Status Warning Warning EN Description The printer is processing a job The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used The requested operation
41. being delivered to the Duplexer 4 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Remove the media from the paper path 2 If the problem persists perform the Paper Path Test on page 415 3 If any delivery rollers are damaged replace them 4 If the problem persists perform the sensor test Replace any sensor that is damaged or the sensor PCA board 5 If the problem persists perform the motor test to check the solenoids and motors Replace any motor or solenoid that is damaged 6 If the problem persists and all sensors motors delivery rollers and the solenoid are working properly replace the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA See 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA on page 269 for instructions Printer Messages 379 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message 13 12 XX 13 13 XX 13 20 08 13 20 XX Description Duplex path paper late jam Paper did not arrive when expected Duplex path paper stopped jam Paper is jammed in the duplex assembly When clearing the paper path the Duplexer s sensor stayed active too long The engine could not eject a page in the printer The front panel message will indicate the sensor closest to the paper 380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action 1 Check the paper path between the fuser and duplex assembly 2 R
42. factory settings 54 85 fading print troubleshooting 397 428 fan 1 laser scanner removing and replacing 177 fan 2 lvps removing and replacing 179 fan 3 formatter removing and replacing 180 fan 4 delivery unit removing and replacing 182 fans fan motors 106 locations 117 faulty registration troubleshooting 403 Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology 31 FCC statement 35 feed rollers 2 x 500 sheet input tray 313 cleaning 90 tray 1 210 trays 2 amp 3 212 Index 485 486 Index feed system 2 x 500 sheet input tray 123 feeder assembly 183 removing and replacing 183 field replaceable units ordering 28 Finland laser statement 43 first page different troubleshooting 429 5 bin mailbox with stapler see mailbox with stapler flash DIMMs ordering 23 see also memory flashing light 53 flipper assembly 7 bin tabletop mailbox 286 solenoid 291 mailbox with stapler 227 multibin mailbox 227 flowchart troubleshooting 328 fonts internal 2 ordering 23 foot tip 2 x 500 sheet input tray 324 formatter assembly 78 fan 180 function 102 part locations 18 removing 185 system 102 front cover 7 bin tabletop mailbox 260 front door 2 x 500 sheet input tray 321 front LED PCA 2 x 500 sheet input tray 326 front top cover 2 x 500 sheet input tray 304 FRUs see field replaceable units FTP technical assistance 32 functional block diagram 98 functional overview 97 fusing assembly cleaning 90 removing 187 fusing image
43. making changes to your configuration remove the JetDirect card before performing a Cold Reset If possible print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset This will document current settings for later reference To perform a Cold Reset 1 Turn off the printer 2 While pressing Go turn the printer on briefly on the display then i seconds followed by iii E T appears appears After a few appears on the display The Cold Reset is complete 3 Press Go to return the printer online display appears on the Setting the Display Language 1 Press and hold SELECT while powering on Hold SELECT until appears i6 appears briefly Wait for Press repeatedly until the desired language appears Press SELECT to save your choice An asterisk will appear beside your language selection EN Resetting the Printer 55 Table 3 3 Factory Default Settings 56 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN EN Table 3 3 Factory Default Settings continued Resetting the Printer 57 Control Panel Menus Note Press MENU to cycle through the control panel menus Each menu is described in a separate table in this section Figure 3 3 see page 83 provides a map of all the menus and their associated items Menu items are displayed only if their associat
44. the paper path 2 If the problem persists perform the Paper Path Test on page 415 3 If any delivery rollers are damaged replace them 4 If the problem persists perform the sensor test Replace any sensor that is damaged or the sensor PCA board 5 If the problem persists perform the motor test to check the solenoids and motors Replace any motor or solenoid that is damaged 6 If the problem persists and all sensors motors delivery rollers and the solenoid are working properly replace the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA See 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA on page 269 for instructions Printer Messages 381 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message 13 22 01 Flipper Entry Left output bin jam 1 Open the Flipper Jam 13 2202 in the Multibin Mailbox Access Door and remove the media 2 Make sure that the sensor flag moves freely 3 Make sure that the flipper shaft is not out of place 4 If the problem persists replace the Flipper Assembly See Flipper Assembly on page 227 for instructions 5 If the problem persists replace the Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event
45. troubleshooting 336 control panel menus 58 configuration 67 EIO 72 information 59 VO 70 map 83 341 paper handling 60 print quality 62 printing 64 resets 74 service mode 76 controller PCA 2 x 500 sheet input tray 314 7 bin tabletop mailbox 269 mailbox with stapler 245 multibin mailbox 245 stapler 252 covers AC access printer 160 back printer 162 cleaning 90 front 7 bin tabletop mailbox 260 printer 163 front top 2 x 500 sheet input tray 304 latch 7 bin tabletop mailbox 294 left lower printer 165 left 2 x 500 sheet input tray 297 mailbox with stapler 223 multibin mailbox 223 parts and diagrams 449 removing and replacing 160 right 2 x 500 sheet input tray 301 top 7 bin tabletop mailbox 265 printer 166 stapler 255 curl troubleshooting 431 D daisy chain connections 346 data light 53 DC controller PCA diagrams 435 function 105 removing 197 system 105 DC power 99 Declaration of Conformity 40 default settings control panel 54 restoring 74 delivery head assembly mailbox 224 position motor mailbox 240 delivery unit standard output bin fan 182 removing 169 depth printer and accessories 47 developing images 113 diagnostics accessories 418 diagrams 432 442 EN EN dimensions printer and accessories 7 47 DIMM installing 147 disk see hard disk diverter assembly 7 bin tabletop mailbox 286 removing and replacing 172 diverter door assembly removing and replacing 173 documentation ordering 24
46. 118 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Table 5 1 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans Control Device Title Location CL1 Registration Clutch PIU right side CL2 Paper Input Unit Feed Clutch PIU right side CL3 Tray 1 Feed Clutch Tray 1 Drive Unit Fan 1 Laser Scanner Fan Under Top Cover Fan 2 Formatter Fan LVPS Fan 3 LVPS Fan Below Formatter Fan 4 Face Down Delivery Unit Fan Under Top Cover MT1 Main Motor Behind HVPS PS1 Registration Paper Sensor Registration Assembly center PS2 Paper Input Unit Paper Sensor Paper Input Unit top center PS1201 Tray 3 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1202 Tray 2 Paper Present Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1203 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1204 Tray 3 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1205 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 1 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1206 Tray 2 Paper Level Sensor 2 Paper Input Unit PCA PS1207 Tray 3 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1208 Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor Paper Input Unit PCA PS1301 Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1302 Tray 1 Lifting Plate Position Sensor Tray 1 Drive Unit PCA PS1401 Face Down Bin Full Sensor Switch Sensor PCA PS1402 Face Down Bin Delivery Sensor Switch Sensor PCA PS1403 Fuser Delivery Sensor Switch Sensor PCA SL1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Solenoid PIU right side SL2
47. 2 298 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 129 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 2 of 3 4 Remove the 2 screws that secure the VTU to the chassis 1 screw near each end of the VTU callout 1 5 Lift the VTU straight up to clear the metal tabs on the chassis EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 299 To reinstall Figure 6 130 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 3 of 3 WARNING To avoid injury tighten the screws that secure the VTU to the chassis before you release the plastic cams Insert the tabs into the slots callout 1 Tighten the screws callout 2 Release the cams callout 3 A O N Plug in the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis callout 4 300 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Right Cover Figure 6 131 Right Cover 1 of 3 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 and the Vertical Transfer Unit VTU page 298 2 Remove 3 screws EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 301 Figure 6 132 Right Cover 2 of 3 3 Release the left side of the Right Cover from the tabs and remove it 302 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 133 Right Cover 3 of 3 4 Release the tab from the right side of the Right Cover as shown in figure 6 133 5 Lift the Right Cover up to clear the tabs at the bottom EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 303 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Front Top Cover Figure 6 134 Front Top Cover 1 of 3 1 Remove the engine from the 2 x 500 sheet
48. 20T Gear RS5 0758 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Assembly RG1 3853 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Stand C4784A 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Stand Assembly C4784 60500 C4784 60500 table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 9 on page 465 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox whole unit R95 3007 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox C4783A table 8 1 on page 446 8 bin Multibin Mailbox C4785A or 5 bin Mailbox for Stapler C4787A table 8 1 on page 446 AC Access Cover RB1 6489 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Adjustable Foot Tip RG5 3863 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Back Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Back Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray RA2 2455 000CN RB2 3675 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 8 on page 462 Back Plate C3766 60505 table 8 7 on page 460 BD Cable RG5 1926 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 Bin Full Sensor RA2 2484 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Block Shaft Holding Front Block Shaft Holding Rear RB1 6414 000CN RB1 6415 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 Bottom Bin Tray RA2 2408 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Brushes C3766 60508 table 8 7 on page 460 Bushing Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox RA2 2505 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Bushing Roller 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Cable Assembly Control Panel FS1 1449 000CN RG5 4726 000CN table
49. 3 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 4 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 5 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Check the duplexer and the left door area for obstructions 2 Reseat the duplexer 3 Replace the duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Open the left door and remove any paper 2 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 3 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 4 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions Printer Messages 377 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message 13 11 XX Duplex turnaround paper 1 Check the entire paper stopped jam Paper is jammed in_ path the duplex assembly 2 Reseat the duplexer 3 Use the Paper Path Test on page 415 4 Replace the duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 13 1111 Timeout at the Entry or Exit 1 Open the Vertical Transfer 13 111B sensor on the 2000 sheet or Unit VTU and remove the 13 11 21 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray media 13 11 2B 2 Make sure that the Entry 13 11 31 or Exit sensor can move 13 11 3B freely 3 If the problem persists open the VTU and override its OpenDoor sensor perform a Paper Path Test from the 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input tray see Pa
50. 3 the standard paper trays in the printer and Trays 4 and 5 in the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray To adjust the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 see page 94 The paper trays are mechanically aligned to the printer chassis at the factory Perform this procedure ONLY if a paper tray has been replaced with a tray other than the original factory installed tray or if the top margin of the image area is off center more than 0 5 mm 0 02 inch The adjustment procedure is identical for Trays 2 and 3 Note Before performing this procedure check that the margins in your software application are properly set 1 Load the paper tray being tested with letter or A4 size paper 2 Perform a 1 sheet Paper Path Test from that tray see Paper Path Test under Test Menu in Chapter 3 3 See figure 4 1 and compare distance A to distance B DISTANCE A Top Of Page Image Area DISTANCE B Figure 4 1 Image Area Margins 92 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments EN Note See figure 4 2 Each adjustment notch changes the physical position of the tray by 0 5 mm 0 02 inch Moving the lever counter clockwise moves the tray inward and increases distance A Moving the lever clockwise moves the tray outward and decreases distance A 0 5 mm i Ae ADJUSTMENT WA PER NOTCH SD O ADJUSTMENT DS LEVER Figure 4 2 Tray Position Adjustment 1 If distance A is greater than distance B by more than 0 5 mm 0 02 inch move the adjustment lever clockwi
51. 4 Diagnostics on Accessories 419 To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull the blue power supply switch outward The motors will start Paper should now be lifted from the tray and fed through the VTU The service LED flashes regularly every 0 5 seconds e Ifthe unit does not work properly the service LED on the Controller PCA flashes in a pattern that indicates the problem See table 7 27 on page 421 for an interpretation of the LED patterns To stop the test set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode Open the VTU and remove any media from the paper path To test Tray 4 close Tray 4 and open Tray 5 Repeat step 4 To stop the test set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode and set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position see table 7 26 on page 418 Open the VTU and remove any media from the paper path 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Sensor Test This test manually activates the sensors on the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray to test if they are working properly 1 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for sensor test mode See table 7 26 on page 418 for an explanation of the settings To set the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull the blue power supply switch outward To manually activate each sensor press it in with your finger e When you activate the sensor the service LED on the Controller PCA comes on When you release the sensor the LED goes off
52. 449 table 8 8 on page 462 Full Bin amp Interlock sensor PCA RG1 3814 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Fuse LVPS 110 120V VD5 0056 301CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fuse LVPS Universal VD7 0646 301CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fuser Assembly 110V Exchange C3166 69001 table 8 4 on page 453 Fuser Cable 1 RG5 1849 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fuser Cable 2 RG5 1850 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fuser Flag RB1 6614 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 EN Alphabetical Parts List 469 Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Fuser Lock Lever Left Fuser Lock Lever Right RB1 6616 000CN RB1 6615 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 Fusing Assembly 100 120V RG5 4447 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Fusing Assembly 100 120V Exchange C3166 69001 table 8 3 on page 451 Fusing Assembly 220 240V RG5 4447 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange C3166 69013 table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 4 on page 453 Guide PCA RB1 6771 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Guide Slide RB1 6775 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Handle Latch RA2 2512 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 High Voltage Power Supply RG5 1888 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 High Voltage Power Supply Exchange C3166 69005 table 8 5 on page 456 Hinge Plate RB1 6507 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Hinges
53. 6 97 Top cover 3 of 4 5 To take out the flag bend the plastic shaft carefully as shown EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 267 Figure 6 98 Top cover 4 of 4 6 To remove the Top Cover lift the right side first as shown 268 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA Figure 6 99 Mailbox Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 Unplug 8 connectors from the Controller PCA callout 1 To unplug connector J202 pry it open with a flat blade screwdriver callout 2 4 Remove 1 screw from the Controller PCA below Connector J3 callout 3 Remove the PCA from its 2 plastic pins callout 4 Remove 1 screw from the plate callout 5 Remove 4 hex screws from the connectors on the metal plate Remove the PCA controller callout 6 EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 269 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Power Supply Figure 6 100 Mailbox Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 2 Pry connector J202 open with a flat blade screwdriver and unplug it callout 1 At the bottom of the power supply unplug J201 callout 2 Remove 2 screws and pull the power supply off its 2 pins callout 3 Note Be sure to replace all the Power Supply Connectors 270 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover Figure 6 101 Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover 1 of 4 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 and the Back Cover page 263
54. 8 9 on page 465 table 8 2 on page 449 Cable Assembly Laser Scanner Cassette Size Labels RG5 1924 000CN RS5 861 1 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 8 on page 462 Cassette Size Plate RB1 6894 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 EN Alphabetical Parts List 467 Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Cassette Size Sensor Cable Cassette Size Sensing PCA RG5 1920 000CN RG5 1845 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 8 on page 462 Caster XZ9 0442 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 C link Cable 80 cm C4783 70000 table 8 9 on page 465 C link Cable 97 cm C3766 60512 table 8 7 on page 460 C link Cable Assembly 178 cm 2000 sheet Input Tray to Multibin Mailbox C3764 70000 table 8 1 on page 446 C link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to 2000 sheet Input Tray C3763 70000 table 8 1 on page 446 C link Cable Assembly 97 cm Multibin Mailbox to Stapler C3766 60512 table 8 1 on page 446 Clutch Cover RB1 6468 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Compression Spring Front Compression Spring Rear RS5 2463 000CN RS5 2466 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 Conductive Bushing RS5 1101 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Connector 3P RG5 1928 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Connector 7P VS1 5057 007CN table 8 6 on page 458 Cover Assembly Cover Latch RG5 1870 000CN RA2 2531 000CN table 8 2
55. 8 on page 462 RB2 3705 000CN Spacer latch table 8 8 on page 462 RF1 4004 000CN Front Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8 9 on page 465 RF1 4005 000CN Plate Latch table 8 9 on page 465 RF5 1394 000CN RF5 1402 000CN Transfer Guide Rear Cover table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 2 on page 449 RF5 1412 000CN Transfer Roller table 8 3 on page 451 RF5 1426 000CN Feed amp Separation Rollers Paper Input Unit table 8 4 on page 453 RF5 1427 000CN Pickup Roller Paper Input Unit table 8 4 on page 453 RF5 1440 000CN RF5 1441 000CN Left Access Door Struts Diverter Drive Assembly table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 4 on page 453 RF5 1455 000CN Tray 1 Separation Pad 478 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams table 8 3 on page 451 EN Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued RF5 1464 000CN RF5 1466 000CN Plate Shield Formatter Shield table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 6 on page 458 RF5 1484 000CN Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 table 8 1 on page 446 RF5 1834 000CN Feed amp Separation Rollers 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray table 8 8 on page 462 RF5 2556 000CN Locating Pin metallic Positioning table 8 8 on page 462 RF5 2708 000CN Pickup Roller 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray table 8 8 on page 462 RF5 2762 000CN Front Top Cover table 8 8 on page 462 RF5 2764 000CN Left Cover table 8 8 on page 462
56. Development 114 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Image Transferring and Media Separation During the image transferring process the toner image on the drum surface is transferred to the media A positive charge applied to the back of the media by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged toner particles on the drum surface to be attracted to the media The small diameter of the drum combined with the stiffness of the media causes the media to separate easily from the drum The static eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the drum The static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the negatively charged drum surface and the positively charged paper This action keeps thin media from wrapping around the drum After separation the drum is cleaned and conditioned for the next image Static charge ae Transfer chargin eliminator ging roller Figure 5 12 Image Transferring and Media Separation EN Image Formation System 115 Image Fusing The Fusing Assembly bonds the toner particles into the media with a heated fusing roller and a soft pressure roller There are two levers on the Fusing Assembly that adjust roller pressure for single sheets down position or envelopes up position Both levers must be set to the same position The fusing roller contains two quartz halogen lamps that provide heat for the fusing process Fusing temperature is monitored by the DC Controller PCA via thermistor
57. Diverter Assembly Flipper RG1 3844 000CN 1 17 Face up Bin Full amp Sensor PCA RG1 3816 000CN 1 18 Right Cover Assembly RG1 3840 000CN 1 19 Plate Stopper RA2 2527 000CN 1 20 LED PCA RG1 3817 000CN 1 21 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1 3815 000CN 1 22 Support Plate RA2 2500 000CN 1 23 Full Bin amp Interlock sensor PCA RG1 3814 000CN 1 not shown C link Cable 80 cm C4783 70000 1 25 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox whole unit R95 3007 000CN 1 not shown 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Stand Assembly C4784 60500 1 27 Bottom Bin Tray RA2 2408 000CN 1 28 Shaft RA2 3842 000CN 1 29 Latch RA2 3842 000CN 2 30 Bushing FS1 1449 000CN 1 31 Handle Latch RA2 2512 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 465 Table 8 9 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components continued 32 Cover Latch RA2 2531 000CN 33 Pin Positioning Bushing RA2 2439 000CN 34 Spring Tension RA2 2513 000CN 35 Rail RA2 3842 000CN 36 Plate Latch RF1 4005 000CN Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit and all shipping locks are included in the Shipping Locks Kit 466 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Alphabetical Parts List Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List Description Part Number Table No amp Page 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray C4780A table 8 1 on page 446 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5 4442 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 2000 sheet Tray Tray 4 C4781A or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray C4780A table 8 1 on page 446
58. Error X Description 1 Low Fuser temperature 2 Fuser warm up service 3 High Fuser temperature 4 Faulty Fuser 5 Inconsistent Fuser 388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 2 Beam detect misprint error Recommended Action 1 Press Go The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted If this message persists 1 Reseat the connections to the Laser Scanner and the Engine Controller Board 2 Replace the Laser Scanner See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions 3 Replace the Engine Controller Board 1 Turn the printer off for at least 20 minutes and then turn the printer on If the error continues 1 Make sure that the Fusing Assembly is installed correctly and is fully seated into its connectors no bent pins or pins outside their receptacles 2 Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly 3 Replace the DC Controller EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error A temporary printing error 1 Press Go The page occurred containing the error will X Description automatically be reprinted 1 Beam detect error 2 Turn the printer off and 2 Laser error then turn the printer on 3 Reseat the cables See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual 4 Replace the Laser Scanner See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions Error A temporary printing
59. Formatter Assembly 1 If the Formatter is to be replaced make sure to note the page count 2 Loosen the two captive screws figure 6 25 callout 1 and slide the Formatter PCA out of the chassis 3 After installation of a replacement Formatter be sure to re enter the serial number page count and maintenance count See table 3 12 on page 76 for more information 186 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Fusing Assembly Figure 6 26 Fusing Assembly 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and remove the Duplexer if installed CAUTION Use the upper levers to release the Fusing Assembly NOT the lower levers The lower levers set the pressure rollers inside the Fusing Assembly for envelope printing down for single sheets up for envelopes 2 To release the Fusing Assembly rotate the upper levers down figure 6 26 callout 1 3 To remove the Fusing Assembly lift up on the finger handles figure 6 26 callout 2 while pulling outward EN Fusing Assembly 187 To Reinstall 1 Make sure that the Fuser Output sensor flag figure 6 26 callout 3 on the upper left corner of the Fusing Assembly rotates freely 2 Make sure that the lower levers are set down for single sheets If having trouble printing envelopes move the levers up Move the levers back down when done 188 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Laser Scanner Assembly CAUTION KA ESD The Laser Scanner diode is extremely sensitive to ESD 1 R
60. Fusing 00 cece eee ee 116 Paper Paths and Components 2000e0 ee eaee 117 Printer Duplexer and Envelope Feeder 117 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 Components 121 Multibin Mailbox Components 200000005 121 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Components 122 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components 124 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation 126 Operating Modes 0 0c ee eee ee eee 126 Communication Link 0c eee eee 128 Stapler Components 0 cece e eee 131 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler Operation 133 Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler 134 Table of Contents ix Printer Input Sources 0 0 cee ee 136 Paper Size Switches 00000 e eee eee 136 Printing from Trays 2 and 3 0c eee eee 136 Printing from Tray 1 000 e eee eee 137 Printing from the Envelope Feeder 137 Printing from the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 137 Two Sided Printing 00 0 a 137 Paper Jam Detection 00000 eee eee 138 Printer Timing 0 00 cee eee 138 IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information 142 6 Removal and Replacement Removal and Replacement Strategy 145 Required Tools 0 0 cece eet ee 146 User Installable Accessories ce
61. G HEWLETT PACKARD Expanding Possibilities English HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP LaserJet Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Service Manual HP LaserJet 8000 C4085A HP LaserJet 8000 N C4086A HP LaserJet 8000 DN C4087A HP LaserJet Mopier 240 C4228A Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1998 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws Publication number C4085 91017 First edition May 1998 Hewlett Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 U S A Warranty The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material WARNING Electrical Shock Hazard To avoid electrical shock use only supplied power cords and connect only to properly grounded 3 hole wall outlets Adobe and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated which may be registered in certain jurisdictions CompuServe is a U S trademark of CompuServe Inc Windows is a U S regist
62. Mailbox Stand Assembly table 8 9 on page 465 C4787 60500 Stapler Assembly table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 7 on page 460 C4787 60501 Stapler Control PCA table 8 7 on page 460 C4787 69500 Exchange Stapler table 8 7 on page 460 FS1 1449 000CN R95 3007 000CN Bushing Roller 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox whole unit table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2408 000CN Bottom Bin Tray 476 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams table 8 9 on page 465 EN Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued RA2 2439 000CN RA2 2455 000CN Pin Positioning Bushing Back Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2484 000CN Bin Full Sensor table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2485 000CN Flag Sensor table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2487 000CN Reversing Tray Face up table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2500 000CN RA2 2505 000CN Support Plate Bushing Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2512 000CN Handle Latch table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2513 000CN Spring Tension table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2527 000CN Plate Stopper table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 2531 000CN RA2 2541 000CN Cover Latch Plate Motor Cover table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 3842 000CN RA2 3842 000CN Shaft Latch 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox table 8 9 on page 4
63. Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3766 60516 1 460 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Internal Components Figure 8 8 Illustrations and Parts Lists 461 EN Table 8 8 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Internal Components Reference Description Part Number QTY 1 Back Cover RB2 3675 000CN 1 2 Cassette Size Labels RS5 861 1 000CN 1 3 Cassette Size Plate RB1 6894 000CN 1 4 Feed amp Separation Rollers RF5 1834 000CN 4 5 Front Top Cover RF5 2762 000CN 1 6 Left Cover RF5 2764 000CN 1 7 Main Cable RG5 4440 000CN 1 8 Front Door Cover Storage Tray RB2 3668 000CN 1 9 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5 4416 000CN 1 10 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA RG5 4442 000CN 1 11 Paper Feed Assembly Vertical Transfer Unit RG5 4403 000CN 1 12 Paper Pickup Assembly RG5 4410 000CN 1 13 Storage Paper Tray RB2 3669 000CN 1 14 Cassette Size Sensing PCA RG5 1845 000CN 1 15 Holder Size PCA RB2 3667 000CN 1 16 Pickup Roller RF5 2708 000CN 1 17 Power Supply Fuse VD7 1893 151CN 1 18 Right Cover RB2 3666 000CN 1 19 Universal Power Supply RG5 4021 000CN 1 20 Outrigger RG5 3852 000CN 1 21 Caster XZ9 0442 000CN 1 22 Power Supply Cable PSU RG5 3909 000CN 1 23 Front LED PCA RG5 4441 000CN 1 24 Adjustable Foot Tip RG5 3863 000CN 1 25 Tray 4 Assembly RG5 4420 000CN 1 26 Tray 5 Assembly RG5 4421 000CN 1 27 Locating Pin metallic Positioning RF5 255
64. Mailbox with Stapler over onto its right side 3 Remove 1 grounding screw figure 6 76 callout 1 and 4 self tapping screws figure 6 76 callout 2 Unplug all of the connectors from the PCA Remove the PCA from its metallic box EN Mailbox With Stapler 245 Strings Anti Curl Wa as A bee ORRE Figure 6 77 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Lower Connection The Anti Curl Strings are attached to the Jam Access Door Assembly at the top of the frame routed through small pulleys at the back of the Delivery Head Assembly and then routed around pulleys near the bottom of the frame where they are attached to tension springs 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 2 Disconnect the Anti Curl String tension springs at the bottom of the frame figure 6 77 callout 1 and remove the strings from the lower pulleys by snapping them free figure 6 77 callout 2 Remove both covers see figure 6 54 on page 223 Remove the Jam Access Door Assembly see figure 6 63 on page 232 through figure 6 65 on page 234 246 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 78 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Upper Connection 5 EN Disconnect the upper ends of the Anti Curl Strings from the Jam Access Door Assembly figure 6 78 on page 247 callout 3 Remove the Delivery Head Assembly see figure 6 55 on page 224 through figure 6 57 on page 226 Mailbox With Stapler 247 Figur
65. ONASA IBU6IS INAS TWOLLHSA a a ease INGd Ikubis INIBd f PW3 EW ZW HNA Veg U0HE O paads ybiy POT SESSION ESEE Ennn 2H 1H sareey sapos Buisn4 ass o spuoaes Hun Asaaijap Aen uMop a0R paa ayasseo Jamo Jeded jezuoznoy py uo suud aARNI SUOI OM JO yeyo Buju General T 23 5 140 Chapter 5 Functional Overview Figure Pu arene CA Ca Pamu ALI SSRIS SSS Assi AE PE cere CU 1T 4 oz aa ae 6071S sosues Keayjep yun Buisn4 a Ll L770 yunp pag xadnq 9 ll 71S piouejos enup 101981jep xe dng ze E 1Z1WS Jolow ajqeyoums ONASA PU IS INAS TWOLLH3A LNGd UBS INIHd 2H LH sareay sayo usna s g a SSS LE 10u09 694 Iu YOR AglS HSI spuoses Jun a NO 4allms samod paa Bulxajdng saded jezuozuoy py Uo Sjulid 3A NI SUOI OM Jo HLEYI Bulwi e uone 2 of 2 ing Diagram Im General T 24 5 igure F Printer Timing 141 EN IEEE 1284 Parallel Cable Information CAUTION Figure 5 25 This cable is IEEE compliant with A to C connectors To take advantage of its enhanced capabilities such as bi directional communication between the computer and printer faster transmission of data and auto configuration of printer drivers the cu
66. Perform the cleaning procedure described in Cleaning the Printer and Accessories on page 88 5 Is the customer using print For more information about HP s paper specification standards see media that meets all HP paper Paper Capacities and Sizes on page 4 and the HP LaserJet Family specification standards Paper Specification Guide 6 Is the print sample similar to Compare and perform the actions recommended in Image Quality those in the Image Quality Tables on page 396 Tables on page 396 7 Is the problem on the drum Perform the steps in Half Self Test Functional Check on page 409 to or transfer roller determine where the defect is If the defect is on the drum replace the toner cartridge If it is not on the drum replace the transfer roller 394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Check the Toner Cartridge Image formation defects are often the result of toner cartridge problems If there is any doubt always replace the toner cartridge before troubleshooting image defects Use the following check list to make sure that the toner cartridge is still operable possible to wear out the gears and the cartridge seals before Ti Make sure that the toner cartridge has toner Full toner cartridge weight 3000 grams 106 oz Empty weight 2200 grams 80 5 oz Check the expiration date of the toner cartridge stamped on the cartridge box e Check the toner cartridge to see if it has been disassemble
67. RB1 6509 000CN Hinge Plate Spring Torsion Special Order table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6522 000CN Plate Guard table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6557 000CN Sensor Arm PS2 table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6558 000CN Sensor Arm Spring Paper Input Unit table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6588 000CN RB1 6614 000CN Torque Limiter Fuser Flag table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6615 000CN Fuser Lock Lever Right table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6616 000CN Fuser Lock Lever Left table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6667 000CN Left Access Door table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6692 000CN RB1 6693 000CN Paper Sensing Lever Paper Height Lever table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6730 000CN RB1 6749 000CN Tray 1 Feed Roller Tray 1 Internal Cover Shield table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 RB1 6771 000CN Guide PCA table 8 6 on page 458 RB1 6775 000CN RB1 6822 000CN Guide Slide Duplexer Roller 1 table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 1 on page 446 RB1 6894 000CN RB2 3666 000CN Cassette Size Plate Right Cover table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 RB2 3667 000CN Holder Size PCA table 8 8 on page 462 RB2 3668 000CN RB2 3669 000CN Front Door Cover Storage Tray Storage Paper Tray table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 RB2 3675 000CN Back Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray table 8
68. Remove 6 screws callout 1 3 Remove the cable from the bracket callout 2 EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 309 Figure 6 140 Pickup Assembly 2 of 2 4 Carefully slide the Pickup Assembly straight out supporting it until you can reach the connector 5 Unplug the connector 310 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Paper Deck Drive Assembly Figure 6 141 Paper Deck Drive Assembly 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 Trays 4 and 5 page 307 and the Pickup Assembly page 309 2 Remove 3 screws callout 1 3 Unplug the connector callout 2 EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 311 Figure 6 142 Paper Deck Drive Assembly 2 of 2 4 Reach into the right side of the printer Pull the paper deck drive assembly to the left and then pull it straight out 312 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers There are three rollers in this assembly The upper forward roller is the Pickup Roller the upper rear roller is the Feed Roller and the lower roller is the Separation Roller The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between the trays The Pickup Roller is interchangeable with the Pickup Rollers in Trays 2 and 3 Pickup Roller figure 6 143 callout 1 e Feed Roller figure 6 143 callout 2 Separation Roller figure 6 143 callout 3 Figure 6 143 Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 1 Remove
69. Remove the small drive belt figure 6 73 on page 242 callout 2 from the motor drive gear 6 Pull the motor and Encoder Assembly clear of the frame while guiding the cables through the access hole in the bottom of the frame 242 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 74 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Encoder To Reinstall 1 Make sure that the segmented disk at the back of the Transport Belt Motor is approximately centered in the Encoder Assembly photosensor figure 6 74 on page 243 callout 3 2 Replace the drive belt on the motor drive gear before installing and tightening the screws EN Mailbox With Stapler 243 Paper Bins and Blind Cover Figure 6 75 Mailbox with Stapler Bin Removal The procedure for removing the paper bins and the blind cover is the same Each bin rests in its labeled slot 1 Remove the paper bins and the blind cover from the top down 2 Lift up on the outer edge of the bin or blind cover to clear the retaining notch and pull it forward out of the frame figure 6 75 To Reinstall Replace the paper bins from the bottom up Place the blind cover between Bin 1 and the Left Output Bin Slide the bin into its designated slot and lower it into its retaining notch 244 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN PCA Controller Figure 6 76 Mailbox with Stapler PCA Removal 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 2 Lay the Multibin Mailbox 5 bin
70. Set of Holder Size PCA C3766 60506 RB2 3667 000CN table 8 7 on page 460 table 8 8 on page 462 ILS Cable RG5 1927 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 Jumper Cable Long C4781 60502 table 8 8 on page 462 Jumper Cable Short C4781 60501 table 8 8 on page 462 Kit Plastic staple cover scan bar shown bin full sensor actuator and flag not shown C3766 60510 table 8 7 on page 460 Kit T10 Torx screws 10 C3766 60511 table 8 7 on page 460 Label Operation Special Order RS5 8596 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Laser Scanner Assembly RG5 1895 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 Laser Scanner Assembly Exchange C3166 69006 table 8 5 on page 456 Latch 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox RA2 3842 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Latch 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray XZ9 0379 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 LED PCA Left Access Door RG1 3817 000CN RB1 6667 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 2 on page 449 Left Access Door Struts RF5 1440 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Left Cover RF5 2764 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Left Output Bin RB1 6491 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 Left Output Bin Special Order RB1 6490 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Locating Pin metallic Positioning RF5 2556 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V RG5 1876 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 470 Chapter 8 Par
71. The DC Controller synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and Output Systems and then signals the Formatter to send the print image data The Formatter sends the print image data dots in the form of a VIDEO signal to start the printing process The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and mounting locations for three ElO cards additional memory DIMMs the Disk Accessory the Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 PowerSave This user adjustable feature Configuration Menu conserves power by shutting down the fuser and exhaust fans after the printer has been idle for 15 minutes 30 minutes 1 2 or 3 hours The printer retains all printer settings downloaded fonts and macros while in PowerSave mode The default setting is PowerSave on with a 1 hour idle time PowerSave can also be turned off from the control panel The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm up cycle when any of the following occurs e A print job valid data or a PML or PUL command is received at the parallel port or an ElO card A Control Panel key is pressed Any printer door except the front access door is opened and then closed 102 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Note Note EN A paper tray is opened and then closed e The Engine Test microswitch is pressed Printer error messages override the PowerS
72. Tray 1 Pickup Assembly RG5 1880 100CN table 8 3 on page 451 Tray 1 Separation Pad Tray 2 RF5 1455 000CN RG5 3951 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 1 on page 446 Tray 3 RG5 3952 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 Tray 4 Assembly RG5 4420 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Tray 5 Assembly RG5 4421 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Universal Power Supply Wire Frame RG5 4021 000CN C3766 60507 table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 7 on page 460 474 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams Numerical Parts List Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List Part Number Description Table No amp Page Formatter Assembly Exchange table 8 1 on page 446 Toner Cartridge C3909A table 8 1 on page 446 Envelope Feeder C3765B table 8 1 on page 446 2000 sheet Tray Tray 4 C4781A or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray C4780A table 8 1 on page 446 8 bin Multibin Mailbox C4785A or 5 bin Mailbox for Stapler C4787A table 8 1 on page 446 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox C4783A 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray C4780A table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 1 on page 446 Maintenance Kit 100 120V C3971B table 8 1 on page 446 Maintenance Kit 220 240V C3972B table 8 1 on page 446 Stapler Cartridges 3 pack C3772A table 8 1 on page 446 5021 0349 C3125 00001 EIO Coverplate Thermal Control PCA Cable table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 5 on page 456 C3125 60002 Thermal Control PCA
73. and I O buffering and resource saving information HP LaserJet 2090 soies printers BACKAR Event Log i Security ka aa a KU a Lists the a o E Lists the number of maa Ta status of the entries in Pa an Gag el printer s the log the cm Control maximum Panel lock numberof Ga ma a NAAN viewable Sash ct a ec ias password and the las and disk three drive entries e aaa 6 a Installed Personalities and Options Lists all printer languages that are installed such as PCL and PS and lists the options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot Figure 7 7 EN Sample Configuration Page Paper Trays and Options Lists the size settings for all the trays and lists the optional paper handling accessories that are installed Information Pages 343 Verify Installed Options In the Installed Personalities and Options section on the configuration page look for options such as hard disk information and DIMM types RAM or ROM and sizes Verify that the options installed in the printer are reflected in the configuration page If an installed device is not shown on the configuration page see table 7 4 on page 345 for recommended actions The Paper Tray and Options section of the configuration page identifies two types of paper handling devices that communicate or interact with the printer e Engine DC controller driven devices e Duplexer e Envelope Feeder Communication Link Devices C l
74. and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 2 When paper is supplied by Tray 3 SMT1 rotates in the reverse direction and drives the Pickup roller for Tray 3 106 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Image Formation System Laser printing requires the interaction of several different technologies such as electronics optics and electrophotographics to provide a printed page Each process functions independently and must be coordinated with the other printer processes The image formation process consists of six steps Drum Cleaning Drum Conditioning Image Writing Image Developing Image Transferring and Media Separation oa A O N Image Fusing lt Paper Path Laser Scanner Formatter Job lt Signal Control Path Assembly DC Controller Assembly Info Image Control Signals Writing Drum Toner Cartridge ih aaa Image Developing Primary HVPS Charging Roller Developin Roller 9 Image Media using Separation HVPS Duplex Unit Roller Transfering Figure 5 6 Image Formation Block Diagram EN Image Formation System 107 Toner Cartridge The toner cartridge is the heart of the Image Formation System It houses the cleaning conditioning and developing steps of the process The toner cartridge contains the photosensitive drum primary charging roller developing station toner cavity and cleaning station Including the components that wear degrade or are
75. device has automatic paper size sensing and enhanced network management capabilities Communication and control of the input device are made through the Paper Handling Controller by a sequence of instructions controlled into the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray controller PCA Pickup and Feed System When the input device has been loaded and closed the paper stack is lifted into position under the Pickup Feed and Separation rollers The Pickup Feed and Separation rollers start rotating when the Paper Handling Controller sends a pickup command to the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray As the Pickup roller turns the paper is fed into the vertical transfer unit and passes through the registration paper sensors If the paper does not reach the sensors on time the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray controller assumes that a paper jam has occurred stops the operation and reports a delay jam to the Paper Handling Controller A jam message will appear on the control panel display If there is any hardware malfunction it will be displayed on the control panel as well The paper guides in Trays 4 and 5 operate four levers at the back of the trays that activate the paper size sensing switches SW1601 to SW1604 Power Supply The 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray has an internal power supply activated when the printer power switch has been turned on The Paper Handling Controller sends a power on signal to the power supply through the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray controller When
76. did not reach PS2 EN Recommended Action 1 Open the top cover and remove any paper 2 Open the left and right doors and remove any paper 3 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 4 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 5 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Open the top cover and remove any paper 2 Open the front left and right doors and remove any paper 3 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 4 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 5 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions Use the Paper Path Test on page 415 to see if a problem exists from both engine trays If PS2 is bad it will fail when printing from Tray 2 or 3 Verify flag movement by manually inserting paper in the sensor path Replace PS2 or the Paper Input Unit PIU Assembly See Paper Input Unit PIU on page 195 for instructions Printer Messages 375 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error A page is jammed in an external Check the specified tray paper handling device is the device number 13 3 XX Paper delay jam Paper did not 1 Remove the toner reach PS1 at the registration cartridge lift the green area handle and verify the sensor flag operation 2 Make sure that the sensor i
77. door assembly jam access mailbox 232 right lower 174 right 7 bin tabletop mailbox 271 doors parts and diagrams 449 draft mode see EconoMode driver overriding control panel settings 54 416 troubleshooting 350 dropouts troubleshooting 398 drum cleaning 110 conditioning 111 rotation functional check 410 duplexer about 137 dimensions 8 memory requirements 27 ordering 20 paper paths and components 117 removing and replacing 149 specifications 5 speed 2 standard or optional 3 verifying installation 342 weight 8 duty cycle 2 E EconoMode 104 EDO DIMMs ordering 23 see also memory EIO block troubleshooting 346 EIO cards ordering 24 standard 3 status 80 ElO menu 72 electrical specifications 9 electrostatic discharge sensitive ESD 145 emissions acoustic 10 encoder assembly and transport belt motor mailbox 241 engine test microswitch 106 troubleshooting 335 envelope feeder dimensions 8 ordering 20 paper paths and components 117 printing from 137 removing and replacing 150 specifications 5 verifying installation 342 weight 8 envelopes guidelines 11 paper jams 428 troubleshooting 427 429 environment operating printer 46 requirements printer 49 environmental product stewardship 36 ESD see electrostatic discharge sensitive event log 336 clearing 75 listed on configuration page 82 troubleshooting 336 exchange program 29 exhaust fan 1 laser scanner 177 fan 2 Ivps 179 fan 4 delivery unit 182 F
78. error 1 Press Go The page occurred containing the error will X Description automatically be reprinted 0 Laser scanner error 2 Turn the printer off and 1 Laser scanner startup error then turn the printer on 2 Laser scanner rotation error 3 Reseat the cables See the wiring diagrams at the back of this manual 4 Replace the Laser Scanner See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions Error A finisher device in an external 1 Check the cable paper handling output device connections failed 2 Reseat or replace the alternates with device EN Printer Messages 389 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Error alternates with 66 00 xx 66 00 15 66 00 19 66 00 20 66 00 21 66 00 22 66 00 23 66 00 24 Description An error occurred in an external paper handling device A communication error occurred in the paper handling controller The paper handling controller had a bad C link communication This error is due to a power failure Page not expected Error is due to a bad C link connection or a damaged C link cable 390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on 1 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on 2 If the problem persists replace the PCA controller board for the device 3 If the problem persi
79. figure 6 75 on page 244 Remove the Left and Right Covers see figure 6 54 on page 223 Remove the Delivery Head Position Motor see figure 6 71 on page 240 4 Remove the Jam Access Door see figure 6 63 on page 232 through figure 6 65 on page 234 5 Remove the 2 inside screws closest to the front of the unit figure 6 59 callout 2 228 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN MA Figure 6 60 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Ground Wire 6 Unplug the ground wire from the Flipper Roller Motor figure 6 60 callout 3 7 Tilt the right end of the assembly a few inches out of the frame unplug the cable see figure 6 58 on page 227 callout 1 and rotate the assembly free while feeding the motor cable out through the access opening on the left side To Reinstall CAUTION Do not over tighten the screws figure 6 59 on page 228 callout 2 when replacing the Flipper Assembly The nuts in the Flipper Assembly will rotate in their retaining slots EN Mailbox With Stapler 229 Input Paper Guide Figure 6 61 Mailbox with Stapler Input Paper Guide 1 Remove the paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 2 Open the Jam Access Door and disconnect the ground wire from the bottom of the Flipper Roller Motor figure 6 60 callout 3 3 From the rear of the unit release the Paper Guide retaining tabs figure 6 61 callout 1 4 Carefully pull the paper guide free of the frame while routing the ground wire th
80. from purchase by the end user During the warranty period HP will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective The warranty period begins either on the date of delivery or where the purchase price includes installation by Hewlett Packard on the date of installation Should HP be unable to repair or replace the product within a reasonable amount of time you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price if you return the product To have your printer serviced by HP you should contact the closest HP Service Center Exclusions The warranty on your HP LaserJet 8000 N DN family printer shall not apply to defects resulting from e Improper or inadequate maintenance by customer Customer supplied software or interfacing e Unauthorized modification or misuse Operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product Operation of non supported printing media Duty cycle abuse maximum see the note on the following page e Using a mechanical switchbox with the printer without a designated surge protector e Improper site preparation and maintenance e Failure to perform key operator maintenance every 350 000 images e Use of non HP toner cartridges see the following explanation memory boards or interface boards EN Warranty 33 Note The use of non Hewlett Packard toner cartridges alone does not affect either your warranty or any maintenance contract you may ha
81. in table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 for each error comprising an event to gain a clear picture of what took place during that event Events usually conclude with a time out or no response from the device 5 xws in the Event Log Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on e Itis assumed that any Paper Handling Devices are connected as shown in the C link Cable Diagram figure 7 8 on page 346 The errors will be logged with different device numbers if any non standard cabling is installed e Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the Event Log with the Control Panel error message Follow the Recommended Action listed in the Event Log Table starting on page 352 for each error or event Display 339 Information Pages From the printer s Control Panel you can print pages that give details about the printer and its current configuration The following information pages are described here e Menu Map e Configuration Page For a complete list of the printer s information pages print a Menu Map and see the Information Menu Menu Map To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the Control Panel print a Control Panel Menu Map 1 Press MENU until 7 2 Press ITEM until 3 Press SELECT to print the Menu Map The content of the Menu Map varies depending on the options currently insta
82. instructions on the cleaning page Control Panel Menus 63 Printing Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application or from the printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings Table 3 7 Printing Menu ltem Values For supported paper types see page 4 64 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Explanation Set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 999 Press VALUE once to change the setting by increments of 1 or hold down VALUE to scroll by increments of 10 Note It is best to set the number of copies from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings Set the default image size for paper and envelopes The item name will change from paper to envelope as you scroll through the available sizes Note The defaults indicated here are for 110V printers The default paper size for 220V printers is A4 The default envelope size for 220V printers is DL if The custom paper menu items are not accessible The custom paper menu items appear see below Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size Press VALUE once to change the setting by increments of 1 or hold down VALUE to scroll by increments of 10 Determine the default orientation of print on the page Note It i
83. it Recommended Action Refill the finishing device Remove the flash DIMM and replace it with a new one See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions No action required 1 Check the filename and directory name 2 Reattempt the operation 1 Delete files from the flash DIMM or add another DIMM See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions 2 Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart See the software help for more information Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin Printer Messages 357 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Status 65 11 01 65 11 04 65 11 06 Error Description If this message displays continually a DIMM may not be inserted completely The detected cassette in the 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is not consistent with the paper size specified by the paper handling controller Tray 3 or Tray 4 is specified by the paper handling controller Tray 3 or Tray 4 received a request to feed more than 4 pages at a time The duplexer has been pulled out 358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Reseat the DIMM s 1 Make sure the size source and type of paper selected from the software configuration is correct 2 Pull the tray out and make sure the s
84. locator pins figure 6 33 callout 5 are properly aligned PCA DC Controller 197 PCA Output Paper Sensor 1 Remove the following components in the order listed Toner Cartridge e Formatter Assembly see figure 6 25 on page 186 e AC Access Cover see figure 6 4 on page 160 Top Cover see figure 6 9 on page 166 e Back Cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 e Fan3 and Housing Assembly see figure 6 21 on page 180 e High Voltage Power Supply HVPS see figure 6 41 on page 205 e DC Controller PCA see figure 6 33 Fanta 2y m Figure 6 34 Output Paper Sensor PCA 1 of 4 2 Remove 7 screws figure 6 34 callout 1 and remove the Formatter PCA cage 198 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Ps Ka N Figure 6 35 Output Paper Sensor PCA 2 of 4 3 Remove 5 screws figure 6 35 callout 2 and remove the Formatter PCA grounding strip EN PCA Output Paper Sensor 199 Figure 6 36 Output Paper Sensor PCA 3 of 4 4 Remove 3 screws figure 6 36 callout 3 and remove the plastic PCA shield Note the positioning of the metal grounding fingers at the left of the shield 200 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN eat a Figure 6 37 Output Paper Sensor PCA 4 of 4 5 Unplug the connector figure 6 37 callout 4 6 Remove 2 screws figure 6 37 callout 5 and unplug the connector on the back side of the PCA To Reinstall Make sure that the sensor flags rotate freely and that the top cover
85. on page 449 table 8 9 on page 465 Cover Left Lower Special Order RB1 6480 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Cover Switch Special Order RB1 6492 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Damper Holder Front RB1 6461 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Damper Holder Rear RB1 6462 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 DC Controller PCA RG5 1844 050CN table 8 5 on page 456 DC Controller PCA Exchange C3166 69010 table 8 5 on page 456 Diverter Assembly RG9 1150 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 4 on page 453 Diverter Assembly Flipper RG1 3844 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Diverter Drive Assembly RF5 1441 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Duplexer Roller 1 RB1 6822 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 Duplexer C4782A EIO Coverplate C4782 60501 5021 0349 table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 1 on page 446 Electromagnetic Clutch Electromagnetic Clutch Paper Feed RH7 5119 000CN RH7 5120 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 4 on page 453 Empty Bin Sensor PCA RG1 3815 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 468 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Envelope Feeder C3765B Even Face down Bin Assembly RG1 3837 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 9 on page 465 Exchange Stapler C4787 69500 table 8 7 on page 460 Face up Solenoid Assembly RG5 1875 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 F
86. on page 456 table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1849 000CN RG5 1850 000CN Fuser Cable 1 Fuser Cable 2 table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1852 160CN Paper Input Unit PIU table 8 3 on page 451 EN Numerical Parts List 479 Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued RG5 1859 000CN RG5 1860 000CN Sensor Cable Paper Input Unit PIU PCA table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RG5 1861 000CN Paper Pickup Cable table 8 4 on page 453 RG5 1863 200CN Fusing Assembly 100 120V table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1870 000CN Cover Assembly table 8 2 on page 449 RG5 1871 190CN RG5 1874 000CN Fusing Assembly 220 240V Face Down Delivery Assembly table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1875 000CN Face up Solenoid Assembly table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1876 000CN Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1878 000CN Low Voltage Power Supply Universal table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1880 100CN RG5 1883 000CN Tray 1 Pickup Assembly Tray 1 Door table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1884 000CN RG5 1887 000CN Tray 1 PCA Transfer Roller Assembly table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 RG5 1888 000CN High Voltage Power Supply table 8 5 on page 456 RG5 1895 000CN RG5 1915 040CN Laser Scanner Assembly Right Cover Assembly Printer Engine table 8 5 on page 456 ta
87. once to display To exit the Service Mode press Go Service Mode 75 Table 3 12 Service Mode Menu Items Service Mode Item Menu Items Choices Actions Required Displays total number of pages printed by the printer Press to step through values above cursor Press SELECT to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item Displays the page count when the next preventative maintenance should be performed maintenance should be performed every 350 000 pages Press to step through values above cursor Press SELECT to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item Allows a service technician to change the page count when the message displays This is provided for customers with printing environments that require more frequent maintenance cycles Displays printer serial number also located on the printer back cover Press to step through values above cursor Press SEL
88. paths and components 121 printing from 137 removing and replacing 151 Index 491 492 Index 2000 sheet input tray tray 4 continued specifications 5 troubleshooting 427 verifying installation 342 weight 7 typefaces see fonts U user guide ordering 24 user installable accessories 147 V value key 52 VCCI statement Japan 42 vertical transfer unit 2 x 500 sheet input tray 298 voids troubleshooting 402 428 W warranty 33 weight paper 4 white page troubleshooting 396 white stripes troubleshooting 405 width printer and accessories 7 47 wiring diagram mailbox with stapler 440 world wide web technical assistance 32 writing images 112 EN vit o a L9 s0akP sSHOOdY OND YOOSASd 19 902 aqngda4 qgda4 anvds4 avda4 uw zozer WAG 1SdNd 19 soze 151413121110 9 8 765 4 3 2 1 1514131211709 87654327 ans a zozr 1514131211109 8765 4 3 24 1514131271109 87654321 ans a bor anveda4 avedad canada d92024 SXJ3CdN 2X030dN 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 111121314191617 1819 2 1 1615 1413 234567 8 910111213141516 17 18 19 20 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 gt dq LozLP E goer aNd 201
89. printer reacts to errors CN If an error occurs that prevents printing the message will display and the printer will go offline for 10 seconds before returning online CFF If an error occurs that prevents printing the message will remain on the display and the printer will remain offline until GO is pressed EN Table 3 8 Configuration Menu continued ltem Values EN Explanation This item determines how the printer behaves when toner is low The message will first appear when the toner cartridge is almost out of toner About 100 to 300 sheets can still be printed The printer will continue to print while the message is displayed The printer will go offline and wait for further action This item determines how the printer behaves when a aper jam occurs The printer automatically selects the best mode for printer jam recovery usually it This is the default setting OM The printer automatically reprints pages after a aper jam is cleared The printer does not reprint pages following a paper jam Printing performance might be increased with this setting Control Panel Menus 69 O Menu Items in the I O input output Menu affect the communication between the printer and the computer Table 3 9 I O Menu Item Values Explanation Select the I O time out period in seconds I O time out refers to the time measured in seconds that the printer waits before end
90. screws figure 6 19 callout 3 and lift the fan and bracket assembly out of the chassis 3 Remove 2 screws figure 6 19 callout 4 to separate the fan motor from the bracket 178 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS Figure 6 20 Fan 2 LVPS 1 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 2 Remove the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA figure 6 20 callout 1 3 Remove 2 screws figure 6 20 callout 2 EN Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS 179 Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing Fan Motor 0 0 0 6 0 PE PE PE PE DA PA PA 220202020202020 Figure 6 21 Fan 3 Formatter Note The fan motor FM3 can be removed without removing the housing assembly 1 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 2 Unplug the fan connector figure 6 21 callout 1 CAUTION Do not bend the fan retainer clips upward Release them by pinching 3 Release the 2 retainer clips figure 6 21 callout 2 and slide the fan out of the housing assembly To Reinstall Make sure that the fan cable exits from the upper left corner 180 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN Fan Housing See Fan 2 4 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 5 Remove 2 screws figure 6 21 callout 3 Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing 181 Fan 4 Exhaust Delivery Unit or Figure 6 22 Fan 4 Delivery Unit 1 Remove the top cover see figure 6 9 Unplug
91. sensor 216 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN To Reinstall 1 Plugin the connector 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way first hook the tabs on the left end in first Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place Sensor Registration PS1 217 Solenoid Assembly SL3 Face Up Figure 6 51 Face Up Solenoid Assembly SL3 1 Remove the top cover see figure 6 9 on page 166 2 Remove the Delivery Unit see figure 6 11 on page 169 3 Remove 1 self tapping screw figure 6 51 callout 1 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic arm when removing the assembly 4 Pull the forward end of the assembly away from the chassis to clear the locating pin and slide it forward to clear two retaining tabs 218 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Transfer Roller Assembly Figure 6 52 Transfer Roller Assembly EN Transfer Roller Assembly 219 CAUTION Handle the Transfer Roller from the ends only Do not touch the surface of the Transfer Roller Skin oils will affect its electrical characteristics resulting in poor image transfer 1 2 To Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge Grasp the gear figure 6 52 callout 1 on the left end and carefully lift upward just enough to clear the retainer clip Slide the Transfer Roller Assembly to the left to release the shaft on the right end figure 6 52 callout 2 Reinstall Place the right end of the shaft into its retaining cavity
92. sheet Input Tray with an error code 1B This is normally a timeout at an entry or exit sensor 66 22 09 A hardware malfunction occurred in the second C link device configured It is an output device Mailbox with an error code 09 This is an external memory error Be sure to print a configuration page to properly identify the input or output device configured Notice that the error format only identifies the C link device number and the device type it does not identify which input or output device is used in the system EIO Troubleshooting The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in figure 7 9 on page 349 contains valuable information about the current status of the ElO accessories Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or notifying your network consultant of a problem always print a Configuration Page from the Control Panel s Information Menu If an EIO accessory is installed the JetDirect Configuration Page prints too See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for detailed explanations of network issues 348 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN HP LaserJet 8000 series printers KA ia EIO 3 JETDIRECT PAGE 1 JetDirect Configuration Page HP JETDIRECT LAN Hw ADDRESS PORT SELECT PORT CONFIG me CARD READY I O card status FIRMWARE REVISION AUTO NEGOTIATEON MFG ID GENERAL INFORMATION J3113A G 06 00 Q060B09BCLIB RJ4b 10BASE T Ha 38053805900600 Network sta
93. the I O Menu in the printer s online control panel The printer s serial 2 The serial baud rate configuration was not the same setting can be accessed as the computer s from the I O Menu in the printer s control panel 3 Press Go to clear the error message and continue the printing 4 Turn the printer off 5 Reseat the ElO card and turn the printer on Error The connection has been broken 1 Turn the printer off and TRONEM tH between the printer and the EIO reseat the card alternates wit card in the specified slot 2 Press Go to clear the error r message and continue printing Error The paper size you are trying to 1 Make sure that the control print is not the same as the panel setting for Tray 1 or the control panel setting for Tray 1 Envelope Feeder is correctly adjusted for size The printer will continue trying to print the job until the size settings are correct 2 Press Go The page containing the error will automatically be reprinted Or you might want to press CANCEL JOB to clear the job from the printers memory EN Printer Messages 387 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message Error A temporary printing error occurred alternates with X Description i ao TO 1 Unknown misprint error 3 See error 41 2 above 4 No VSYNC error 5 Media feed error 9 Noise VSREQ error Critical A fuser error has occurred
94. the fan cable figure 6 22 callout 1 Remove 1 screw figure 6 22 callout 2 and remove the metal fan shield 4 Release 4 retainer clips figure 6 22 callout 3 and slide the fan forward out of the Delivery Unit Assembly 182 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Feeder Assembly Figure 6 23 EN Feeder Assembly 1 of 2 1 2 3 4 Open the left access door and remove the Duplexer if installed Remove the Fusing Assembly see figure 6 26 on page 187 Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly see figure 6 52 on page 219 Remove the Registration Assembly see figure 6 43 on page 207 Unplug the sensor cable at the right side of the Feeder Assembly figure 6 23 callout 1 Remove 2 screws at the front of the Feeder Assembly figure 6 23 callout 2 Feeder Assembly 183 Feeder Assembly 2 of 2 8 Remove 1 screw at the back of the Feeder Assembly figure 6 24 Removing the High Voltage Power Supply is recommended to ease the removal of the Feeder Assembly primarily because of the contact points 9 Release 4 plastic retaining tabs by moving them in the directions indicated in figure 6 24 while carefully lifting upwards on the Feeder Assembly 10 Remove the Feeder Assembly by lifting it upwards out of the Toner Cartridge cavity To Reinstall Make sure that the plastic retaining tabs are all properly seated before replacing the screws 184 C
95. the paper tray Note The Feed and Separation Rollers have protruding retaining tabs and the Pickup Roller has recessed retaining tabs 2 From inside the tray cavity remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 313 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Figure 6 144 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 and the Left Cover page 297 Unplug 7 connectors Remove 4 hex screws from the C link connectors Remove the 2 screws that hold the PCA to the metal base a Ff W N Release the tabs at the left side and remove the PCA 314 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Cassette Size Sensing PCA Figure 6 145 Cassette Size Sensing PCA 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA page 314 Remove 1 screw callout 1 from the size sensing PCA s holder To remove the size sensing PCA s holder use a flat blade screwdriver to release the top and bottom tabs callout 2 from the slots in the metal EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 315 Figure 6 146 Cassette Size Sensing PCA 2 of 2 4 To remove the size sensing PCA unplug the cable from the PCA remove 3 screws and pull out the PCA 316 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Power Supply Power Supply 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 and the
96. the right door of the printer Opening and closing the top cover will cause the printer to go back online Printer Messages 373 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Error Error alternates with Error alternates with 13 1 0B Description A page is jammed A page is jammed Paper is jammed in tray i Did not receive paper from the Duplexer 374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Check the standard output bin Opening and closing the top cover will cause the printer to go back online Check underneath the toner cartridge for the jammed page 1 Remove the jammed paper from the specified location 2 Open and close the top cover to clear the message If the message persists after all jams have been cleared a sensor might be stuck or broken 1 Open the front door and remove any paper 2 Open the right door and remove any paper 3 Remove any paper from the Duplexer 4 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 5 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message 13 116 A page stayed too long at the Duplexer s second sensor 13 11F A page stayed too long on the Duplexer s second sensor 13 1 XX Paper feed 1 paper late jam Paper
97. to check other areas to make sure that all paper has been removed All portions of a jammed piece of paper must be removed or you may run into repeated jams If the jam persists try the following elf you have PostScript installed use the d item under the PostScript Menu The printer will attempt to automatically recover from paper jams e Execute a formfeed from the computer or the printer s control panel A formfeed may flush any paper or envelopes left in the printer Check to make sure you have located and removed all scraps of paper from inside the printer e Use the Event Log Page and Event Log Codes to aid you in isolating where the errors are occurring Clearing Repeated Paper Jams 1 Check to see that media is correctly loaded in trays and that all width guides are correctly set not skewed 2 Try turning over the stack of paper in the tray If you are using letterhead paper try printing from Tray 1 3 Do not use previously printed paper or torn worn or irregular paper 4 Check the media specifications If it is outside of the recommended specifications problems may occur 5 Printer may be dirty Clean the printer as described in the first section of this chapter 6 Check that paper loaded in Tray 1 is NOT longer than 17 7 inches 450 mm or wider than 11 7 inches 297 mm These are the maximum dimensions that the printer can feed otherwise the printer will jam 7 Make sure that Tray 4 and Tra
98. tray is open Tray does not contain the specified size of paper Memory or file system failures would not allow a mopy job to occur Either the printer is not configured to mopy or there is inadequate printer RAM disk memory Inadequate available RAM disk is a result of insufficient memory configured 8 MB or the print job exceeded the available configured memory including the on board disk Only one copy will be produced An external paper handling device detected an unsupported paper size The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected If the requested paper size or type is not available the printer asks if it should use another paper size or type instead Recommended Action Close the tray to continue Load the requested paper into the indicated tray or press SELECT to override the message and to print ona loaded paper size 1 Check to see if mopying is turned on Turn mopying on through the available control panel steps 2 Configure a minimum of 8 MB RAM disk 3 Make sure that there is adequate available printer DIMM memory or hard disk space The available space should exceed the size of the print job You can print the job to a file on your PC and compare that with the available printer memory or hard disk space available Load a supported paper size in the tray 1 Press VALUE to scroll through the available types and sizes 2 Press SELECT to accept the alterna
99. 0 Safety Statements 0 0 0 0 cc eens 42 Laser Safety Statement a 42 Canadian DOC Regulations 0000e0 ee ee 42 VCCI Statement Japan 0 2 0 0 e eee eee 42 Korean EMI statement a 43 Laser Statement for Finland 0 200000 43 2 Site Requirements Operating Environment 0 00 ccc nee nae 46 Space Requirements 00 0c cece eas 47 Environmental Requirements 00000 eee a aeee 49 3 Operating Overview Using the Control Panel 000 e eee ees 52 Control Panel Layout 0 0000 c eee eee 52 Indicator Lights 0 0 00 c eee eee 53 Settings and Defaults 0 0 00 ccc eee 54 Printer Driver Information 0 00000 eee eee eens 54 Paper Source Default 0 00 eee ees 54 Resetting the Printer 0 2 0 0 eee 55 Setting the Display Language aa 55 Control Panel Menus 22 58 Information Menu 2 ee eens 59 Paper Handling Menu cece eee eee 60 Print Quality Menu 2 c cee eee 62 Printing Menu 0 ee 64 Configuration Menu 00 eee ee 67 VOMEMU 59 5 2 Tanaka ee vad de bak Wick ew a ae Dee ahs 70 EIO Menu sesu errenneren teen eens 72 Resets MENU 4 naaa ANNA PAKANAN ANNA 74 Service MOdE PRA AA woke 75 Setting Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number a 78 Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size 79
100. 1 12 13 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle right side see figure 4 3 Slide the bracket so that the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole Tighten both screws Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the left side of the 2000 sheet Input Tray Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle left side Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the bracket hole Tighten both screws Reassemble the vertical transfer unit Make sure all the cables vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive assembly are reconnected Reinstall left right and rear covers to the tray The locating pin position at the middle could still be unacceptable for some customers applications If so repeat the procedure by moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin obtained Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure 95 96 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments EN EN Functional Overview Chapter contents Printer Functional Block Diagram 98 Power Distribution System 99 Formatter System 102 DC Controller System 105 Image Formation System 107 Printer Input Sources 136 Paper Jam Detection 138 Printer Timing 138 97 Printer Functional Block Di
101. 1 Main Gear Assembly RG5 1847 000CN 1 40 Transfer Roller Assembly RG5 1887 000CN 1 55 Tray 1 PCA RG5 1884 000CN 1 CH101 Screw with Washer M3X8 XA9 0872 000CN 10 CH103 Screw M4X8 XB6 7400 807CN 4 CH105 Screw w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN 2 CH114 Screw tapping M4X8 XA9 0605 000CN 2 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 451 na 1202 R7 51205 PS1204 PS1205 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 continued Figure 8 4 EN 452 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 4 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 Fig Ref Description Part QTY 8 04 A Diverter Assembly RG9 1150 000CN 8 04A 11 Diverter Drive Assembly RF5 1441 000CN 1 8 04A 16 20T Gear RS5 0758 000CN 1 8 04A 18 Conductive Bushing RS5 1101 000CN 1 8 04A 20 Tension Spring RS5 2490 000CN 1 8 04B 11 Paper Sensing Lever RB1 6692 000CN 1 8 04B 12 Paper Height Lever RB1 6693 000CN 1 8 04B 25 Fan 4 RH7 1289 000CN 1 8 04 Fuser Assembly 110V Exchange C3166 69001 8 04 C Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange C3166 69013 8 04C 36 Fuser Flag RB1 6614 000CN 1 8 04C 37 Fuser Lock Lever Right RB1 6615 000CN 1 8 04C 38 Fuser Lock Lever Left RB1 6616 000CN 1 8 04 D Feeder Assembly RG5 1834 000CN 8 04D 03 Sensor Arm Spring RB1 6409 000CN 1 8 04D 07 Block Shaft Holding Front RB1 6414 000CN 1 8 04D 08 Block Shaft Holding Rear RB1 6415 000CN 1 8 04D 10 Sens
102. 1200 benefit from REt Note It is best to change the REt setting from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings 62 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Table 3 6 Print Quality Menu continued ltem Values No value to select EN Explanation Turn EconoMode on to save toner or off for high quality EconoMode creates draft quality printing by reducing the amount of toner on the printed page by up to 50 CAUTION HP does not recommend full time use of EconoMode If EconoMode is used full time it is possible that the toner supply will outlast the mechanical parts in the toner cartridge Note It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings Lighten or darken the print on the page by changing the toner density setting The settings range from 1 light to 5 dark but the default setting of 3 usually produces the best results Use a lower toner density setting to save toner Note It is best to change the toner density from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings Press SELECT to print a cleaning page for cleaning excess toner from the paper path In order for the cleaning page to work properly print the page on copier grade paper not bond or rough paper Follow the
103. 2 from the left end of the Delivery Head Assembly 5 Raise the Delivery Head Mechanism to the top of the frame 224 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 56 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Mounting Screws 6 EN Support the Delivery Head Mechanism and remove 4 screws figure 6 56 callout 3 Rotate the right end of the assembly forward while guiding the left end through its access opening Mailbox With Stapler 225 Figure 6 57 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Pulley Detail 8 To Release the Anti Curl Strings from the pulleys on the back of the assembly figure 6 57 callout 4 by removing the mounting pin from the center Reinstall Replace the Anti Curl Strings into the pulleys on the back of the assembly You may need to release the Anti Curl String Springs at the bottom of the frame to have enough slack Carefully replace the ribbon cable into its connector Insert the left end of the assembly through its access opening and position the assembly onto its elevator mounts Make sure that the locating pins are in place Replace the 2 screws Reattach the Anti Curl String Springs at the bottom of the frame 226 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Flipper Assembly d Figure 6 58 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Connector EN Mailbox With Stapler 227 Figure 6 59 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Mounting Screws 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see
104. 3 000 9 Empty 80 5 oz 2 200 g 7 bin Tabletop 20 87 in 18 50 in 30 Ibs Mailbox LCO 530 mm 470 mm 14 kg 2 x 500 sheet 18 89 in 24 76 in 20 47 in 61 Ibs Input Tray MIT 480 mm 629 mm 520 mm 27 9 kg Including without paper Transfer Door 25 59 in 650 mm 2000 sheet 18 89 in 24 76 in 20 47 in 65 Ibs Input Tray HCI 480 mm 629 mm 520 mm 29 5 kg Including Transfer Door 25 59 in 650 mm EN Specifications 7 Table 1 4 Printer and Accessory Dimensions continued Item Height Width Depth Weight 35 23 in 18 90 in 42 32 Ibs 895 mm 480 mm 19 2 kg 14 17 in 14 56 in 10 50 Ibs 360 mm 370 mm 4 8 kg Duplexer 16 73 in 7 93 Ibs 425 mm 3 6 kg Envelope Feeder 14 37 in 7 71 Ibs 365 mm 3 5 kg LCO Stand 18 90 in 16 90 in 18 90 in 32 00 Ib only for the 7 480 mmmm 430 mm 480 mm 14 5 kg bin Tabletop Mailbox 1 Some toner will reside in the waste toner area of a toner cartridge when the toner supply is exhausted Therefore toner cartridge weight may be an unreliable indication of remaining toner supply 8 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Table 1 5 Electrical Specifications Volts Frequency Amps Watts average Printer 120 Vac 10 100 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 13 5 120v 50 60 Hz 2 Hz printing 500 standby 135 PowerSave Mode LaserJet 8000 21 LaserJet 8000 N 24 220 Va
105. 330 HP LaserJet Troubleshooting Process 2 of 2 331 Fan Location and Airflow 334 Engine Test Button 335 Sample Event Log 337 Sample Menu Map 341 Sample Configuration Page 343 Communications Link C link Cables Supported Daisy Chain Connections 346 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page 349 Repetitive Defect Ruler 408 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts 411 Paper Path Jam Locations 413 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection 416 Printer Sensors and Switches 433 Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids 434 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 1 of 5 435 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 2 of 5 436 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 8 of 5 437 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 4 of 5 438 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 5 of 5 439 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram 440 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN or HP Mopier 240 Printer and Paper Handling Components 445 Printer Covers and Doors 448 Printer Internal Components 1 of 4 450 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 4
106. 4 Registration Sensor PS1 216 Face Up Solenoid Assembly SL3 218 Transfer Roller Assembly 219 Tray 1 Assembly 221 Mailbox with Stapler Covers 223 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Ribbon Cable 224 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Mounting Screws 225 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Pulley Detail 226 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Connector 227 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Mounting Screws 228 Mailbox with Stapler Flipper Assembly Ground Wire 229 Mailbox with Stapler Input Paper Guide 230 Mailbox with Stapler Interlock Switch 231 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door Springs 232 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door E Clip 233 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door String Connection 234 Mailbox with Stapler Elevator Pulley Tension Spring 235 Mailbox with Stapler Pulley Housing Release 236 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Retaining Pin 237 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Release 238 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Housing 239 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Motor 240 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Motor Screws
107. 46 screws 157 self tapping 146 SDRAM DIMMs ordering 23 see also memory security status 80 82 select key 52 self test see configuration page sensors 7 bin tabletop mailbox empty bin 278 left output 283 diagram 433 locations 117 output paper 198 paper input unit PIU 214 registration 216 separation drum 115 separation pad cleaning 90 tray 1 211 separation rollers 2 x 500 sheet input tray 313 trays 2 amp 3 212 serial number 6 82 setting 75 78 185 troubleshooting 427 server troubleshooting 350 service approach 28 during and after the warranty 34 service manual ordering 25 service mode 75 settings and defaults 416 7 bin tabletop mailbox c link communication link 128 diagnostics 422 dimensions 7 identification label 6 operation 126 ordering 20 output modes 126 paper paths and components 124 parts and diagrams 464 removing and replacing 154 259 specifications 5 stand dimensions and weight 8 ordering 21 verifying installation 342 weight 7 shipping print media 13 short tray 7 7 bin tabletop mailbox 289 site requirements 45 size settings status 80 sizes paper 4 memory requirements 27 skew troubleshooting 404 427 SL3 see solenoid assembly slides see transparencies smeared toner troubleshooting 400 SME see Support Materials Europe SMO see Support Materials Organization solenoid assembly 218 solenoids 7 bin tabletop mailbox flipper 291 reversing mechanism 290 diagram 434 locations 117 space req
108. 52 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 455 Printer Internal Components 4 of 4 457 List of Figures xix Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 XX Stapler Internal Components 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Internal Components 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components EN List of Tables Table 1 1 Common features between the HP LaserJet 8000 HP LaserJet 8000 N HP LaserJet 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 2 Table 1 2 Comparison of Printer Features 3 Table 1 3 Paper Capacities and Sizes 4 Table 1 4 Printer and Accessory Dimensions 7 Table 1 5 Electrical Specifications 9 Table 1 6 Acoustic Emissions 10 Table 1 7 Accessories and Options 20 Table 1 8 Minimum Memory Requirements 27 Table 2 1 Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions 49 Table 3 1 Control Panel Keys 52 Table 3 2 Indicator Lights 53 Table 3 3 Factory Default Settings 56 Table 3 4 Information Menu 59 Table 3 5 Paper Handling Menu 60 Table 3 6 Print Quality Menu 62 Table 3 7 Printing Menu 64 Table 3 8 Configurati
109. 55 transfer roller assembly 219 cleaning 90 transferring images 115 transparencies guidelines 13 paper jams 428 transport belt and encoder assembly motor mailbox 241 tray 1 printing from 137 removing and replacing 210 221 specifications 4 tray 4 see 2000 sheet input tray or 2 x 500 sheet input tray tray 5 see 2 x 500 sheet input tray tray 7 short 7 bin tabletop mailbox 289 tray selection 54 troubleshooting 427 429 tray settings status 80 trays 2 amp 3 adjustment procedure 92 ordering 20 pickup motor 106 printing from 136 removing and replacing 212 222 specifications 4 trays 4 amp 5 removing and replacing 307 troubleshooting accessories 418 c link cables 346 communication 346 control panel 336 drum rotation functional check 410 engine test 335 event log 336 351 general 426 half self test functional check 409 high voltage power supply check 410 image quality 394 paper curl 431 paper jams 412 414 416 power on 332 print quality 394 printer stops hangs 428 process 328 toner cartridge 395 2 x 500 sheet input tray trays 4 amp 5 diagnostics 418 dimensions 7 identification label 6 operation 123 ordering 20 paper paths and components 122 parts and diagrams 462 printing from 137 removing and replacing 151 295 specifications 4 verifying installation 342 weight 7 2000 sheet input tray tray 4 adjustment procedure 94 95 dimensions 7 electrical specifications 9 identification label 6 ordering 20 paper
110. 6 000CN 1 25 Plate Guard RB1 6522 000CN 1 30 Diverter Assembly RG9 1150 000CN 1 CH101 Screw w washer M3X8 XA9 0872 000CN 6 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 449 Figure 8 3 Printer Internal Components 1 of 4 450 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 3 Printer Internal Components 1 of 4 Ref Description Part Number QTY 01 Transfer Guide Bushing RB1 6441 000CN 2 02 Transfer Guide RF5 1394 000CN 1 03 Transfer Roller RF5 1412 000CN 1 05 Damper Holder Front RB1 6461 000CN 1 06 Damper Holder Rear RB1 6462 000CN 1 08 Clutch Cover RB1 6468 000CN 1 10 Main Motor RH7 1260 000CN 1 15 Main Motor Cable RG5 1919 000CN 1 20 Face Down Delivery Assembly RG5 1874 000CN 1 21A Fusing Assembly 100 120V RG5 4447 000CN 1 21B Fusing Assembly 220 240V RG5 4448 000CN 1 21C Fusing Assembly 100 120V Exchange C3166 69001 21D Fusing Assembly 220 240V Exchange C3166 69013 22 Face Up Solenoid Assembly RG5 1875 000CN 1 23 Feeder Assembly RG5 1834 000CN 1 24 Registration Assembly RG5 1833 040CN 1 24A Electromagnetic Clutch RH7 5119 000CN 1 25 Tray 1 Pickup Assembly RG5 1880 100CN 1 26 Tray 1 Feed Roller RB1 6730 000CN 1 27 Tray 1 Separation Pad RF5 1455 000CN 1 28 Tray 1 Door RG5 1883 000CN 1 29 Tray 1 Internal Cover Shield RB1 6749 000CN 1 30 Paper Input Unit PIU RG5 1852 160CN 1 30A Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange C3166 6901 1 3
111. 6 000CN 1 not shown Power Box Includes bracket clip C4781 60500 1 not shown Jumper Cable Short C4781 60501 1 not shown Jumper Cable Long C4781 60502 1 32 Top Cover Includes label RF5 2766 000CN 1 33 Spacer latch RB2 3705 000CN 1 462 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 8 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Internal Components continued 34 Latch XZ9 0379 000CN 1 Note All screws are included in the Screws Kit and all shipping locks are included in the Shipping Locks Kit EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 463 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components Figure 8 9 EN 464 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams Table 8 9 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Internal Components Reference Description Part Number QTY 1 Top Cover Assembly Upper Guide RG1 3838 000CN 1 2 Bin Full Sensor RA2 2484 000CN 1 3 Flag Sensor RA2 2485 000CN 1 4 Bushing RA2 2505 000CN 1 5 Front Cover RF1 4004 000CN 1 6 Back Cover RA2 2455 000CN 1 7 Power Supply RH3 2205 000CN 1 8 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA RG1 3853 000CN 1 Assembly 9 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7 5223 000CN 1 10 Solenoid Flipper RH7 5225 000CN 1 11 Reversing Mechanism Motor RF7 1395 000CN 1 12 Plate Motor Cover RA2 2541 000CN 1 13 Odd Face down Bin Assembly RG1 3836 000CN 1 14 Even Face down Bin Assembly RG1 3837 000CN 1 15 Reversing Tray Face up RA2 2487 000CN 1 16
112. 65 table 8 9 on page 465 RA2 3842 000CN Rail table 8 9 on page 465 RB1 6409 000CN RB1 6414 000CN Sensor Arm Spring Feeder Assembly Block Shaft Holding Front table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6415 000CN RB1 6417 000CN Block Shaft Holding Rear Sensor Arm PS1 table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 RB1 6441 000CN Transfer Guide Bushing table 8 3 on page 451 RB1 6461 000CN RB1 6462 000CN Damper Holder Front Damper Holder Rear table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 RB1 6468 000CN RB1 6480 000CN Clutch Cover Cover Left Lower Special Order table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6484 000CN Open Close Stopper table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6489 000CN AC Access Cover table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6490 000CN Left Output Bin Special Order table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6491 000CN RB1 6492 000CN Left Output Bin Cover Switch Special Order table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6493 000CN Spring Compression Special Order table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6494 000CN Front Cover Printer Engine table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6495 000CN Front Door table 8 2 on page 449 RB1 6498 000CN Right Lower Cover Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal table 8 2 on page 449 EN Numerical Parts List 477 Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued RB1 6507 000CN
113. 7 Paper Jam Detection The PIU Sensor PS2 the Registration Sensor PS1 the Fuser Delivery Sensor PS1403 and the Face Down Delivery Sensor PS1402 detect paper moving through the printer see figure 5 15 on page 118 and table 5 1 on page 119 for a description of each sensor and illustration of its locations If a paper jam is detected the DC coniolet immediately stops the printing process and causes a 3 fi message to be displayed on the control panel If a panel ain occurs in the Envelope Feeder duplexer 2000 sheet Input Tray Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray or 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox the 13 Tam message will indicate the approximate location See Chapter 7 for more details Printer Timing The Formatter PCA and the DC Controller PCA share information during printer operation This information consists of printer status command and dot image data Figure 5 23 and figure 5 24 show the general timing of the printer events Table 5 7 lists the events that take place during normal printer operation Table 5 7 Printer Timing Period Timing Purpose WAIT From power on to the end of Main Motor initial Clear the drum surface potential rotation and clean the Transfer Roller STBY From the end of the WAIT or the LSTR period until Maintain the printer in the READY standby the input of the PRNT signal from the Formatter state PCA Or from the end of the LSTR period to power off
114. 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 259 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Front Cover Figure 6 90 Front cover 1 of 3 1 Remove 2 screws callout 1 260 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 91 Front cover 2 of 3 2 Loosen the right side of the Front Cover and pull it toward you approximately 0 5 inch 1 5 centimeters to clear the tabs callout 1 3 Release and clear the tabs on the left side of the Front Cover callout 2 EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 261 Figure 6 92 Front cover 3 of 3 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the handle as you remove the cover The handle can easily catch on the cover 4 To clear the handle rotate the Front Cover to the right and remove it as shown in figure 6 92 262 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Back Cover Figure 6 93 Back cover 1 of 2 1 Remove 2 screws EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 263 Figure 6 94 Back cover 2 of 2 2 Pull the Back Cover toward you to remove it 264 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Top Cover Figure 6 95 Top cover 1 of 4 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 and the Back Cover page 263 2 Open the Top Cover and remove the Top Cover s screw and bushing callout 1 3 Remove the grounding screw callout 2 EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 265 Figure 6 96 Top cover 2 of 4 4 Remove the screw from the PCA 266 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN m WO Figure
115. 8 XB4 7300 809CN table 8 5 on page 456 Screw with Washer M3X8 XA9 0872 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 6 on page 458 Screw w washer M3X20 XA9 0817 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 5 on page 456 472 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Sensor Arm PS1 Sensor Arm PS2 RB1 6417 000CN RB1 6557 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 Sensor Arm Spring Feeder Assembly RB1 6409 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Sensor Arm Spring Paper Input Unit RB1 6558 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Sensor Cable Feeder Assembly RG5 1843 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Sensor Cable Paper Input Unit Shaft RG5 1859 000CN RA2 3842 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 9 on page 465 Solenoid Flipper RH7 5225 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism RH7 5223 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Spacer latch RB2 3705 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Spring Tension Spring Compression Special Order RA2 2513 000CN RB1 6493 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 2 on page 449 Spring Torsion Special Order Stapler Assembly RB1 6509 000CN C4787 60500 table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 7 on page 460 table 8 1 on page 446 Stapler Cartridges 3 pack C3772A table 8 1 on page 446 Stapler Control PCA C4787 60501
116. 91817 161514131211109 87 654321 20 19 1817 16 15 14 13 12 11 1 20f19 1817 16 15 141312 11 Wboer poer ai 4a 802P 87654321 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 o eeoer eozr 19 20g TWODECK CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY k3ZIS1 23Z1S1 egzis 3ZIST ANO k3ZISN Z3ZISN 3ZNsn 3ZISN ANO Lo voer 2345678910 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 do Xo VLO9LP 2345 1 fem sozr angladd Gaka3a aNvIG34 avidas ek goer 206P ezoer o o CASSETTE SIZE PCB E wo ENG nna 5 O HEWLETT PACKARD Expanding Possibilities Copyright 1998 Hewlett Packard Co Printed in USA Manual Part No C4085 91017 Printed on at least 50 Total Recycled Fiber with at least 10 Post Consumer Paper C4085 91017 Ca sanniqissog buipuedxg aqauvyovd o1131M3H Enue 9014199 SIBJUNA pz 19140 N 19 19s8 AH pue NG 0008 N 0008 0008 38f19s2 dH
117. CP IEEE 1284 ECP IEEE 1284 ECP IEEE 1284 ECP Interfaces Parallel A to C Parallel A to C Parallel A to C Parallel A to C connector connector connector connector JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO JetDirect EIO Duplexer Optional Optional Standard Standard Hard Disk Optional Optional Optional Standard 1 Printer memory is optimized with Memory Enhancement technology MEt DIMMs available for use include 4 8 16 and 64 MB modules See Accessories and Supplies in Chapter 8 for option product numbers 32 MB modules are compatible but not available from HP SDRAM available includes 4 8 16 32 and 64 MB modules EDO RAM available includes 4 8 and 16 MB modules A maximum of 192 MB RAM can be configured 2 Eight MB on board RAM one 8 MB DIMM 3 Eight MB on board RAM one 16 MB DIMM EN Printer Features 3 Paper Capacities and Sizes Table 1 3 Paper Capacities and Sizes Tray or Bin Tray 1 multipurpose Tray 2 and Optional 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 Tray 3 and Optional 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Tray 5 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Capacity up to 100 sheets up to 500 sheets up to 500 sheets up to 1 000 sheets Paper Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 Executive A5 Legal 11 x 17 ISO A3 JIS B5 JIS B4 JPostD Custom sizes Minimum 3 67 x 7 5 in 93 x 191 mm Maximum 11 7 x 17 7 in 297 x 450 mm Note You may print on both sides of paper that is equal to or larger tha
118. E KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKEZZZ KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE EE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE Figure 1 6 Sample 5 Page Coverage EN Service Approach 29 Note The toner cartridge may print less than 15 000 images if routinely printing very dense print Conversely when routinely printing pages with less coverage such as short memos or in EconoMode the toner cartridge may print more than 15 000 images However EconoMode does not extend toner cartridge component life For best results always use anew toner cartridge before the expiration date stamped on the toner cartridge box Refilled Toner Cartridges amp Non HP Staple Cartridges While Hewlett Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled toner cartridges and non HP staple cartridges during the warranty period or while under a maintenance contract their use is not supported for the following reasons e Repairs resulting from the use of refilled toner cartridges and non HP staple cartridges are not covered under the Hewlett Packard warranty or maintenance contract e Hewlett Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled toner cartridge or non HP staple cartridge functions at
119. ECT to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item Press to change setting Press SELECT to activate choice 76 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Table 3 12 Service Mode Menu Items continued Service Mode Item Menu Items Choices Actions Required For factory test purposes ONLY DO NOT change Press to step through values above cursor Press SELECT to activate choice Cursor will move to next digit Printer will set new number into NVRAM after least significant digit is selected Pressing MENU or ITEM before completing all digits will cancel the new setting Pressing MENU returns printer to the main menu system Pressing ITEM moves to the next menu item Press SELECT to activate Printer returns to r when completed EN Service Mode 77 Setting Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number The page count maintenance count and printer serial numbers are stored in Non Volatile Memory is the total number of images printed by the printer iT is the page count when the next preventative maintenance should be performed every 350 000 images and is the printer serial number also located on the printer back c
120. ER REGULAR WIDE A4 NO APPEND CR TO LF NO PRINT PS ERRORS OFF H0 TIMEQUT 15 1 0 BUFFER AUTO PARALLEL HIGH SPEED YES PARALLEL ADY FUNCT IONS 0N SERIAL PACING DTR DSR SERIAL BAUD RATE 9600 SERIAL DTR POLARITY HIGH CFG NETWORK NO RESET MEMORY RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS RESET ACTIVE 1 0 CHANNEL RESET ALL 1 0 CHANNELS Figure 3 3 EN Menu Map Page Testing the Printer 83 Table 3 14 Key to Figure 3 3 Information Menu lets you print information pages and perform a paper path test Paper Handling Menu contains paper handling options Print Quality Menu lets you set print quality settings Printing Menu contains various print options Configuration Menu contains various printer settings 1 0 Menu contains communication settings Resets Menu shows options for resetting the printer 84 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Cold Reset CAUTION EN Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults except Service Mode settings back to the factory settings Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration To avoid making changes to your configuration remove the JetDirect card before performing a Cold Reset If possible print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset This will document current settings for later reference To perform a Cold Reset 1 2 Turn the printer off While holding the Go key down turn the printer on I 3s and t
121. G Overview eee Engine 16St 0 ecccigeaces ee darien ii brea ee eed oo Displaya a ehh hak ee ane ve Ral Me AN ete ee oe Da Faas Event Log eee Information PageS 1 2 2 0 00 c eee Menu Mapa xy pg drian iai mahia mg eed del dee ede dea Configuration Page 0 eee ee EN EN Communication a 346 Interface Troubleshooting 0000 ceca eee 346 Verify Host System Operation aaa 350 Verify Network and Server Operation 350 Printer Messages 2 351 Control Panel Messages and Errors 351 Event Log Table 0 00 cece eee 352 Image Quality 0 0 0 0 eee 394 Check the Toner Cartridge 2000 eee eae 395 Image Quality Tables 00 000 cee eee eee 396 Repetitive Defect Ruler 0000 ce eee 408 Image System Troubleshooting 409 High Voltage Power Supply Check 410 Troubleshooting Checks 0 00 cece ees 412 Paper Jams 30 naa paka cet eee dees deeb ahi vee tend a 412 General Paper Path Troubleshooting 414 Paper Path Test 0 000 eee eee eee 415 Diagnostics on Accessories 0 0 00 cee eee ee 418 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics 418 7 Bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics 422 General Troubleshooting Information 4 426 Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions
122. HP Customer Information Center 800 752 0900 U S Only See Chapter 1 Technical Assistance for documentation and training media product numbers Common Hardware See table 6 1 in Chapter 6 for a list of the common hardware used in the printer Accessories and Supplies 443 Illustrations and Parts Lists The following illustrations and their associated parts tables list the field replaceable components for this printer Where applicable the exchange part number is listed immediately following the original equipment part numbers This chapter also provides two cross reference tables of all the parts listed in this chapter table 8 10 on page 467 lists the parts in alphabetical order and table 8 11 on page 475 lists the parts in numerical order Both tables are cross referenced to the appropriate figure and reference designator in this chapter 444 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Figure 8 1 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN or HP Mopier 240 Printer and Paper Handling Components EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 445 Table 8 1 Printer and Paper Handling Components Exchange Service Ref Description Product Number Part Number Number QTY 01 Formatter Assembly C4186 67901 01A Formatter Assembly Exchange C4186 69001 ex 05 Toner Cartridge C3909A 06 Envelope Feeder C3765B C3765 60501 serv 1 07 2000 she
123. Input Tray 2 Remove 2 screws and the Top Cover the one with a label 304 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 135 Front Top Cover 2 of 3 3 From inside of the unit release the central tabs EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 305 Figure 6 136 Front Top Cover 3 of 3 4 Push the front top cover to the left to release the remaining tabs Note Align the pins when you replace the Top Front Cover 306 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 Figure 6 137 Trays 4 amp 5 1 of 2 1 Open the tray and pull it out to the stop callout 1 2 As you pull out the tray tip up the end as shown in callout 2 to release the stop mechanism at the right rear of the tray EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 307 Figure 6 138 Trays 4 amp 5 2 of 2 To Reinstall 1 Tip the end of the tray downward Align the guides with the left rear corner of the tray and the arrow at the lower rear center of the tray 2 Insert the tray no more than 2 inches 5 centimeters into the chassis 3 Tip the end of the tray up to engage the tray stop mechanism located at the right rear of the tray opening 4 Slide the tray until it latches into place 308 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly Figure 6 139 Pickup Assembly 1 of 2 1 Remove trays 4 and 5 page 307 the Right Cover page 301 and the Vertical Transfer Unit VTU page 298 2
124. Input Unit Remove both Tray 2 and Tray 3 to prevent damage to the PIU plastic sensor flags Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 Remove the Tray 1 Assembly see figure 6 53 on page 221 Bb O N Remove the Right Lower Door Assembly see figure 6 15 on page 174 QI Remove 4 screws figure 6 32 callout 1 6 Slide the assembly out from the chassis approximately 3 inches and unplug the connector inside the right end figure 6 32 callout 2 7 Continue sliding the assembly out of the chassis Paper Input Unit PIU 195 To Reinstall Make sure that Trays 2 and 3 are removed when reinstalling the Paper Input Unit 196 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN FEES Keren cr L t NAI N DC Controller PCA 1 Remove the Formatter Assembly see figure 6 25 on page 186 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 Remove the High Voltage Power Supply see figure 6 41 on page 205 Unplug 18 connectors from the PCA figure 6 33 callout 1 Remove 2 screws figure 6 33 callout 2 from the left side of the PCA and 2 self tapping screws figure 6 33 callout 3 from the right side of the PCA 6 Release two retaining clips figure 6 33 callout 4 and carefully tip the left side of the PCA outward to clear the Formatter PCA connector from the card cage To Reinstall Make sure the retaining clip posts figure 6 33 callout 4 and the two
125. Left Cover page 297 2 Unplug the connector callout 1 from the power supply Notice that the release tab is at the rear of the connector Remove 2 screws callout 2 Lift the power supply off the locating pins and slide it to the left to free it from the chassis To Reinstall 1 Align the power supply with the locating tabs 2 Plug in the power supply connector 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 317 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Main Cable Figure 6 148 Main Cable 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 296 the Left Cover page 297 and Trays 4 and 5 page 307 2 Unplug both size sensing connectors inside the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray cavity Or Remove the size sensing PCA s holder and unplug the cables 318 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 149 Main Cable 2 of 2 3 Unplug 4 connectors from the controller PCA 3 from the Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 1 from the Paper Deck Assembly and 2 from the size sensing PCAs 4 Remove the main cable from the plastic clips EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 319 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Storage Paper Tray Figure 6 150 Storage Paper Tray 1 Remove Trays 4 and 5 page 307 Open the storage tray s door Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the tabs inside the holes indicated in figure 6 150 Note Be sure to align the door s latch when you replace the Storage Paper Tray 320 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Fro
126. Log Category Message 13 22 03 13 22 04 13 22 05 EN Belt jam or Head Exit 1 Exit 2 sensors timeout in the Multibin Recommended Action 1 Remove the media at the double belt system and or Delivery Head Assembly 2 Make sure that the double belt both belts moves freely 3 Make sure that both Exit 1 and 2 sensor flags on the Delivery Head Assembly move freely 4 Ensure the parallel position of the double belt system 5 Make sure that the Metal Tape is in place and in good condition 6 Check the fingers They must be over the ejector rollers on the Delivery Head Assembly 7 Check the Delivery Head Assembly reset cycle If it does not work properly replace the flat ribbon cable that connects to the Delivery Head Assembly If the problem persists replace the Delivery Head Assembly 8 Check the Transport Belt reset cycle If it does not work properly replace the Transport Belt If the problem persists replace the Transport Belt Motor 9 If the problem persists replace the Multibin Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions Printer Messages 383 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message 13 2206 Elevator jam in the Multibin 1 Make sure that the blind Mailbox cover and scan bar ar
127. Main motor Laser scanner fan Low voltage power supply fan Formatter fan Delivery unit fan Registration clutch Paper pick up motor Trays 2 3 feed solenoid Feed clutch Figure 7 19 O O J12 1 J218 1 2 2 3 4 3 4 J208 1 J216 1 3 J13 41 N23 J210 1 2 2 2 3 1 3 J26 1 J25 3 J225 1 2 2 2 3 R 3 N72 J16 1 J209 2 Pick up PCA 1 J1202 14 1 J1201 20 J219 2 3 8 N 1 I J1203 2 H Lo Gr 9 DC Controller PCA MMRDY L when the main motor runs correctly MMOTD L to run the main motor 24VB H to rotate at high speed L to FAN1D rotate at low speed FAN1S L when the exhaust fan runs correctly H to rotate at high speed L to FAN2D rotate at low speed FAN2S L when the exhaust fan runs correctly H to rotate at high speed L to FAN3D rotate at low speed FAN3S LU when the suction fan runs correctly H to rotate at high speed L to FAN4D rotate at low speed FAN4S L when the exhaust fan runs correctly 24VA REGCLD L to run the registration roller FEDAD FEDAND 3 FEDBD Pick up motor control signal FEDBND 24VA PUPSLD L to lower the arm FEEDCLD L to turn the feed roller DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 4 of 5 438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Tray 1 PCA iaa J1302 2 r Li
128. P LaserJet 8000 N DN Engine 14 External View of HP Mopier 240 aaa 16 Formatter AssemblieS 0 000 cee 18 Accessories and Options 0c eee e eee 19 Ordering Information a 20 Hard DISK mwaaa ma 0 cae de ee eee Ge eerie eee eae eee 26 Determining Memory Requirements 26 Service Approach 0 000 eee 28 Ordering Parts c ccc cee eae 28 Exchange Program 00 c cece eee eee 29 Consumables 00x iva ccceina re cian ee ese ae ceed oes 29 Toner Cartridge Life 0 ee eee 29 Refilled Toner Cartridges amp Non HP Staple Cartridges 30 Recycling Toner Cartridges 0 000 cece eens 30 Technical Assistance 0 000 c cece eens 31 HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology 31 HP CompuServe Forum a 32 Internet nsa ee oe ee adie oe Bae uate eed dee BEY 32 World Wide Web 0 00 cee eee eee 32 HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line 32 OiherAreaSs lt 2 kkk hm eure YEE EMRE RSG od oe 32 Warranty 0 00 33 Regulatory Information 0 0 0 ccc ees 35 FCC Regulations 0 0 0 ccc eee es 35 Environmental Product Stewardship aa 36 Protecting the Environment cee eens 36 vii viii Material Safety Data Sheet 0 000 ccc eens 38 Environmental Conformity 0c eee eee eee 39 Declaration of Conformity 000 eee 4
129. PCA Output Paper Sensor 000 eee eee 198 PCA Paper SIZ 0 ene 202 Power Supply High Voltage HVPS 20005 205 Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS 005 206 Registration Assembly 0000 cece eee 207 Roller and Separation Pad Tray1 aa 210 Feed Roller nannan KANA NG Ga BA manaig 210 Separation Pad cc eee 211 Rollers Tray Pickup Feed and Separation 212 Sensor Paper Input Unit PS52 a 214 Sensor Registration PS1 a 216 Solenoid Assembly SL3 Face Up 000005 218 Transfer Roller Assembly 0c eee eens 219 Tray 1 Assembly 0000 cee eee 221 Tray 2 and 3 Assemblies 0 0000 ees 222 Mailbox With Stapler 1 0 2 0 0 0c eee eee 223 OVENS a Bette nana Naaalaala Oe ea eae ae Naa 223 Delivery Head Assembly nananana eee ae eee 224 Flipper Assembly 0 00 0 cc cence eee 227 Input Paper Guide 1 6 0 20 00 es 230 Interlock Switch 0 0 ees 231 Jam Access Door Assembly 0 0000ee eee 232 Lower Elevator Pulley Assemblies 235 Metallic Tape and Housing Assembly 237 Motor Delivery Head Position 240 Motor Transport Belt and Encoder Assembly 241 Paper Bins and Blind Cover a 244 PCA Controller ces scan NAA ea Ra RES wee ase 245 Strings AMOU soci wa wa ee ca
130. Pad Tray 1 211 Rollers Tray Pickup Feed and Separation Figure 6 48 Tray 2 and 3 Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 212 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Note There are three rollers for each tray the Pickup Roller the Feed Roller and the Separation Roller The Feed and Separation Rollers are interchangeable with each other and between trays The Pickup Rollers are interchangeable between trays Tray 2 Pickup Roller figure 6 48 callout 1 Tray 2 Feed Roller figure 6 48 callout 2 Tray 2 Separation Roller figure 6 48 callout 3 Tray 3 Pickup Roller figure 6 48 callout 4 Tray 3 Feed Roller figure 6 48 callout 5 Tray 3 Separation Roller figure 6 48 callout 6 6 8 Remove Trays Note The Feed and Separation rollers have protruding tabs and the pickup rollers have recessed retaining tabs Be careful not to lose the plastic torque limiters located behind the Separation Rollers figure 6 48 callout 7 2 From inside the tray cavity remove the rollers by pinching the retainer tabs together and sliding the roller off the shaft EN Rollers Tray Pickup Feed and Separation 213 Sensor Paper Input Unit PS2 1 Remove the following components in the order listed Toner Cartridge Trays 2 and 3 Transfer Roller see figure 6 52 on page 219 Registration Assembly see figure 6 44 on page 208 Front Cover see figure 6 6 on page 163 Tray 1 Assembly see figure 6 53 on page 221 Right Lowe
131. Power Distribution System EN Power Distribution System 99 AC Power Distribution The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is connected and the power switch is on A toner cartridge must be installed and the top access door must be closed before AC voltage is supplied to the DC power circuits or the Fusing Assembly Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection There are two overcurrent overvoltage devices in this printer The resettable circuit breaker CB101 shuts off AC input power to the LVPS in case of an AC overcurrent condition To reset remove the LVPS and press in the circuit breaker button figure 5 3 callout 1 e Fuse 101 interrupts AC input power to the 24V DC and 5V DC power circuits To check or replace the fuse figure 5 3 callout 2 you must remove the LVPS Figure 5 3 Low Voltage Power Supply 100 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN High Voltage Power Distribution The High Voltage Power Supply HVPS see figure 5 4 applies a DC biased AC voltage to the primary charging roller and the developing roller and a programmed DC voltage depending upon the phase of the printing process to the Transfer Roller See the General Timing Diagram figure 5 23 on page 140 for HVPS timing information Toner Cartridge Detection A toner level detector inside the toner cartridge is connected to the HVPS when the toner cartridge is installed If the toner level drops below a predefined level the 1 ih
132. S on page 205 for instructions Replace the DC Controller PCA See PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions Recommended Action Try reprinting the job Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Replace the DC Controller See PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions EN AaBDCC AaBboCc AaBbbCc AaBoCc ANBoCc AABbCc AaBbCc AaBbCce AaBbCce AaBbCc EN Table 7 11 Dropout continued Possible Cause 4 High Voltage Power Supply PCA is defective 5 Transfer Roller is defective Recommended Action Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA See Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions Replace the Transfer Roller See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 219 for instructions Table 7 12 Black Lines parallel or perpendicular to path Possible Cause 1 Toner cartridge is not seated properly 2 Toner cartridge is damaged 3 Fusing Assembly is contaminated or damaged 4 Static Eliminator Strip teeth are contaminated or defective 5 Repetitive defect If the lines are repeated at a consistent interval down the page this is a repetitive defect Recommended Action Remove the cartridge and reinsert it Inspect the toner cartridge for a scratched or streaked photosensitive drum Clean the printer see Cleaning the Printer and Accessories
133. S mea eee Ka eR eR at Ge ee aie eae 282 Face Up Sensors PCA 7 77 77 283 Reversing Mechanism Motor 1 of 2 284 Reversing Mechanism Motor 2 of 2 285 Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 1 of 3 286 Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 2 of 3 287 Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 3 of 3 288 Short Tray7 eee ee ee ee eee ee 289 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism 290 Solenoid Flipper 291 Handle 292 Latching Mechanism 293 Cover Latch 5 eee ee ee ee ee ee eee 294 Orientation of the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 295 Back Cover 7 7 2 e 2 7 7 296 Left Cover 2 2 s2 2 226 3s ee eee oo sets ae 297 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 1 of 3 298 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 2 of 3 299 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 3 of 3 300 Right Cover 1 0f3 301 Right Cover 2 of 3 302 Right Cover 3 of 3 303 Front Top Cover 1 of 3 304 Front Top Cover 2 of 3 305 Front Top Cover 3 of 3 306 Trays4 825 1 0f2 307 Trays 4 85 20f2 308 Pickup Assembly 1 of 2 309 Pickup Assembly 2 of 2 310 Figure 6 141 Figure 6 142 Fig
134. Stops printing and hangs on certain jobs 1 Remove any non HP Memory DIMMs and retry 2 Set to 300 DPI and retry Top 2 3 of portrait page is lighter 1 Replace the Toner Cartridge and retry 2 Replace the Transfer Guide Will not print to Mailbox 1 Print the Configuration Page Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller 2000 sheet Input Tray and Multibin Mailbox are listed in the Paper Handling Options section 2 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page 428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Inspect the C link Cables for pushed out pins Replace the C link Cables Connect the Multibin Mailbox directly to the printer If it is now recognized on the Configuration Page replace the 2000 sheet Input Tray Controller Replace the Multibin Mailbox Controller Replace the Multibin Mailbox External Power Supply Replace the entire Multibin Mailbox Wrinkling Envelopes 1 Place the Fusing Levers in up position and retry the envelopes 2 Try new media Make sure that the envelopes are within specifications See the HP LaserJet Family Paper Specifications Guide Poor Fusing 1 Make sure that the Fusing Levers are in the down position for cut sheet paper Try new media Make sure that the media is within specifications Make sure that the AC power does not fluctuate out of range during the print cycle See table 1 5 on page 9 See the HP Laserjet Family Paper Specifications Guide F
135. TE SENSE signal MPTLS PICK UP UNIT PAPER SENSE signal FEEDS 8 TOP LEFT DOOR OPEN signal UDOORS General Troubleshooting Information 433 Printer Sensors and Switches SW1601 Paper size sensing switch SW1602 Paper size sensing switch SW1603 Paper size sensing switch SW1604 Paper size sensing switch SW1401 Doors open switch DC Controller PCA Switch Sensor PCA Face down delivery roller o Fa ea Ae Aa i Flapper I CO Upper fixing f a fl a roller Photosensitive f Re tran ti 3T anu feeding 11 Q 1 drum gistration O roller p ga tf Tag Ch ar sol Face up rusino unit 1 O On plate delivery roller delivery C R Transfer Feed I lier 2 sta roller Lower charging ro SL3 fusing roller roller oe wsreenossaasareneej ermes f oerseesne waaaawanawgssas feasa l Feed i roller 1 Tray2 Gur Separation roller Tray 3 Figure 7 15 Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids 434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN PSI y11 3 au Registration paper Sensor Pick up PCA LI PS2 13 3 J1205 11P5VBDOR 2 2 GND paper sensor A 3VFEEDS J1201 14 J219 8 PS3 14 3 J1206 1 P5VBDOR z 2 GND 31RDOORS i Pick up unit Paper pick up 9 k position sensor sensor PS1201 Tray 3 1 sensor 1 PS1202 Tray 2 1 sensor i t PS1203 Tray 3 t paper level i YUR sensor 1 i Tray 3 i PS1204 paper level ME sensor 2 t Tray 2 i PS1205 paper level YUKI sensor 1 i n
136. TH1 The DC Controller maintains a temperature of about 190 C during print mode If the fusing system overheats about 230 C TH1 opens interrupting power to the fusing heater causing a 3 If the fusing system exceeds 240 C the thermal fuse opens moving power away from the fuser Halogen heater Upper fixing roller Toner Paper Lower fixing roller DC bias Figure 5 13 Image Fusing 116 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Paper Paths and Components Printer Duplexer and Envelope Feeder The components of the printer paper path are illustrated in figure 5 14 Figure 5 15 and table 5 1 illustrate and describe all of the printer sensors solenoids clutches motors and fans Laser Scanner _ Toner Cartridge Photosensor Drum Transfer Roller Registration Assembly Tray 1 Feed Roller Face Down Delivery Assembly Envelope Feeder Face Up Bin Output to Multi Bin Mailbox Tray 2 Feed Roller Tray 2 Separation Roller Lower PIU Feed Roller 2000 Sheet Input Unit Path Tray 3 Pick Up Roller Tray 3 Feed Roller Paper Path gt Tray 3 Separation Roller Paper Input Unit PIU Figure 5 14 Printer Paper Paths EN Paper Paths and Components 117 PS1401 Palaua PS1302 SW1401 PS1301 PS1403 Multi Purpose Tray PCA Switch Sensor PCA y SW1601 SW1604 Fan 2 SMT1 Tray 3 SW1601 SW1604 PS1 PIU PCA Figure 5 15 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans
137. Table 7 10 Fading Print Possible Cause 1 Toner supply is low 2 Print Density is set incorrectly 3 EconoMode is on EconoMode saves toner by reducing the dot density This may appear to be a print quality problem in some cases 4 Paper does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process Recommended Action Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA See Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions Replace the DC Controller PCA See PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions Inspect and reseat the connectors Replace cables as necessary Recommended Action Shake the cartridge gently to redistribute the toner or replace the cartridge Change to a darker setting and retry printing Turn EconoMode off Verify that EconoMode is not being enabled by either the printer driver or the job application Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Image Quality 397 AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AQABboCc AaBboCc AaBbbCc AaBoCc AQBdCc Table 7 10 Fading Print continued Possible Cause 5 Transfer Roller is defective or incorrectly installed If the Transfer Roller loses conductivity it cannot effectively pull t
138. Tray 1 Lifting Plate Solenoid Tray 1 Drive Unit SL3 Left Output Bin Delivery Solenoid Left Rear Corner of Chassis behind diverter door SMT1 Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor PIU right side SW1401 Doors Open Switch Switch Sensor PCA Tray 2 SW1601 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2 SW1602 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 2 SW1603 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS EN Paper Paths and Components 119 Table 5 1 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans continued Control Device Title Location Tray 2 SW1604 Tray 2 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3 SW1601 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3 SW1602 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3 SW1603 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS Tray 3 SW1604 Tray 3 Paper Size Sensing Switch Behind LVPS 120 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 Components For information on this component please refer to the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories Multibin Mailbox Components For information on this component please refer to the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories Paper Paths and Components 121
139. Vertical sensor delay 2 4 Entry sensor activated Open the top and back covers and remove any too long remaining media Check each bin output Perform a sensor check 2 6 Face up sensor activated too long Check the sensor flag the optical sensor or cabling Replace the sensor PCAs 2 8 Reversing area sensor Replace the controller PCA activated too long 2 10 Vertical sensor activated too long 1 1 Door open or interlock Close the top cover and paper access door switch deactivated Firmly attach the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox to the printer Perform a sensor check Check the bin full and interlock sensor PCA cabling and controller PCA 1 2 Bin full when running Remove paper from all the bins the standalone test EN Diagnostics on Accessories 425 General Troubleshooting Information Miscellaneous Problems and Solutions The following lists symptoms and typical solutions to those problems Abnormal noises are evident such as grinding or chattering when main motor energized From the EP Area 1 Replace the toner cartridge 2 Replace the Main Gear Assembly See Main Gear Assembly on page 191 for instructions From Tray 2 or 3 1 Verify proper paper loading acceptable media 2 Inspect the fingers on the paper trays to ensure proper paper size detection 3 Replace the Paper Input Unit See Paper Input Unit PIU on page 195 for instructions 4 Replace the Main Gear Assembly See Main Gear Assembly on
140. aa i PS1206 ray paper level i YLIK sensor 2 i i PS1207 Tray 3 gasa LIC sensor i I Tray 2 PS1208 mra GLI sensor t Geen oes eee Tray 1PCA tie as 1 PS1301 4 Tray 1 paper 1 yK sensor PS1302 Lifting plate I t 4 Figure 7 16 EN 6 12 10 7 8 5 J1301 7 3 J209 5 4 16 10 14 15 11 J214 7 P5VB3 REGS P5VBDOR FEEDS RDOORS LDECKC UDECKG LPVS2 LPVS1 UPVS2 UPVS1 LDECKS UDECKS MPTPS MTPLS PSVB2 DC Controller PCA L when the sensor detects paper L when the sensor detects paper L when the pick up unit door is open L when the sensor detects Tray 3 L when the sensor detects Tray 2 These sensors detect amount of the paper remaining in Tray 3 These sensors detect amount of the paper remaining in Tray 2 L when there is no paper in Tray 3 L when there is no paper in Tray 2 L when there is no paper in Tray 1 U when the lifting plate rises DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 1 of 5 General Troubleshooting Information 435 Switch Sensor PCA DC Controller PCA H when the face down tray is fully loaded with paper L when the sensor detects the paper H when the sensor detects the paper H when the upper cover or left cover is open The voltage drops as the fuser roller temperature rises Det
141. ace Down Delivery Assembly RG5 1874 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Face up Bin Full amp Sensor PCA Fan 1 RG1 3816 000CN RH7 1266 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 5 on page 456 Fan 2 RH7 1266 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fan 3 RH7 1271 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fan 3 Cable RG5 1921 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Fan 4 Feed 8 Separation Rollers 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray RH7 1289 000CN RF5 1834 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 8 on page 462 Feed amp Separation Rollers Paper Input Unit Feeder Assembly RF5 1426 000CN RG5 1834 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 4 on page 453 Flag Sensor RA2 2485 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Formatter Assembly C4186 67901 table 8 1 on page 446 Formatter Assembly Exchange table 8 1 on page 446 Formatter Shield RF5 1466 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Front Cover Printer Engine RB1 6494 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Front Cover 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox RF1 4004 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Front Door RB1 6495 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Front Door Cover Storage Tray RB2 3668 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Front Door Latch XZ9 0379 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Front LED PCA RG5 4441 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Front Panel Control Panel Display Front Top Cover RG5 4384 000CN RF5 2762 000CN table 8 2 on page
142. ace up delivery slot input paper guide at 107 mm sec The entry sensor ES senses paper arrival and then the face up down diverter solenoid actuates only if the paper is going to the left output bin If the paper has to reach any standard output bin this solenoid will not actuate and the paper will go into the reversing area Delivering Paper If the paper is going to the left output bin the face up delivery sensor FUDS waits for the paper to reach the left output bin When the bin is full the paper will actuate the left output bin full sensor FUBFS If the paper is sent to any of the standard output bins the reversing mechanism will be activated by the reversing mechanism solenoid S2 The paper path sensor 1 PPS1 will wait for paper and the correct diverter solenoid will actuate to deliver the paper in the correct bin S3 if the paper is going to bin numbers 1 through 3 or S4 for bin number 2 If the paper has to reach other bins then the paper path sensor 2 PPS2 will be waiting for it In the same way S3 will be activated if the paper final destination is bin number 5 and if not then S4 will be activated to reach bins 4 through 6 Finally if the paper destination is bin number 7 none of the solenoids will be actuated When a specific bin is full then the paper will actuate the corresponding standard output bin full sensor BFS1 to 7 The unit can report an empty bin condition to the engine based on the empty bin sens
143. activity Bad packets framing errors un sendable packets and collisions should be minimal If a high percentage greater than one percent of these occur contact the network administrator All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer is powered off e A Novell Status block should state the Novell printer server name to which the printer is connected If the node name reads NPIXxxxxx xxxxxx last six digits of the ElO s LAN address the EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server as in figure 7 9 This could indicate that the card is operating under an IPX protocol other than Novell Consult with the network administrator if the Node Name is not present e Inthe TCP IP protocol block the default IP address is 192 0 0 192 It is acceptable to operate the printer with this default address The error message ARP DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS may appear in this block This is also an acceptable error code if the TCP IP protocol is not being used Please check with the network administrator to determine the correct IP address for the printer Verify Host System Operation Try to print to another known working printer or move the failing printer to a known working location Verify that the correct driver is installed and operating properly Verify Network and Server Operation Try to print the job to the printer s parallel port e Try to print from the host system through the network to another print
144. agram Figure 5 1 is a functional block diagram of the printer showing the basic paths for signal control and media CT Media Path lt lt Signal Control Path Formatter System External Paper Accessory Handling 1 Face Down i Tray 1 MP Bin i Envelope Feeder Registration Left Output Bin Assembly Multi Bin Mailbox Mailbox w stapler 7 Bin Mailbox Paper Output System Image Transfer Paper Input System Figure 5 1 Printer Functional Block Diagram 98 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Power Distribution System The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS The high voltages required for image formation are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply HVPS The LVPS and Distribution System is illustrated in figure 5 2 See the Reference Diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for more details tai aga ma Current FSRTH as e wi jac FSRDIE BO kanang i col 1 CA PC Surge current r reduction Phototri coupler a JFSRCTt a resistor Current rower transformer swit i totriac Sensors 5 so las Fuse resistor coupler riot AA eee ae eva saba Noise ERE Voltage raising te fication s i an fiter f H convener smoot ing kovi Control a HoT Control photocoupler 2 photocoupler ees a a nia et Low voltage power supply circuit L 220 240V ONLY Figure 5 2 Low Voltage
145. ains step by step procedures for replacing field replaceable units FRUs in the printer and paper handling accessories 7 Troubleshooting Contains a preliminary troubleshooting table a table with descriptions and recommended actions for all control panel messages image defect samples and troubleshooting checks and tools EN EN 8 Parts and Diagrams Contains exploded view drawings and part number listings for all replaceable parts in the printer and paper handling accessories Contains two replaceable parts tables one sorted alphabetically by part name and one sorted numerically by part number Both tables are cross referenced to the diagrams in the chapter Subject Index Contains an alphabetical cross referenced listing of information found in the main body of the manual vi EN EN Table of Contents 1 Product Information Printer Features 3 ees ae eae ae eres ea aad beta ee 2 Paper Capacities and Sizes eee 4 identification ava ca AA Pat ad da ah eed 6 Model and Serial Numbers 0s ee eee 6 Specifications is 6 sree ane Gee EEEE Rea a eh eee ee ee 7 Media Selection Guidelines 04 11 Papapk an PAKANA NA aaa T 11 Envel S AA 11 Adhesive Labels nnana anana cece eee een eee eee 12 TranSparencieS 6 6 ee eee 13 Storing Print Media 0 eee 13 Shipping Print Media 0 0 00 e eee eee 13 Product Overview 0c cc eee eens 14 External View of H
146. al figure 7 8 and that DC power is available to the paper handling devices Check and reseat suspect cable connections If any of the cables are replaced you must cycle the power to have the printer recognize the device again Control Panel and Event Log Messages The format of Control Panel messages is For both the Control Panel and Event Log messages isthe C link device number in the daisy chain Description Paper handling controller First C link device Second C link device Third C link device Fourth C link device Fifth C link device aor ON O Xx e is the C link device type Description 0 Paper handling controller 1 Input device 2 Output device 3 Stapler 4 Other supported device not in use 5 Other supported device not in use Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 for more information Communication 347 The following are two examples of Control Panel messages the corresponding Event Log messages and what the messages mean These examples do not show the recommended action to follow to fix the problem See table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 for the recommended actions for these messages Control Panel Message Event Log Page Meaning Note 13 11 1B A paper jam occurred in the first C link device configured It is an input device 2000 sheet Input Tray or 2 x 500
147. al resources 36 Chapter 1 Product Information EN The design of the printer facilitates the recycling of Plastics Plastic parts have material identification markings according to international standards which enhance the ability to identify plastics for proper disposition at the end of the printer s life HP Toner Cartridges In many countries this product s toner cartridge drum can be returned to HP using the prepaid shipping label and instructions included inside each new HP Toner Cartridge box If your country is not listed in the recycling guide call your local HP Sales and Service Office for further instructions HP Cartridge Recycling Program information Since 1990 the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling Program has collected more than twelve million cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded into landfills Once a cartridge is returned it is disassembled and reusable components are cleaned and inspected for quality conformance After passing strict inspection procedures materials such as nuts screws and clips are reclaimed and used to produce new cartridges Remaining materials are melted down and used as raw materials for a variety of other products Over 95 percent of the weight of returned materials is recycled For more information in the U S call 1 800 340 2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http ljsupplies com planetpartners Non US customers can call the local HP Sales and Servi
148. all 1 800 471 4701 Replacement HP Microfine C3909A toner cartridge 3 Replacement HP Microfine C3909S toner cartridges for the HP Mopier 240 EN Table 1 7 Accessories and Options continued Item Description or Use Order Number Memory Dual In line Memory Boosts the ability of the printer Fonts and Module DIMM to handle large print jobs Mass Storage 100 pin maximum 192 MB with HP brand DIMMs EDO DIMMs 4 MB C4135A 100 pin 8 MB C4136A 16 MB C4137A SDRAM DIMMs 4 MB C4140A 100 pin 8 MB C4141A 16 MB C4142A 32 MB C4143A 64 MB C3913A Flash DIMM Permanent storage for fonts 100 pin and forms 2 MB C4286A 4 MB C4287A Font DIMM 8 MB Asian ROM 100 pin traditional Chinese C4292A simplified Chinese C4293A Korean D4838A Hard Disk Permanent storage for fonts C2985A and forms 1 4 MB maximum storage for fonts Enables Raster Image Processor RIP ONCE mopying of print jobs that are too large to RIP ONCE mopy in RAM Cable and Parallel Cables 3 Meter IEEE 1284 cable C2946A Interface 10 Meter iEEE 1284 cable C2947A Accessories Macintosh Network For PhoneNET or LocalTalk 92215N Cable Kit connection EN Accessories and Options 23 Table 1 7 Accessories and Options continued Item Cable and Enhanced I O Cards Interface Accessories Description or Use HP JetDirect print server multi protocol EIO network cards Ethernet RJ 45 only Ethernet RJ 45 and BNC and LocalTalk Token Ring RJ 45 a
149. and Diverter doors operate the microswitch SW1401 EN PCA Output Paper Sensor 201 PCA Paper Size d eeeee0 secces Figure 6 38 Paper Size PCA 1 of 3 1 Remove the following components in the order listed Toner Cartridge Trays 2 and 3 Back Cover see figure 6 5 e Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS see figure 6 42 2 Unplug the fan cable from the left side of the connector figure 6 38 callout 1 remove 1 screw figure 6 38 callout 2 and remove the plastic shield figure 6 38 callout 3 202 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN gt Figure 6 39 Paper Size PCA 2 of 3 Note The Paper Size PCA for Tray 2 figure 6 39 callout 4 is identical to the PCA for Tray 3 figure 6 39 callout 5 The removal procedure for both PCAs is the same 3 Unplug the connector figure 6 39 callout 6 remove 3 screws figure 6 39 callout 7 and remove the PCA and actuating fingers EN PCA Output Paper Sensor 203 M o Zr a Id T at Figure 6 40 Paper Size PCA 3 of 3 To Reinstall Make sure that the actuating fingers are aligned with the locating pins figure 6 40 callout 8 204 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Power Supply High Voltage HVPS Figure 6 41 EN a i o i i l i i i i j j i i Pa i cN JA High Voltage Power Supply 1 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 2 Unplug the cable fro
150. apter 5 Functional Overview EN Figure 5 22 EN EJECT CYCLE STACKING Stapler Cycles Power On or Reset Sequence At power on or reset events are performed in the following sequence 1 2 3 Stapler Assembly is set to a ready state Retainer Assembly is turned to its initial position Rack Assembly is moved to find its home position which is in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly Slider Assembly is moved to find its home position which is inside of the stapler bed Slider Assembly is moved fully out from the stapler bed to the eject position Rack Assembly is moved to activate the Exit Flap Assembly Slider Assembly is moved to its home position Rack Assembly is returned to its home position Paper Paths and Components 135 Printer Input Sources Paper Size Switches The paper guides in Trays 2 and 3 operate four levers at the back of the trays that activate the size sensing switches SW1601 through SW1604 mounted in the printer chassis Paper sizes are compared to switch conditions in table 5 6 Table 5 6 Paper Size Switches Paper Size SW1601 SW1602 SW1603 SW1604 Ledger portrait OFF OFF OFF OFF A3 portrait OFF ON OFF OFF B4 portrait ON OFF OFF OFF Legal portrait ON ON OFF OFF Letter landscape OFF OFF OFF ON A4 landscape OFF OFF ON OFF Printing from Trays 2 and 3 The Pickup Feed and Separation rollers start rotating when the DC Controll
151. ardin EN 60825 1 1993 mukaisesti VAROITUS Laitteen k ytt minen muulla kuin k ytt ohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa k ytt j n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt v lle n kym tt m lle lasers teilylle VARNING Om apparaten anv nds p annat s tt n i bruksanvisning specificerats kan anv ndaren uts ttas f r osynlig laserstralning som verskrider gr nsen f r laserklass 1 HUOLTO HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN kirjoittimen sis ll ei ole k ytt j n huollettavissa olevia kohteita Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkil T llaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota v riainekasetin vaihtamista paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita k ytt j n k sikirjassa lueteltuja k ytt j n teht v ksi tarkoitettuja yll pitotoimia jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoisty kaluja Safety Statements 43 VARO Mik li kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan olet alttiina nakymattomalle lasers teilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa Ala katso sateeseen VARNING Om laserprinterns skyddsh lje ppnas d apparaten r i funktion uts ttas anv ndaren f r osynlig laserstr lning Betrakta ej str len Tiedot laitteessa k ytett v n laserdiodin s teilyominaisuuksista Aallonpituus 770 795 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser 44 Chapter 1 Product Information EN EN Site Requirements Chapter Contents Operating Environment sorts roe on AA Best 46 Space R
152. ass 1 laser product under the U S Department of Health and Human Services DHHS Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968 Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within protective housings and external covers the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation Using controls making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in this user s guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation Canadian DOC Regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements lt lt Conforme a la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilit lectromagn tiques lt lt CEM gt gt gt gt VCCI Statement Japan TORE FRUBRESERESAERMMRBS VCCI ORB IE PIBARRNFE CT CORBIS RERIRCHATSCEE BRELTWETA CORBMIUAPTLEV a YZE L CEH FAenge SMS t5FHOFCEMHVET Fy 4 LER BAS IIGE gt TIEL URRY RRUALTERSL 42 Chapter 1 Product Information EN EN Korean EMI statement APS AL CULES BA NA ol AL HAT 8C Adidas Be AACA FAHAS AHE FE VS MAUNA ABS 7 MSL Laser Statement for Finland LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN laserkirjoitin on kayttajan kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite Normaalissa k yt ss kirjoittimen suojakotelointi est lasers teen p syn laitteen ulkopuolelle Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on m ritetty stand
153. ath Test You can test printer operation with the Paper Path Test in the Test Menu It will print 1 10 100 or 500 single or 2 sided pages from any of the paper trays or the Envelope Feeder and deliver them to a previously specified output bin First select F i and printing if a duplexer is installed in the Configuration Menu table 3 8 and then run the Paper Path Test from the Information Menu table 3 4 Configuration Page When you print a Configuration Page the printer checks its internal controller and I O interface then prints a page showing the overall printer configuration see figure 3 2 on page 81 and a Menu Map showing the current menu settings see figure 3 3 on page 83 You can review these printouts to verify proper installation of installed accessories options and personalities 1 Press MENU until i 2 Press ITEM until F 3 Press SELECT to print the configuration pages 80 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN HP LaserJet O PANA Figure 3 2 Configuration Page EN Testing the Printer 81 Table 3 13 Key to Figure 3 2 1 Printer Information lists the serial number HP JetSend IP addresses page counts and other information for the printer Event Log lists the number of entries in the log the maximum number of entries viewable and the last three entries Installed Personalities and Options lists all printer languages that are installed such as PCL and PS and
154. ave message The printer will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time but the error message will continue to be displayed Resolution Enhancement REt The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement technology REt which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC Controller to produce smoothed black to white boundaries REt is user controllable on or off from the control panel or from some software applications The default setting is on REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override the control panel settings Formatter System 103 EconoMode The EconoMode setting uses approximately 75 less toner than the normal printing mode by reducing the dot density However EconoMode does not extend toner cartridge component life EconoMode which can also be thought of as draft mode is user selectable via the control panel Print Quality Menu and some software applications The default setting is off Note EconoMode does not affect print speed memory usage or extend toner cartridge life Normal Mode Medium Density 0 EconoMode Medium Density 6 Figure 5 5 Normal Mode vs EconoMode 104 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN DC Controller System The following systems and functions are controlled by the DC Controller PCA e DC Power Distribution 5V DC 12V DC 24V DC Laser and Scanner Drive Paper Motion Monitoring and C
155. b is successful proceed to Troubleshooting Checks on page 412 Interface Troubleshooting Short C link Cable 24 inches 61 cm _ do Formatter oo gt a ele Vv s gt ON eelee NG Multibin soles Mailbox 2000 sheet 4 Fo Input Tray ANDOx or no stapler 2x500 sheet oo o Input Tray ele d 7 Y ee A Long C link Cable Medium C link Cable 70 inches 178 cm 39 inches 97 cm e output ee input Figure 7 8 Communications Link C link Cables Supported Daisy Chain Connections Note If the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox is sitting on a tabletop instead of ona stand it is the first device in the daisy chain All C link cables have a single dot molded into the device output connector cable end and two dots molded into the device input connector cable end Note It is important that the C link cables are installed in the supported daisy chain configuration as shown in figure 7 8 This is so that the devices are recognized and correctly reported on the Event Log It is possible but not recommended to attach the C link cables in other configurations This will rearrange the supported device numbering Keep this configuration in mind when evaluating the Event Log 346 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN If any of the installed devices are not shown on the configuration page verify that the C link cabling is correctly connected and function
156. ble 8 2 on page 449 RG5 1919 000CN RG5 1920 000CN Main Motor Cable Cassette Size Sensor Cable table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1921 000CN Fan 3 Cable table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1924 000CN RG5 1925 000CN Cable Assembly Laser Scanner Scanner Motor Cable table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 5 on page 456 RG5 1926 000CN RG5 1927 000CN BD Cable ILS Cable table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 5 on page 456 RG5 1928 000CN Registration Cable table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 1928 000CN Connector 3P table 8 6 on page 458 RG5 3852 000CN Outrigger table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 3863 000CN RG5 3909 000CN Adjustable Feet Tip Power Supply Cable PSU table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 3951 000CN Tray 2 table 8 1 on page 446 RG5 3952 000CN Tray 3 table 8 1 on page 446 RG5 4021 000CN Universal Power Supply table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 4384 000CN RG5 4403 000CN Front Panel Control Panel Display Paper Feed Assembly VTU table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 8 on page 462 480 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued RG5 4410 000CN RG5 4416 000CN Paper Pickup Assembly Paper Deck Drive Assembly table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 4420 000CN Tray 4 Assembly table 8 8 on page 462 RG5 4421 000CN Tray 5 Assembly table 8 8 on page 462
157. ble PCL jobs pure text no job control Some environments such as UNIX indicate a new line using only the line feed control code This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed EN Control Panel Menus 65 Table 3 7 Printing Menu continued Item Values Explanation Select Li to print the PS error page when PS errors occur 66 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Configuration Menu Items in this menu affect the printer s behavior Configure the printer according to your printing needs Table 3 8 Configuration Menu ltem Values EN Explanation Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it has been idle for a specified amount of time Turning PowerSave off is not recommended The PowerSave feature does the following Minimizes the amount of power consumed by the printer when it is idle Reduces wear on the printer s electronic components Turns off the display s backlight When you send a print job press a control panel key open a paper tray or open the top cover the printer automatically comes out of PowerSave mode Note PowerSave turns off the backlight on the display but the display is still readable Select the default printer language personality Normally you should not change the printer language the default is FTC If you change it to a specific printer language the printer will not automatically switch from one language to another unless specif
158. c 10 240 Vac 10 50 Hz 2 Hz 50 Hz 2 Hz 6 0 220v printing 500 standby 135 PowerSave Mode LaserJet 8000 21 LaserJet 8000 N 24 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 120 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 5 maximum 0 3 average 45 Watts Maximum 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 3 maximum 0 2 average 45 Watts Maximum Multibin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 5 120v 0 25 240v 45 Watts Maximum 120 Vac 10 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 9 maximum 47 Watts Maximum 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 5 maximum 47 Watts Maximum 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 120 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 5 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 240 Vac 10 50 60 Hz 2 Hz 0 3 maximum 28 Watts Maximum 1 Operating current requirements Specifications 9 Table 1 6 Acoustic Emissions Operation position per ISO 9296 Printer Printer stand alone System Printing LPA dB A 54 db 56 db Standby LPA dB A 42 db 42 db Bystander 1m per ISO 9296 Printing LPA dB A 50 db 55 db Standby LPA dB A 38 db 42 db Sound Power per ISO 9296 Printing LWAD 6 6 bels A 7 1 bels A Standby LWAD 5 5 bels A 5 5 bels A 1 Printer System includes the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 Multibin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler Duplexer and Envelope Feeder
159. cations 9 2 x 500 sheet input tray trays 4 amp 5 back cover 296 diagnostics 418 dimensions 7 identification label 6 operation 123 ordering 20 paper paths and components 122 parts and diagrams 462 printing from 137 removing and replacing 151 295 specifications 4 verifying installation 342 vertical transfer unit 298 weight 7 2000 sheet input tray tray 4 adjustment procedure 94 95 dimensions 7 electrical specifications 9 identification label 6 ordering 20 paper paths and components 121 printing from 137 removing and replacing 151 specifications 5 troubleshooting 427 verifying installation 342 weight 7 5 bin mailbox with stapler see mailbox with stapler 7 bin tabletop mailbox 154 back cover 263 264 c link communication link 128 diagnostics 422 dimensions 7 electrical specifications 9 empty sensor 278 full bin and interlock 280 identification label 6 operation 126 ordering 20 output modes 126 paper paths and components 124 parts and diagrams 464 removing and replacing 154 259 specifications 5 stand dimensions and weight 8 ordering 21 standard output 275 verifying installation 342 weight 7 A AC access cover 160 AC power distribution 99 100 troubleshooting 332 accessories cleaning 88 diagnostics 418 dimensions 7 locations 19 ordering 20 parts and diagrams 443 specifications 4 7 status 80 user installable 147 verifying installation 342 weight 7 acoustic emissions 10 adhesive labels see labels
160. ce Office for further information regarding the HP Toner Cartridge Recycling Program Paper The printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide To ensure printer longevity HP provides the following Extended Warranty HP SupportPack covers the printer and all HP supplied internal components It is a three year warranty from the date of purchase HP SupportPack must be purchased by the customer within 30 days of product purchase Information on HP SupportPack is available by calling your local HP FIRST number Spare Parts and Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be Consumables made available for at least five years after production has Availability stopped EN Environmental Product Stewardship 37 Material Safety Data Sheet The Toner Cartridge Drum MSDS can be obtained by calling the U S HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology at 1 800 231 9300 Use Index number 7 for a listing of the Toner Cartridge Drum Material Chemical Safety Data Sheets Non U S customers should refer to the HP Support pages at the front of this user guide for appropriate phone numbers and information For more information in the U S call 1 800 340 2445 or contact the HP LaserJet Supplies Website at http ljsupplies com planetpartners 38 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Environmental Conformity
161. ce eee eee 147 Disk Drive 2 tee 148 Hardware Table 0 000 e eee eee 157 Control Panel stais ipaa iaa KARLA NGA ALA pA ND es Bee 159 COVES ad npa NAPAG NAN DA ee Yes KANG 160 AC Access Cover c cee eee 160 Back GOVE 0 ha KE na vee thea eek Ee Cee Ba ee hoe eh 162 Front COVEl o careca niseni p eee hae eee as toe ee 163 Left Lower Cover 0 0000 eee ee 165 Top Cover 0 cee 166 Delivery Unit for Standard Output Bin 169 Diverter Assembly 0 0 2 0 0000 cece eee 172 Door Assembly Diverter 0 0 0 0 0 0 cece eee eens 173 Door Assembly Right Lower 2000 eee aaee 174 Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing 177 Fan Housing 000 eee tee ee 177 Pan Moon a cated a ae Sane and Nam es bad a 178 Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS 0 000 eee eee 179 Fan 3 Intake Formatter and Housing 180 Fan Motors feat sa doe Saeed Py eka Se eee ls 180 Fan Housing See Fan2 an 181 Fan 4 Exhaust Delivery Unit a 182 Feeder Assembly 22 cece eee 183 Formatter Assembly 00 cee eee eee eee 185 Fusing Assembly 0 0 2 0 00 0 eee eee ee 187 Laser Scanner Assembly 00000 cece eee eee 189 Main Gear Assembly 0000 00 e eee eee eee 191 Main Motor Assembly 0c eee eee 194 Paper Input Unit PIU 0 0 20 ee 195 PCA DC Controller 0 0 a 197 EN EN
162. ch causes the print engine to perform an internal self test diagnostic which bypasses the Formatter PCA and then prints a full page of black parallel lines This test is useful for troubleshooting printer problems because it isolates the print engine from the Formatter PCA The engine test printout prints from Tray 3 and can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed For more information see Engine Test in Chapter 7 Motors See the General Timing Diagram figure 5 23 on page 140 for specific timing details for the printer motors The Main Motor MT1 is controlled by the DC Controller PCA The Main Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during the Initial Rotation period following power on the Print period the Last Rotation Period or whenever the printer front door is opened and closed The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the DC Controller It rotates the laser scanner mirror during the Initial Rotation period and the Print period The Fan Motors are controlled and monitored by the DC Controller PCA All four fans operate at full speed during the printing modes All four fans turn off in the PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down The drive signal for the Tray 2 and 3 Paper Pickup Motor SMT1 is provided by the DC Controller PCA through the Paper Input Unit PIU PCA mounted on the right side of the PIU When the job instructions call for paper to be supplied by Tray 2 SMT1 rotates in a forward direction
163. consumed in a customer replaceable toner cartridge eliminates the need for a service call when replacement is required Toner Cartridge High Voltage Power Supply Contacts The toner cartridge has three contacts that route voltage from the HVPS PCA They are Upper Primary Charge e Middle Developing Bias e Lower Toner Sensing Toner Recognition 108 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN The Photosensitive Drum The image from the Laser Scanner Assembly is written on the drum surface developed and transferred to the media The drum is an aluminum cylinder The aluminum base of the photosensitive drum is electrically connected to ground potential The outside of the cylinder is coated with a layer of non toxic organic photoconductive OPC material The OPC material becomes electrically conductive when exposed to light The drum surface is first cleaned of excess toner then conditioned with a uniform negative charge When an area on the drum surface is exposed to the laser light beam the negative charge in that area is conducted to the ground potential of the drum base and thus becomes more positive Areas not exposed to light remain non conductive and maintain their negative charge Photosensitive Layer Aluminum Base Figure 5 7 Photosensitive Drum EN Image Formation System 109 Drum Cleaning The cleaning blade inside the toner cartridge is in contact with the surface of the drum at all times As the drum rotates during pr
164. could not be performed You might have attempted an illegal operation such as trying to download a file to a non existent directory Recommended Action If an incorrect tray is displayed check the tray selected and the type settings If the printer does not respond after pressing the control panel keys turn the printer off and then turn the printer on to clear the error Note If paper is loaded when the printer is in FI HE OH mode it might not be recognized Open and close the affected source when the printer is in mode 1 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on to clear the message 2 If the message persists install a new RAM disk 1 Check the filename and directory name 2 Reattempt the operation Printer Messages 365 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Warning Warning Status Error Status Description The RAM disk is full The RAM disk file is protected and no new files can be written to it The printer is online and ready for data No status or device attendance messages are pending at the display The duplexer has been pulled out A request to print an internal page has been accepted but cannot be printed now 366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action 1 Delete files and then try again or turn the printer off and then turn the printer on to delete all the
165. cover and the plastic panel at the right rear as a single unit The square opening at the upper rear corner on the right side plastic panel is the engine test access 1 2 Remove 5 screws figure 6 5 callout 1 Open the top cover door and remove 1 screw figure 6 5 callout 2 Open the 2000 sheet Input Tray transfer door if installed Tray 1 and the Right Lower Door Assembly Remove 2 screws figure 6 5 callout 3 from the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover Carefully release the cover around the AC input connector figure 6 5 callout 4 at the lower right of the back cover and slide the right side of the cover slightly forward Carefully release the retaining tabs figure 6 5 callout 5 on the plastic panel to the left of the metal back cover by gently pulling the cover to the left while moving both pieces away from the printer chassis 162 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 6 EN Front Cover _ _ p ie ah Ca 5 Front Cover 1 of 2 1 Open all access doors and remove the Duplexer if installed 2 Open the front access door and remove 3 screws figure 6 6 callout 1 Covers 163 Figure 6 7 Front Cover 2 of 2 3 Open the Diverter Access Door and release the two plastic retaining tabs inside the Duplexer cavity figure 6 7 callout 2 CAUTION Be careful the plastic upper retaining tabs will break off if the cover is tilt
166. d occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly 254 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Top Cover Assembly Figure 6 86 CAUTION EN Top Cover Assembly 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly see figure 6 80 on page 249 2 Open the Top Cover Assembly and remove the Back Plate see figure 6 81 on page 250 3 Unplug the ground and signal cables from the right side of the Stapler Controller board being careful to keep them in the cable holder 4 Oneach side of the assembly pull the hinge to release the 2 posts from the retaining notches see figure 6 86 To Reinstall Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly Stapler Assembly 255 Stapler Bed Assembly Stapler Bed Assembly 256 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN CAUTION EN 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly see figure 6 80 on page 249 Remove the Back Plate see figure 6 81 on page 250 Remove the Stapler Unit Controller PCA see figure 6 87 on page 256 callout 1 Remove the Top Cover Assembly see figure 6 86 on page 255 Remove the wire frame by pushing both arms of the wire frame toward the center to clear the retaining notches and lift 6 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lifting upwards 7 Insert a flat blade screwdriver into the top of the Stapler Bed Assemb
167. d or refilled e Make sure that the toner cartridge is seated properly in the printer cavity e Inspect the cartridge for toner leaking through worn seals If the drum has been manually rotated it may have caused internal damage and toner spills may result Note Toner cartridges are rated for 15 000 images at 5 coverage It is LO is displayed if the 15 000 image expectancy is exceeded EN Check the surface of the photosensitive drum in the toner cartridge to see if it has been damaged or scratched Touching the drum will contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting and defects during printing White areas on the page may indicate that the drum has been exposed to light for too long If white areas appear stop the printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most defective images If not the toner cartridge may be placed ina dark environment for several days which may restore some life to the drum Image Quality 395 Image Quality Tables Table 7 8 Blank White Page Possible Cause OCCASIONAL BLANK PAGES 1 Software Configuration 2 Network Configuration Some sharing devices on networks may generate a blank page as a separator 3 Multiple Feeds The printer may be feeding two or more pages at once because the paper is difficult to separate ALL PAGES BLANK 1 Sealing tape left in toner cartridge Table 7 9 Black Pages Possible Cause 1 Defective toner cart
168. d staple cartridges which may be ordered directly from Hewlett Packard See Chapter 8 for ordering information Toner Cartridge Life The Toner Cartridge C3909A is designed to simplify replacement of the major consumable parts The toner cartridge contains the printing mechanism and a supply of toner HP Mopier 240 cartridges C3909S are packaged in groups of three At 5 page coverage a toner cartridge is guaranteed to print approximately 15 000 images see figure 1 6 EKKZ 5 COVERAGE KKKEEEKKEEEEZZ7E EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKKEEEKKEEEEZZZE KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ KKKEEEKKEEEEZZZE KKEEKKZZZZZEEEKK KKKKEEEEEEZZZZEE EKZEEZZEEEKKEEEZ EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKE KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK 227227 EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKEKE KKKKEEE KKZ ZZZZZKKKK EKKKKKZZZ EKEKEK EKZEEEE EEEEZZ EEZZZZZ EEEEEZE EZZZKKK KEEEEE KZZZEE EEEEEZ ZZZKKKE KKE KKKEEEEEK ZZZEEE KKEKEEE ZZZ EEEKKKEE ZZKKEEEE KKKKKEE EEEE EEKZZZK EEEEE ZEEEEZ EEEEEKKK ZZZZ EEEEEE ZKZKZKZZK KKKKKKK ZZZZZZ EEE KZKZKZK EKEKEKE KKK EEEEEK ZZKZKZK EKEKEK EKEKEKEKE KKKKEE
169. de at the top and bottom of the tray Does the printer need Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers See Cleaning the Printer cleaning When was the User and Accessories on page 88 From the Configuration Page determine the number of pages since the Maintenance performed on the last maintenance see figure 7 7 on page 343 The Printer Maintenance printer Note EN Kit should be installed every 350 000 images Paper Path Test Using the error trend information from Display on page 336 you can verify a specific printer paper path with the paper path test You must first set the desired paper destination in the configuration menu and then select the paper path test The paper path test menu will allow you to select the desired paper source and number If the Multibin Mailbox is installed in order to perform the paper path test the printer must be configured to mailbox mode If the printer is not in mailbox mode ask the JetAdmin administrator to change the configuration to mailbox mode to complete this test To perform a paper path test Press MENU until Press ITEM until F appears Press SELECT Press or until the desired input tray appears Press SELECT Press or until the desired output bin appears Press SELECT Press or until the desired duplex mode appears O ON Oa Bb WO N Press SELECT Troubleshooting Checks 415 10 Press or to choose the desired number
170. dges can develop leaks Also after a paper jam has occurred there may be some toner remaining on the rollers and guides inside the printer The pages that print immediately after the jam may pick up this toner Clean spilled toner with a cloth slightly dampened in cold water Do not touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro fine particle filter Note If toner gets on your clothing use cold water to remove it Hot water sets toner stains into fabric 90 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments EN Preventative Maintenance EN The user conducted preventative maintenance cycle for this printer is every 350 000 images The part numbers for the preventative maintenance kits are C3971B for the 100V printers and C3972B for the 220V printers The kits contain the following replacement parts one Fusing Assembly one Transfer Roller Assembly and eight Feed Separation Rollers two each for Trays 2 3 the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 See Chapter 6 of this manual and the instructions included in the kits for detailed replacement procedures The control panel message E indicates that the 350 000 image maintenance is due Upon completion of the maintenance procedures Configuration Menu and set the Preventative Maintenance 91 Tray Adjustment Procedure This procedure applies to Trays 2 and
171. e 0 aaa 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Latching Mechanism 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Cover Latch 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray eee 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Back Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Left Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Right Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Front Top Cover 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Pickup Assembly 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Paper Deck Drive Assembly 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 0 0 00 cece eee 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Cassette Size Sensing PCA 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Power Supply 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Main Cable 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Storage Paper Tray 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Front Door Storage Area 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Outriggers Leveling Feet 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Casters 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Foot Tip and Adjustable FOOUTAD aaa ea LAAN thd Ka kala a NANG 2x500 sheet Input Tray Locating Pins 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Front LED PCA 7 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Process 0 POWEPON osudu eo lenree ted a ied a dee ba ah ee ee BAG Bk K
172. e installed properly 2 Check for paper jammed in the Delivery Head Assembly 3 Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly moves freely 4 Make sure that all paper bins are seated correctly 5 Make sure that the paper bins blind cover and scan bar are not broken 6 If the problem persists replace the Delivery Head Assembly 7 If the problem persists replace the Delivery Head motor 8 If the problem persists replace the Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 13 22 0A Communication problem with the 1 Turn the printer off and Multibin Mailbox wrong page then turn the printer on request 2 If the problem persists replace the Multibin Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message 13 33 0A 13 33 0B 13 33 0C 13 33 OD Error alternates with Error alternates with EN Description A staple is jammed in the stapler A rack jam slider jam or retainer jam occurred in the stapler The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory You might have tried to tran
173. e a T 15 Torx driver Phillips Posidriv Phillips vs Posidriv Screwdrivers See table 6 1 on page 157 and Chapter 8 for a list of the screws and other common hardware used in the printer To install a self tapping screw first turn it counter clockwise to align it with the existing thread pattern then carefully turn clockwise to tighten Do not over tighten If a self tapping screw hold becomes stripped repair of the screw hole or replacement of the affected assembly is required 146 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN User Installable Accessories EN Memory and Personality Upgrade CAUTION DIMMs and the Formatter PCA can be damaged by small amounts of electrostatic discharge ESD Wear an anti static wrist wrap Print a configuration page page 342 1 Turn the printer off Unplug the power cord and disconnect any cables Loosen the two captive thumb screws on the back of the printer Grasp the screws and pull the formatter board out of the printer Place it on a flat non conductive surface 2 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic package Hold the DIMM with fingers against the side edges and thumbs against the back edge Align the notches on the DIMM with the DIMM slot Check that the locks on each side of the DIMM slot are open or outward 3 Press the DIMM straight into the slot press firmly 4 Make sure the locks on each side of the DIMM snap inward into place To remove a DIMM the locks
174. e 6 79 Mailbox with Stapler Anti Curl String Middle Connection 7 Remove the strings from the pulleys at the back of the Delivery Head by rotating the flat side of the pulley toward the outside of the frame figure 6 79 on page 248 callout 4 8 Remove the strings from the tension springs 248 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Stapler Assembly Figure 6 80 EN Mailbox with Stapler Stapler Removal The Stapler Assembly is mounted in the 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler replacing the three standard output bins 1 Turn off the printer 2 Make sure the Delivery Head Assembly is not in the stapler area It should be in the bottom portion of the mailbox You can move the Delivery Head Assembly downward gently with your hand Disconnect the cable going from the stapler to the mailbox Remove the Left Output Bin Lift up on the outer edge of the stapler to clear the retaining notches and pull the stapler forward out of the frame figure 6 80 To Reinstall Slide the stapler into its designated slot and lower it into its retaining notches Replace the Left Output Bin Connect the cable from the stapler to the mailbox Turn the printer on Stapler Assembly 249 Back Plate Figure 6 81 Back Plate 1 of 2 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly see figure 6 80 2 Remove the Scan Bar by carefully pressing the tab on the scan bar backwards and downwards through the hole of the Stapler Bed see figure 6 81 with a flat tip
175. e KEAN DENG thas ade 246 Stapler Assembly 000 c eee eee 249 Back Plates a Kina Ba del viele coved avn KENT NA 250 Stapler Controller PCA 0 0 cc cece eee 252 Top Cover Assembly 0000 cece eee eee 255 Stapler Bed Assembly 0 00 0 cece eee nee 256 FING OS soar eS net AG Mana a acy MA te Bone Dh kia ad 258 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 0 000 ee 259 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Front Cover 260 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Back Cover 263 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Top Cover 265 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA 269 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Power Supply 270 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Right Door Assembly Paper Path Cover a 271 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Down Bins 275 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Empty Bin Sensor PCA 278 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PGA ic aa kn based dees DD bel ave 280 Table of Contents xi xii 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox LED PCA 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Up Sensors PCA 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Reversing Mechanism Motor 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 20 0c eee eee eee 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Short Tray7 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Solenoid Reversing Mechanism 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Solenoid Flipper 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Handl
176. e logical bin If a mailbox bin is full the mopier automatically sends the job to the next available bin or the overflow bin If there are more jobs than bins the following job will start again at the first available standard output bin from the top Configurable Stacker This mode stacks the printed output from the lowest bin to the top regardless of job boundaries This mode of operation takes advantage of the total capacity of the mailbox bins The software sees the mailbox as one logical bin When the mailbox is full the system will halt until all bins are emptied Collator In this mode the mailbox automatically separates mopies Each mopy is delivered in consecutive bins starting from the top standard output bin In this case one job contains several mopies 126 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN Configuring the Operating Modes The network administrator chooses the mode of operation through an HP network configuration utility such as HP JetAdmin or HP LaserJet utility You must set up your printer driver to reflect the mode chosen by the administrator Bidirectional Environment The printer automatically selects the mode established by the network administrator Non bidirectional Environment You can change the mode in the driver The method for changing the mode varies by driver and by operating system Refer to your driver s online help Receiving Paper The engine delivers paper to the mailbox through the f
177. e memory to print the entire 2 Change the Resource job The remainder of the job will Saving setting from the not print and will be cleared from printer s control panel or add memory more memory to the printer See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions Warning The printer had to compress the 1 Press Go to continue job in order to fit it in available 2 You might want to add memory Some data loss might more memory to the printer have occurred See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions 360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Status Displays when you press the No action required CANCEL JOB key and there is no active job or buffered data to cancel This displays for approximately 2 5 seconds before the printer returns to the online state Status Displays when the printer is Press Go to place the printer offline and there are no error online messages pending at the display Error The output bin is full and needs 1 Remove the media from to be emptied the standard output bin alternates with 2 Check PS1401 on the sensor PCA 3 Make sure that the sensor flag moves freely 65 22 01 The left output bin is too full 1 Empty the left output bin 2 Make sure that the sensor flag moves freely 3 If the problem persists c
178. ects no cartridge and toner out Tray 3 paper size Tray 2 paper size i f PS1401 Face down 1 tray paper full i Maq ego J2217 EpFuLs sensor l i 1 PS140 Face down i 4a tray delivery YUKI Z FDOUTS sensor i i PS1403 Fusing unit i YUK i 11 8 p FPOUTS I 1 delivery sensor i 424VB i E A o 2 2T 1 E 24VA 1 Door switch i eee al h 8 5 E a IU i P UDOORS Fusing unit E E AA i paana a J54 1 J50B 3 J222 5 3 E E surface Cw FSRTH temperature sensor 1 High voltage EP cartridge power supply PCA pata HE Han Toner 1 A TANTIN L J7OI AS J220 A5 aa adi Or o TB703 t TONRS wens bea eo ee I Paper size sensing switch PCA Ser i SW1601 1 J1601A 1_J215 5 Tray 3 i SW1602 gt a LSZE1 paper size i 0 n LSIZE2 a SW1603 3 3 sensing 1 a LSIZE3 switches 5 3W1604 i C 2 LSIZE4 i z i i AA eect LI Paper size sensing switch PCA Ere AHAS SASA ma t l SW1601 t J1601B 1_J215 10 1 O Tray2 i SW1602 E E es paper size SW1603 3 8 sensing I o SW1604 4 7 USIZE3 switches i O USIZE4 5 6 t t a eer nand ey ei a 1 Figure 7 17 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 2 of 5 436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN R Laser scanner unit 1 J1001 91 I 1 1 J202 1 ppa 2 1 Laser diode 6 4 1 st i 41 21 6 8 pO pig LI 1 i Je 3 J206 1 i 2 1 2 BD PCA T i 1 3 1 NG J185 J207 4 4 2 3 i
179. ed Item Values EN Explanation The TCP IP Menu is not accessible The TCP IP Menu appears In the TCP IP Menu you can specify 5 for TCP IP parameters to be automatically loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when the printer is turned on If you specify you can manually set selected TCP IP parameters from the control panel You can manually set each byte of the IP address IP Subnet Mask SM Syslog Server LG and Default Gateway GW Also you can manually set the Timeout time period x The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible ES The EtherTalk Menu appears In the EtherTalk Menu you can set the ees phase parameter ETALK PHASE 1 or 2 2 for your network Control Panel Menus 73 CAUTION Resets Menu Use this menu with caution You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items Only reset the printer under the following circumstances You want to restore the printer s default settings Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted You are having problems with a port The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer while CANCEL JOB clears only the current job Table 3 11 Resets Menu ltem Explanation This item clears the printer buffer and the active I O input buffer and makes the control panel defaults current Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss
180. ed option is installed or their function is activated All menus and their associated items are accessible when the printer is online In menu mode if no keys are pressed for approximately 30 seconds the system will automatically return to the top level and display either an existing error or one of the following EF if the printer was online if the printer was offline To select a menu item 1 Press MENU repeatedly until the desired menu appears 2 Press ITEM repeatedly until the desired item appears 3 Press repeatedly or hold down to scroll until the desired setting appears 4 Press SELECT to save the selection An asterisk appears next to the selection indicating that it is now the default 5 Press MENU or Go to exit the menus Shaded items appear only if the associated option or function is activated 58 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Information Menu This menu contains printer information pages that give details about the printer and its configuration To print a page from the information menu scroll to the desired page and press SELECT Table 3 4 Information Menu ltem EN Explanation The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items The configuration page shows the printer s current configuration If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed HP LaserJet 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 printers a JetDirect configuration page will pr
181. ed too far out 4 Carefully pull the bottom of the cover away from the chassis while moving it to the right to release the retaining tab figure 6 6 callout 3 5 Carefully tilt the bottom edge of the cover away from the chassis to release the upper retaining tabs 164 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Left Lower Cover Figure 6 8 CAUTION EN Left Lower Cover Be careful not to damage the plastic guides on the inside of the lower left cover They are part of the Duplexer paper path 1 Remove the Diverter Assembly access door see figure 6 14 2 Remove 2 screws figure 6 8 callout 1 3 Press down firmly on the top cover outer ends to release the retaining tabs on the inside of the cover figure 6 8 callout 2 and the retaining tabs at the lower edge of the cover figure 6 8 callout 3 4 Pull the cover away from the chassis left side first To Reinstall 1 Tuck the right side of the cover behind the plastic edge piece first 2 Slide the cover toward the chassis and insert the two retaining tabs into position Lift up to snap the cover into place Covers 165 Top Cover Figure 6 9 Top Cover 1 of 2 1 Remove the Control Panel see figure 6 3 on page 159 and remove 1 screw figure 6 9 callout 1 2 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and remove 1 screw figure 6 9 callout 2 166 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 10 Top Cover 2 of 2 3 Open the top cover door and
182. eeds from incorrect tray when selecting different media for the first page of the job First you must determine if it is a hardware or a software issue Runa paper path test from each paper tray to eliminate the hardware See page 415 If the paper path test fails troubleshoot the error message Make sure that the most current HP driver is installed Select the Print Quality Tab from the printer driver Click on About Make sure that the driver revision is the most current You may find the most current driver in various electronic locations Check with HP Service and Support General Troubleshooting Information 429 Note Note CAUTION If the paper path test works it may be a software or user related issue Perform the following steps 1 Define the media types that are loaded in each paper tray This can be done from either JetAdmin or the front control panel of the printer From JetAdmin 1 Select the Trays tab 2 Select the correct media type for each tray listed 3 Click on OK save your changes and exit JetAdmin From the Control Panel rE from the To set the paper type for Tray 1 set 7 Paper Handling Menu 1 From the Paper Handling Menu press ITEM to select a specific tray Press until you get to the correct type of media Press SELECT Repeat this step for each paper tray Press Go DO a Bb WO ND From inside your application choose the page setup option for that application mg Select t
183. egin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all cords 2 Open the top cover of the printer and remove the toner cartridge WARNING Avoid touching the adjacent fusing area It may be HOT CAUTION Do not touch the transfer roller A Oils from your hands can contaminate the roller and reduce print quality If toner gets on your clothes wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 With aa dry lint free cloth wipe any residue from the paper path area the registration roller B and the toner cartridge cavity Use the brush supplied with the printer to remove residue from tight areas 4 Replace the toner cartridge close the printer reconnect all cables and turn the printer on EN Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments 89 Table 4 1 Cleaning the Printer Component Cleaning Method Notes Outside Covers Use a water dampened cloth Do not use solvents or ammonia based cleaners Inside General Use a dry lint free cloth Remove all dust spilled toner and paper particles Paper Pickup Feed Use a water dampened lint free cloth and Retard Rollers Separation Pad Use a dry lint free cloth Registration Roller Use a dry lint free cloth Transfer Roller Use a dry lint free cloth DO NOT TOUCH the transfer roller with your fingers Fusing Assembly Use a water dampened lint free cloth Cleaning Spilled Toner Defective toner cartri
184. embly and place it on a smooth sturdy surface User Installable Accessories 151 152 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement To Reinstall 1 Match the locator pins as illustrated in step 3 Make sure that the printer is aligned on all corners EN Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged disconnect the power and interface cables from the Multibin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler controller PCA 2 Carefully slide the Multibin Mailbox Mailbox with Stapler away from the printer until the locator tabs and the lower guide rail are clear To Reinstall 1 Make sure the lower guide rail and the locator tabs are aligned and the dot pattern on the PCA connector and cable connector match 2 Make sure that the Interlock Switch is fully depressed 3 To connect the power cables for the 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler only Attach and secure the interface cable to the lower connector on the input tray Route the mailbox s power cord beneath the printer to the transfer door side of the printer and connect it to the bottom of the powerbox EN User Installable Accessories 153 154 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged disconnect the interface cable from the top A and bottom B connectors Remove the left output bin A from the top slot of the mai
185. emove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the top cover see figure 6 9 Figure 6 27 Laser Scanner Assembly 3 Unplug three cable connectors figure 6 27 callout 1 EN Laser Scanner Assembly 189 4 Re route the cable running across the top of the assembly so that it is out of the way CAUTION Do not touch the laser scanner mirror located under the forward edge of the assembly Use approved ESD handling procedures when touching the Beam Detect PCA 5 Remove 4 screws figure 6 27 callout 2 To Reinstall Make sure that the locator pins are properly seated 190 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Main Gear Assembly 1 Remove the following components in the order listed Toner Cartridge Tray 1 Tray 2 Transfer Roller Assembly see figure 6 52 on page 219 Back Cover Assembly see figure 6 5 on page 162 Tray 1 Assembly see figure 6 53 on page 221 Right Lower Door Assembly see figure 6 15 on page 174 Paper Input Unit PIU see figure 6 32 on page 195 High Voltage Power Supply HVPS see figure 6 41 on page 205 Main Motor see figure 6 31 on page 194 Figure 6 28 CAUTION EN Main Gear Assembly 1 of 3 2 Remove 2 screws figure 6 28 on page 191 callout 1 Be careful not to damage the plastic gears when removing the Main Gear Assembly Main Gear Assembly 191 Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help free the Main Gear Assembly from the printer 3 From inside of the PIU cav
186. en TRE ry Tray 1 to be used as a reseed tray For supported This item appears only when 7 i paper sizes see Set the value to correspond with the page 4 paper size currently loaded in Tray 1 For supported This item appears only when 7 paper types Set the value to Sesa with the 60 Chapter 3 Operating Overview see page 4 paper type currently loaded in Tray 1 For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type paper types currently loaded in Tray 2 see page 4 For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type paper types currently loaded in Tray 3 see page 4 For supported Set the value to correspond with the paper type paper types currently loaded in the Optional 2000 sheet Input Tray see page 4 Tray 4 or Tray 4 of the Optional 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 EN Table 3 5 Paper Handling Menu continued ltem Values For supported paper types see page 4 EN Explanation Set the value to correspond with the paper type currently loaded in Tray 5 of the Optional 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 This item appears only when a mailbox is installed Set the value to correspond with the appropriate bin Feed the paper manually from Tray 1 rather than automatically from a tray When and Tray 1 is empty the printer goes offline when it receives a print job and displays This item appears only whe
187. ent EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Short Tray 7 LL Figure 6 119 Short Tray 7 1 Place the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox on its side as shown 2 Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the mailbox 3 Remove the tray EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 289 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Solenoid Reversing Mechanism Figure 6 120 Solenoid Reversing Mechanism 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 2 Unplug the cable from inside the bracket callout 1 3 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid callout 2 290 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Solenoid Flipper Figure 6 121 Solenoid Flipper Remove the Front Cover page 260 Unplug the cable callout 1 Remove 1 screw and the solenoid callout 2 A GO N Release the solenoid Note When you plug the connector in note the orientation of the plastic part in figure 6 121 callout 3 EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 291 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Handle Figure 6 122 Handle 1 Release the left end of the spring callout 1 2 Release the 2 tabs callout 2 and pry the handle out 292 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Latching Mechanism 2 oe Le Figure 6 123 Latching Mechanism 1 Remove the handle page 292 2 Remove the E clips and the bushing shown in figure 6 123 The tab on the bushing should be on the top when you replace it 3 Slide the Latching Mechanism to the right and remove it EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbo
188. equirements Hana a na Be ea 47 Environmental Requirements 49 Chapter Contents 45 Operating Environment The electrical specifications listed in Chapter 1 must be maintained to ensure proper operation of this printer Consider the following points before installing the printer Install the printer in a well ventilated dust free area away from any open windows Install the printer on a hard flat and continuous surface with all four printer feet level Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces Ensure adequate stable power is supplied Printer power requirements are listed in table 1 5 Electrical Specifications on page 9 Install the printer where there is stable temperature and humidity away from water sources humidifiers air conditioners refrigerators or other major appliances see table 2 1 on page 49 Install the printer away from direct sunlight open flames or ammonia fumes If the printer is placed near a window make sure the window is closed and has a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight Install the printer with enough space around the printer for proper access and ventilation see figure 2 1 on page 47 Install the printer away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation heating or air conditioning systems 46 Chapter 2 Site Requirements EN Space Requirements 46 75 in 1187 mm
189. er Contact the network administrator for assistance 350 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Printer Messages EN Control Panel Messages and Errors Printer messages displayed on the control panel provide five categories of information Each message category is assigned a priority lf more than one condition occurs at the same time the highest priority message is displayed When it has been cleared the next priority message will be displayed and so on The displayed messages and their priorities are Status messages Warning messages Error messages Critical error messages Printer Messages 351 Event Log Table Note All of the alphabetical messages are listed first Numeric messages are listed in table 7 6 on page 373 The Event Log codes the second column are in no order They are merely listed with the associated display panel message Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages Event Log Message Category Message Status Error Error Status Description The printer control panel function you are trying to access has been locked to prevent unauthorized access The duplexer is not connected properly The optional tray is not connected properly The printer is canceling the active job 352 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Ask the network administrator to unlock the function 1 Re install the duplexer 2 If the message persists make sure the duplexer i
190. er Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSRetainer Retainer Sensor Stapler bed Assembly 132 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN Table 5 5 Stapler Motors Sensors and Switches continued Control Title Location Device PSBinFull Output Bin Full Sensor Stapler bed Assembly PSNBinFull Next Bin Full Sensor Housing STLout Staples Out Stapler Assembly Sw1 Top Cover Interlock Switches 2 in Right Hinge serial 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler Operation All communication and control of the mailbox the 2000 sheet Input Tray and the stapler is through the Paper Handling Controller These instructions are sent to the stapler controller PCA located in the lower part of the stapler The main components of the stapler are listed in table 5 4 Power is provided to the stapler by the Multibin Mailbox 5 bin mailbox with Stapler external 24V DC power supply through the C link 5 bin cable The stapler is mounted in the Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler replacing the three standard output bins It handles letter and A4 sizes of plain paper The stapler can staple up to a maximum of 20 sheets Paper Paths and Components 133 Main Functional Cycles of the Stapler The stapler cycles are described in the following paragraphs and illustrated in figure 5 22 Paper Feed Cycle The stapler bed assembly receives the paper from the Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler Head assembly The IR Sensor detect
191. er is packaged or unpackaged e DONOT store printed documents in vinyl folders which may contain plasticizers or expose the documents to petroleum based solvents Shipping Print Media When shipping print media through different environments plastic wrap all cartons on the shipping pallet When shipping media across bodies of water wrap individual cartons as well Packaging must protect the media from physical damage Media Selection Guidelines 13 Product Overview External View of HP LaserJet 8000 N DN Engine Figure 1 2 HP LaserJet 8000 N DN Engine Front and Right Side View with Tray 1 Open Left Output Bin Control Panel Standard Output Bin Adjustable Paper Stop Top Cover Tray 1 Tray 1 Extensions Tray 1 Paper Width Guides Input Slot for 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 O AN O 0A RAON 14 Chapter 1 Product Information EN 10 Tray 1 Pickup Roller 11 Tray 2 12 Tray 3 13 On Off Switch 14 Front Access Door Not shown Duplexer internal 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox and stand 2000 sheet Input Tray Envelope Feeder 8 bin Multibin Mailbox Printer stand Note You will need a stand for the LCO if you have an input device or cabinet EN Product Overview 15 16 15 Figure 1 3 External View of HP Mopier 240 1 2 3 gt O 6 7 14 O UD W HP Mopier 240 Front and Right Side V
192. er motor in the Multibin Mailbox An external memory error occurred in the Multibin Mailbox The Multibin Mailbox C link is not responding The power line had a power surge Recommended Action 1 Check for stuck paper in the Flipper Assembly area 2 If the problem persists replace the Flipper Assembly 3 If the problem persists replace the Multibin Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions Replace the Multibin Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions Check the C link connection and cables Replace the C link cables Printer Messages 393 Image Quality When you are working with customers obtain a print sample before you begin troubleshooting their printer Ask the customer to explain the quality they expect from the printer The print sample will also help clarify the customer s explanation Table 7 7 Image Quality Problem Action 1 Do you have a print sample Obtain a print sample from the customer 2 Does the problem repeat on Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler in figure 7 10 on page 408 the page 3 Is the toner cartridge full and Check the toner cartridge using the check list on page 395 is it manufactured by HP 4 Is the printer clean
193. er or a piece of tape 3 Identify the DIP switch SW1 upper right corner of the controller PCA 4 Identify the service LED LED1 near the C link connectors Note The DIP switch is on if it is to the right The DIP switch is off if it is to the left Table 7 28 DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test DIP Switch Normal Motor Standalone Running Test Sensor Test Settings Test Mailbox Stacker 1 Off On On Off Off 2 Off On Off On Off 3 Off Off On Off On 4 Off On Off On On 422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Motor Test This test allows you to verify the functionality of the main motor face down solenoid and face up diverter solenoid 1 5 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test Set the DIP switches for the motor test see table 7 28 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position Press and hold in the interlock switch A self test should be performed then the main motor will start moving continuously until the interlock switch is released The service LED will flash every 0 5 seconds If any other pattern results with the service LED see table 7 29 on page 424 for the possible causes Push in the power supply switch to the normal position 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Running Test This test allows you to feed paper into the unit to test the paper path without a connection to the printer You can configure either the Mailbox Mode or
194. er receives the PRNT signal from the Formatter PCA Then the DC Controller activates the Pickup Solenoid SL1 and starts feeding paper through the Paper Input Unit PIU triggering photosensors PS2 and then PS1 These sensors inform the DC Controller that paper has passed through the PIU and is present at the Registration Assembly When the Laser Scanner and Fuser are ready the DC Controller sends the VSREQ signal to the Formatter When the Formatter has processed the print data it sends the VSYNC and VDO signals to the DC Controller The paper is then released from the Registration Assembly by CL1 and fed to the photosensitive drum starting the image transfer and fusing processes After the paper passes through the Fuser it triggers PS1403 and PS1402 to the specified type size and destination of the paper being fed through the printer 136 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN Printing from Tray 1 The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper Present Sensor PS1301 The lifting plate pressurization solenoid SL2 is then activated releasing the plate that applies upward pressure on the paper and causing it to contact the Tray 1 pickup roller The Tray 1 Feed Clutch CL3 turns on at this time and feeds the paper from Tray 1 to the registration position The remainder of the Tray 1 print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process described in Printing from Trays 2 and 3 on page 136 Printing
195. era AS no eS ae 165 Top Cover 1 of 2 zia ee ae eee Ate HE BAH 166 Top Cover 2 of 2 2 5 SE epee Rete et Wee Sk 167 Delivery Unit 1 of 2 s2 a ene See eee Shee eee Soe 169 Delivery Unit 2 of 2 eae egos ee ea se BO he 170 Diverter Assembly Hua aos Sie cee Sonne ais 172 Diverter Door Assembly a ee ae oe 173 Right Lower Door Assembly 1 of 3 174 Right Lower Door Assembly 2 of 3 175 Right Lower Door Assembly 3 of 3 176 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 1 of 2 a Bi aE rt ee Aa a 177 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 2 of 2 NA eres ee a a AE 178 Fan 2 LVPS ereere ASANG Bae Ehad Eoi eoh Tan ana 179 Fan 3 Formatter Sad gS ap 180 Fan 4 Delivery Unit 182 Feeder Assembly 1 of 2 47 sA AE aya arenes 183 Feeder Assembly 2 of 2 cece See Gala Sis ts 184 Formatter Assembly te ieee ae 186 Fusing Assembly a Aaa ae ee eee Shee eee 187 Laser Scanner Assembly cen ee ee ee sees 189 Main Gear Assembly 1 of 3 see ne ee eee 191 Main Gear Assembly 2 of 3 mala see ee ae aa 192 Main Gear Assembly 3 of 3 lt maa eo aie Fi che ig ors 193 Main Motor Pa EG ae ee oe AN ae ei 194 Paper Input Units paa TAE soe rie eee eee ee 195 DC Controller PCA Buena AG Hes eked Gorm oe So Ree 197 Output Paper Sensor PCA 1 of 4 198 O
196. ered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Note CAUTION WARNING EN Conventions This manual uses the following conventions The names of major printer parts and assemblies are Capitalized Color is used to emphasize items which are important to the material under discussion Bold is used for emphasis particularly in situations where italic type would be confusing Italic type is used to indicate related documents or emphasis Notes contain important information set off from the text Caution messages alert you to the possibility of damage to equipment or loss of data Warning messages alert you to the possibility of personal injury Chapter Descriptions 1 Product Information Contains printer features and product overview tray capacities and sizes media specifications service approach how to get technical assistance and required safety and compliance statements 2 Site Requirements Contains space and environmental requirements 3 Operating Overview Contains details about control panel menus restoring factory defaults and resetting and testing the printer 4 Maintenance and Adjustments Contains cleaning and preventive maintenance information and adjustment procedures for paper trays 5 Functional Overview Contains block diagrams and basic theory of operation for the printer systems paper paths and paper handling accessories Contains basic cabling information 6 Removal and Replacement Cont
197. ero Using the Event Log take the page count shown at the top of the page and add the page count from any all errors preceding any 68 errors Use this number and enter it into the Control Panel from Service Mode Will not print from 2000 sheet Input Tray or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 1 Print the Configuration Page Make sure that the Paper Handling Controller and 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray are listed in the Paper Handling Options section 2 Verify that power is supplied the to the 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray General Troubleshooting Information 427 3 Run a paper path test from Tray 4 or 5 If the test is successful the paper size detection switches may have failed or an incorrect size is specified in the application software 4 Replace the Paper Handling Controller if it is not shown on the Configuration Page 5 Verify that the C link cables are connected as shown in figure 7 8 on page 346 Reseat the C link Cable and inspect for pushed in pins Replace the C link Cable Replace the 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA Print Voids on pages after coming out of PowerSave mode Turn PowerSave mode off PowerSave is an item under the Configuration Menu and retry Jams when printing envelopes transparencies or labels to the Multibin Mailbox or Stapler The Multibin Mailbox does not support these media Direct these media to the Left Output Bin top bin of the Multibin Mailbox
198. es and their component parts Please refer to the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for additional subassemblies and components Each table lists the reference designator item number for each part the associated part number for the item the quantity and a description of the part While looking for a part number pay careful attention to the voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number selected is for the correct model of printer Note Parts that have no item or part number listed are not field replaceable parts and cannot be ordered Ordering Parts All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered from HP s support Materials Organization SMO or Support Materials Europe SME Hewlett Packard Co Support Materials Organization 8050 Foothills Blvd Roseville CA 95678 Parts Direct Ordering 1 800 227 8164 U S Only Hewlett Packard Co Support Materials Europe Wolf Hirth Strasse 33 D 7030 B blingen Germany 49 7031 14 2253 Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other local phone numbers 442 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Accessories and Supplies Note EN The accessories supplies and parts listed in Chapter 1 and in the following pages are available through your local authorized HP dealer To find a dealer near you or if your dealer is temporarily out of stock call the
199. es for instructions Replace Tray 4 paper pickup assembly See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions Image Quality 407 Repetitive Defect Ruler Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller within the printer or the toner cartridge Use figure 7 10 to isolate the cause of repetitive print defects Align the first occurrence of the defect with the top of the ruler and measure to the next occurrence of the defect to determine the roller in question When you are certain that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler replace the indicated roller First occurence of print defect gt Registration Roller 44 mm 1 73 in Toner Cartridge Primary Charging Roller 44 4 mm 1 75 in Melee Face Up Delivery Roller 47 mm 1 86 in __ gt Toner Cartridge Developing Roller 53 5 mm 2 11 in gt Transfer Roller 58 4 mm 2 30iIn ly Fuser Lower Roller 94 mm 3 71 in Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm 3 71 in Fuser Upper Roller 125 mm 4 92 in oo Doo gt Figure 7 10 Repetitive Defect Ruler 408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Image System Troubleshooting Half Self Test Functional Check The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following stages Cleaning removing excess toner from drum su
200. es not contain the Load the specified size of specified size of paper paper into Tray Error One of the following occurred 1 Load the requested paper There is no paper loaded in the into the specified tray specified tray or the paper is not Make sure that the trays are the size requested or the control correctly adjusted for size panel is not set for the size of The tray type settings and paper loaded size for Tray 1 must be set e The tray is not properly from the printer s control adjusted for size panel The default paper size is set If you are trying to print A4 or incorrectly letter size paper and this e If this message appears and message appears make the tray contains the correct size sure that the default paper of paper a sensor could be size is set correctly from the damaged or a paper sensor Printing Menu in the printer s lever could be stuck control panel 2 Press Go to print from the next available tray 3 Press VALUE to scroll through the available types and sizes 4 Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size 5 Inspect the switches in the tray 6 Turn the printer on with the tray removed and push the switches by hand to see if they register 370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Warning Error Error Error Error EN Description The specified
201. eseat the duplex assembly 3 Replace the duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Check the entire paper path 2 Remove the duplex assembly and look for paper in the side of the assembly 3 Retest 4 Replace the duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Open the front door and remove any paper 2 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 3 Make sure that paper is being delivered to the Duplexer 4 Replace the Duplexer if necessary See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions Remove the jam from the location indicated on the control panel EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message EN Event Log Category Message 13 22 01 13 22 11 13 22 12 13 22 15 13 22 17 13 22 21 13 22 22 13 22 25 13 22 27 13 22 31 13 22 32 13 22 35 13 22 37 Description One of the following occurred on the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox e An unexpected page at the entry sensor The page did not reach the entry sensor paper path sensor 1 paper path sensor 2 or left output bin delivery sensor on time e The page stayed at the entry sensor paper path sensor 1 paper path sensor 2 or left output bin delivery sensor A page was found at the entry sensor paper path sensor 1 paper path sensor 2 or left output delivery sensor during the power on sequence Recommended Action 1 Remove the media from
202. eshooting 428 verifying installation 342 weight 8 multi purpose tray see tray 1 N network cards see EIO cards networks troubleshooting 346 noise printer 10 troubleshooting 426 O operating environment 46 operating overview 51 options see accessories ordering parts 28 442 output paper sensor PCA removing and replacing 198 outriggers leveling feet 2 x 500 sheet input tray 322 overcurrent overvoltage protection 100 overhead transparencies see transparencies overriding control panel settings 54 416 P page count 82 setting 75 78 185 troubleshooting 427 page skew troubleshooting 404 427 pages per minute ppm 2 paper curl troubleshooting 431 ordering 22 selection guidelines 11 shipping 13 sizes 4 memory requirements 27 specifications guide ordering 24 storing 13 weight 4 paper deck drive assembly 2 x 500 sheet input tray 311 paper handling accessories locations 19 ordering 20 paper handling components parts and diagrams 446 paper handling menu 60 paper input unit PIU 195 removing and replacing 195 sensor 214 paper jams detection 138 multi bin mailbox or mailbox with stapler 428 troubleshooting 412 414 416 paper motion monitoring and control 105 paper path cleaning 89 cover 7 bin tabletop mailbox 271 test 80 415 troubleshooting 414 paper paths and components 2 x 500 sheet input tray 122 7 bin tabletop mailbox 124 duplexer 117 envelope feeder 117 printer 117 stapler 131
203. ested in a typical configuration with Hewlett Packard Personal Computer Systems This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This printer contains Local Area Network LAN options When the Interface Cable is attached to either of the IEEE 802 3 connectors the printer meets the requirements of EN 55022 Class A January 15 1997 For Compliance Information ONLY contact Australia Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 Australia European Contact Your Local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett Packard Gmbh Department HQ TRE Standards Europe Herrenberger Stra e 130 D 71034 B blingen FAX 49 7031 14 3143 USA Contact Product Regulations Manager Hewlett Packard Company PO Box 15 Mail Stop 160 Boise ID 83707 0015 Phone 208 396 6000 EN Declaration of Conformity 41 Safety Statements WARNING Laser Safety Statement The Center for Devices and Radiological Health CDRH of the U S Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1 1976 Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States The printer is certified as a Cl
204. et figure 6 11 callout 6 before replacing the Delivery Unit screws Make sure that the plastic clips figure 6 11 callout 5 are snapped into place before tightening the mounting screws figure 6 11 callout 4 EN Delivery Unit for Standard Output Bin 171 Diverter Assembly Figure 6 13 Diverter Assembly CAUTION Support the Diverter Assembly access door during this procedure to prevent damage to the plastic hinge pins 1 Open the Diverter Assembly access door and release the support struts figure 6 13 callout 1 by sliding the strut ends forward and downward 2 Remove 6 self tapping screws figure 6 13 callout 2 Note The access door support struts will fall free when the Diverter Assembly is lifted away from the access door 3 Lift the Diverter Assembly up and away from the access door 172 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Door Assembly Diverter Figure 6 14 Diverter Door Assembly 1 Open the Diverter access door and release the support struts figure 6 14 callout 1 by sliding the strut ends forward and downward 2 Rotate the door up to align the flat sides of the right hinge pin with the retaining slot figure 6 14 callout 2 and lift upwards to release it from the retaining slot 3 Continue lifting up on the right side of the door while pushing it to the left to rotate the left hinge pin out of its locating cavity To Reinstall 1 Insert the left side of the door into position first and then
205. et Tray Tray 4 C4781A ex 1 or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 amp 5 serv C4780A 08 Tray 2 RG5 3951 000CN 1 09 Tray 3 RG5 3952 000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 RF5 1484 000CN 1 not shown Paper Size Guide Label Trays 2 and 3 RS5 8605 000CN 1 10 Duplexer C4782A C4782 60501 C478260501 ex 1 C3762 60501 serv 11 Duplexer Roller 1 RB1 6822 000CN 1 12 8 bin Multibin Mailbox C4785A 1 or 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler C4787A 13 Left Output Bin RB1 6491 000CN 1 14 EIO Coverplate 5021 0349 3 not shown Stapler C4787 60500 1 not shown 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox C4783A not shown 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray C4780A not shown Stand for 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox C4784A C4784 60500 not shown Packaging Kit Printer C3166 67905 not shown Packaging Kit duplexer C3762 60500 not shown Packaging Kit 2000 sheet Tray C3763 60500 not shown Packaging Kit Multibin Mailbox C3764 60500 not shown Packaging Kit Envelope Feeder C3765 60500 not shown Maintenance Kit 100 120V C3971B C3971 69002 ex not shown Maintenance Kit 220 240V C3972B C3972 69002 ex not shown C link Cable Assembly 178 cm 2000 sheet C3764 70000 Input Tray to Multibin Mailbox not shown C link Cable Assembly 61 cm Engine to C3763 70000 2000 sheet Input Tray not shown C link Cable Assembly 97 cm Multibin C3766 60512 Mailbox to Stapler 446 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Table 8 1 Printer and Paper Handling Components continued
206. etop up to 120 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 16 to 28 Ib Mailbox sheets per Legal B5 JIS B4 11 x 17 ISO 60 to 105 g m bin A3 envelopes transparencies labels Note B5 JIS B4 11 x 17 ISO A3 envelopes transparencies and labels are only supported in the left output bin Envelope Feeder up to 100 Envelope sizes Commercial 10 16 to 24 Ib envelopes C5 DL Monarch ISO B5 JPostD 60 to 90 g m Duplexer Paper sizes Letter Legal 16 to 28 Ib 11X17 A3 A4 B4 60 to 105 g m EN Paper Capacities and Sizes 5 Identification Model and Serial Numbers The model and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer The model number is alphanumeric such as C4085A for the HP LaserJet 8000 printer and C4228A for the HP Mopier 240 The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin the Revision Level the Production Code and production number of the printer The rear labels also contain power rating and regulatory information as shown in figure 1 1 HEWLETT POWER RATING ra ZONER RATING PACKARD 100 120V AC Tested To Comply HEWLETT PACKARD ag f 4 With FCC Standards VE 11311 CHINDEN BLVD 50 60 Hz 11 2A FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE BOISE IDAHO 83714 USA This product conforms with CDRH radiation performance standard 21 Model No C4085A CFR chapter 1 sub shapter J fat AMO eumee NOME Class B requirements NYCE Serial No USBCONO MANUFACTURED Li
207. fications Guide Turn EconoMode off Use Hewlett Packard approved transparencies see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Turn EconoMode off Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry lint free cloth DO NOT touch the Transfer Roller with your fingers If the problem persists replace the Transfer Roller Assembly See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 219 for instructions Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions Recommended Action Reload proper amount of paper squarely in the tray Review paper loading with the customer Make sure that the paper guide is adjusted for the correct paper size and is locked into position Image Quality 403 aBboCc aBbCc aBboCc aBbCce aBbCce AGBoCc AaBoCc AaBbCCe AaBoCc AaBoCc Table 7 18 Faulty Registration continued Possible Cause 3 Paper does not meet specifications The surface of the paper may be too smooth for the Pickup and Feed Rollers to correctly feed paper into the printer 4 Drive gears are worn or broken If any gear within the drive train or paper path becomes excessively worn or dirty erratic paper movement can result 5 Worn Pickup or Registration Rollers Paper is not being picked up consistently Table 7 19 Image Skew Possible Cause 1 Paper is loaded incorrectly If the paper is not installed flush into the paper tray a skewing problem
208. figure 6 44 callout 2 5 Remove 2 screws at rear of assembly figure 6 43 callout 3 208 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 45 EN Registration Assembly 3 of 3 6 To Lift the registration guide and remove 2 screws at the front of the assembly figure 6 45 callout 4 Reinstall Lift the registration guide and place the Registration Assembly into position Lift the registration guide and make sure that the locator pin near the right screw is properly positioned Make sure that the grounding strap is under the left screw Be sure to connect the clutch cable connector After replacing the 4 screws replace the Main Gear Train Shield Tilt the top outward tuck the lower tabs in place and snap the cover down into position Registration Assembly 209 Roller and Separation Pad Tray 1 Feed Roller Figure 6 46 Tray 1 Feed Roller 1 Open the Tray 1 door and remove the plastic shield 2 Pinch the retainer tabs together figure 6 46 callout 1 and slide the roller to the left off of the shaft 210 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Separation Pad Tray 1 Separation Pad 1 Open the Tray 1 door and remove the Feed Roller 2 Insert a flat bladed screwdriver into the slot figure 6 47 callout 2 and carefully pry the separation pad upwards out of its retaining notches To Reinstall Make sure the metal edge of the Separation pad faces forward EN Roller and Separation
209. files on the device Delete files using HP JetAdmin HP FontSmart or another software utility See the software help for more information 2 If the message persists increase the size of the RAM disk Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer s control panel Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin No action required Re insert the duplexer No action required When the current print job is done the internal page will print EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Log Category Message Status Status Status Status Status Warning Warning EN Description Displays during an active I O reset from the control panel When the reset is completed the printer returns to the ready state and automatically goes online Displays during an all I O reset from the control panel When the reset is completed the printer returns to the ready state and automatically goes online Displays during a reset from the control panel When the reset is completed the printer returns to the ready state and automatically goes online Displays during a reset anda The printer is in service or maintenance mode The stapler device is running out of staples The external paper handling stapler device is out of staples Recommended Action No action required No action required No action required No acti
210. flags are blocked from rotating through this access Recommended Action 1 Load the empty tray to clear the message If you do not load the specified tray the printer will continue printing from the next available tray and the message will continue to display 2 Make sure that the paper out flag is not stuck in the down position by rough media Do this before opening the tray To check this flag without opening Tray 2 remove the Duplexer if it is present 3 Open the Front Access Door This provides you with a clear view of the Tray 2 paper out sensor flag To check this flag without opening Tray 3 use a flashlight to observe the paper out flag If either paper flag is damaged replace the paper flag or the paper input tray If the printer is using Tray 2 or 3 and the message is accompanied by a clicking noise every few seconds replace the Paper Input Unit Assembly See Paper Input Unit PIU on page 195 for instructions Printer Messages 369 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message 3 Error Displays when tray is in the 1 If the message does not process of lifting the paper to the go away verify that the top of the tray for proper feeding media can be pulled from another tray 2 The Paper Input Unit may need to be replaced See Paper Input Unit PIU on page 195 for instructions Error Tray do
211. for information about downloading forms and patterns to the disk For the Macintosh environment see the online help in the HP LaserJet Utility Guide included with the HP LaserJet Utility software For the Windows environment see your HP Windows driver online help Determining Memory Requirements The amount of memory you need depends on the types of documents you print With the PCL printer language the printer can print most text and graphics at 300 or 600 dpi without additional memory Add memory to your printer if you Commonly print complex graphics e Use many downloaded fonts e Print complex documents e Use advanced functions such as I O Buffering and Resource Saving For the HP LaserJet 8000 printer you can add up to 3 x 64 MB DIMMS of memory for a total of 192 MB If you have the HP LaserJet 8000 DN printer or HP Mopier 240 you can add up to 64 MB of additional memory for a total of 192 MB Table 1 8 presents the amount of memory required for the most common print jobs performed with the HP LaserJet 8000 N DN and HP Mopier 240 using 600 dpi printing 26 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Table 1 8 Minimum Memory Requirements Print Job Paper Size PCL Minimum PostScript Memory Emulation Requirements Minimum Memory Requirements single sided printing Letter A4 Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 x 17 in A3 16 MB 16 MB two sided printing Letter A4 16 MB 16 MB Legal 16 MB 16 MB 11 x 17 in A3 16 MB 16 MB EN
212. from the Envelope Feeder The Envelope Feeder mounts in slots above Tray 1 The printer can print from Tray 1 when the Envelope Feeder is installed When the print job calls for an envelope it is fed directly to the Registration Assembly From there the print process is identical to the Tray 2 and 3 process described in Printing from Trays 2 and 3 on page 136 Printing from the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 Trays 4 and 5 feed the paper upward through a guide slot in the Lower Right Door Assembly to the Paper Input Unit Once there the operation is the same as printing from Trays 2 and 3 described in Printing from Trays 2 and 3 on page 136 Two Sided Printing The duplexer mounts inside the printer below the Fusing Assembly The back side of the paper is printed first the paper is turned over and then fed back to the Registration Assembly for front side printing When the print job calls for 2 sided printing a solenoid in the duplexer operates the duplex flipper in the Diverter Assembly and routes the paper to the duplexer The paper does not exit the printer when being turned over for 2 sided printing It is routed through a slot in the back of the duplexer down inside the left cover and under Tray 3 When the duplexer senses the trailing edge of the paper it reverses direction and feeds the paper back through the duplexer to the Registration Assembly Printer Input Sources 13
213. fting plate SL2 1J1301 5 J214 5 solenoid i Manual feed 11303 2 clutch Face up solenoid Fusing unit Fusing main heater J52 1 switch Fusing sub heater Figure 7 20 EN 24VA MPTSLD MTPCLD FUSLD RLD FSRDIE FSRCT1 FSRD1 FSRD1R FSRD2E FSRCT2 FSRD2 FSRD2R RLDSNS REMT24 FSRTYP1 FSRTYP2 DC Controller PCA L to raise the lifting plate L to rotate the manual feeding pick up roller L to deliver printed paper with face up L to turn the relay off and cut power to the fixing heater Fusing main heater drive signal pulse L when the current transformer detects a failure in the main healer For 200 V model only When the FSRDIE signal is output and this signal is L the main heater turns on For 200 V model only When the FSRDIE signal is output and this signal is L the main heater turns on Fusing sub heater drive signal pulse L when the current transformer detects a failure in the sub heater For 200 V model only When the FSRD2E signal is output and this signal is L the sub heater turns on For 200 V model only When the FSRD2E signal is output and this signal is L the sub heater turns on L when the relay turns off L when the rated power of the power supply is different from that of the fixing unit 200 V model only H when the power supply outputs 24V to the DC controller
214. g A print job requested a printer 1 Print the job using a driver language that does not exist in for a different printer the printer The job will not print language or add the and will be cleared from requested language to the memory printer if available 2 Press Go to continue EN Printer Messages 353 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Recommended Action Log Category Message Message Description Status The printer is attempting to No action is required remove unusable paper This might occur after you clear a paper jam Error Displays when any door is open Close the top cover or side doors Status Warning Displays when the received data is waiting for a form feed The EIO disk had a critical failure and can no longer be No action required Remove the EIO disk and replace it with a new one used 1 Check the filename and directory name 2 Reattempt the operation Warning The requested operation could not be performed You might have attempted an illegal operation such as trying to download a file to a non existent directory The disk is full 1 Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again or add a flash DIMM 2 Download or delete files from HP JetAdmin and download or delete fonts from HP FontSmart See the software help for more information Warning Disable the write protection through HP JetAdmin Warning The EIO d
215. ge 166 e Front Cover see figure 6 6 on page 163 2 Unplug and re route the fan cable out of the way figure 6 11 callout 1 3 Remove 1 screw figure 6 11 callout 2 to loosen the grounding strip 4 Remove 1 screw figure 6 11 callout 3 and remove the metal fan shield 5 Open the Diverter Assembly access door remove 2 screws figure 6 11 callout 4 release the plastic retaining tabs figure 6 11 callout 5 and remove the metal mounting bracket figure 6 11 callout 6 EN Delivery Unit for Standard Output Bin 169 Figure 6 12 Delivery Unit 2 of 2 6 Remove 2 screws figure 6 12 callout 5 and 1 screw figure 6 12 callout 6 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit 7 Lift the left end of the Delivery Unit approximately 1 8 inch to clear the alignment pin and carefully rock it forward and backward while sliding it out of the chassis 170 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN To Reinstall CAUTION Be careful not to damage the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit 1 Place the plastic edge on the right end of the Delivery Unit into the chassis Make sure that the plastic support tab on the right end of the Delivery Unit slides on top of the chassis 2 Make sure that the plastic sensor flags and gears on the left end of the Delivery Unit are properly positioned not jammed 3 Replace the metal mounting brack
216. ge C3166 69007 1 04D Low Voltage Power Supply Universal Exchange C3166 69008 1 05 Fuse LVPS 110 120V VD5 0056 301CN 1 05A Fuse LVPS Universal VD7 0646 301CN 1 06 Guide PCA RB1 6771 000CN 1 07 Guide Slide RB1 6775 000CN 1 08 Formatter Shield RF5 1466 000CN 1 11 Fan 3 RH7 1271 000CN 1 12 Fan 3 Cable RG5 1921 000CN 1 13 Registration Cable RG5 1928 000CN 1 13A Connector 7P VS1 5057 007CN 1 13B Connector 3P RG5 1928 000CN 1 15 Fan 2 RH7 1266 000CN 1 17 Plate Shield RF5 1464 000CN 1 20 Paper Size Sensing PCA Trays 2 and 3 RG5 1845 000CN 2 21 Cassette Size Sensor Cable RG5 1920 000CN 1 CH101 Screw with Washer XA9 0872 000CN 16 CH104 Screw CT M3X3 XB5 7303 007CN 4 458 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN Figure 8 7 Stapler Internal Components EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 459 Table 8 7 Stapler Internal Components Ref Description Part Number QTY Stapler Assembly C4787 60500 1 Exchange Stapler C4787 69500 1 1 Top Cover Assembly C3766 60501 1 2 Stapling Bed Assembly C3766 60503 1 3 Stapler Control PCA C4787 60501 1 4 Back Plate C3766 60505 1 5 Hinges Set of C3766 60506 1 6 Wire Frame C3766 60507 1 7 Brushes C3766 60508 1 not shown Stapler Packaging C3766 60509 1 8 Kit Plastic staple cover scan bar shown C3766 60510 1 bin full sensor actuator and flag not shown not shown Kit T10 Torx screws 10 C3766 6051 1 1 9 C link Cable 97 cm C3766 60512 1 not shown
217. h the host system Will the printer print from all sources to all destinations and have all of the errors in the Event Log been addressed Contains procedures for verifying the overall printer system operation 328 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 1 Major Steps for Troubleshooting continued Printer Messages Does the control pane display an error message on page 351 Contains a list of control panel error messages and recommended actions EN Troubleshooting Process 329 Figure 7 1 330 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Power On Is the printer on and displaying a readable Power On Checks B After control panel display becomes functional Go to Step 2 Display Does the display indicate any of the following READY OFFLINE POWERSAVE ON A Show Event Log to display information on Current Event and correct it B After correcting all messages and errors Go to Step 3 Configuration Will it print a Configuration Page A Show Event Log to display information on Current Event and correct it B After verifying configuration page Go to Step 4 HP LaserJet Troubleshooting Process 1 of 2 EN Image Quality Does the print quality meet customer requirements A Compare configuration pages to samples B After meeting print quality requirements Go to Step 5 Figure 7 2 EN Event Log Have you evaluated the event log A
218. hapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Formatter Assembly Note EN Setting Page Count Maintenance Count and Serial Number The page count maintenance count and printer serial numbers are stored in Non Volatile Memory is the total number of images printed by the printer i r is the page count when the next preventive maintenance should be performed every 350 000 images and 3 ti is the printer serial number also located on the printer back cover If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3 12 on page 76 Before removing the old Formatter PCA print a Configuration Page to verify the current values if possible If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3 below After verifying the page count maintenance count and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA replace it with the new PCA 1 Enter Service Mode as described in Service Mode on page 75 2 When 3 Service Menu is displayed press MENU to access the Press ITEMS to display and 3 Enter the appropriate values for each item Press Go to exit Service Mode Formatter Assembly 185 Removing and Replacing the Formatter Assembly ASA SANT Figure 6 25
219. he paper source type option Select the correct media source type for the first page Select the correct media source type for all other pages You must have the HP LaserJet 8000 printer selected in your application in order for your application to provide you with the correct paper tray and media type selections Do not make changes to the driver unless the application does not provide this option Print job settings selected through your application always override settings made through the printer driver Printer settings made in the application or print driver always override the corresponding setting made on the printer Control Panel 10 Print the document 430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Paper Curl Paper curl is inherent to the laser printing processes as it occurs when paper is subjected to heat Paper curl tends to relax as the paper cools while resting on a flat surface The specification for maximum paper curl when the paper is lying flat before print is 0 2 inches 5 mm Although paper curl cannot be totally eliminated some steps can be taken to lessen its impact as suggested in the following table Table 7 30 Paper Curl Possible Cause 1 Paper Path 2 Paper Surface 3 Paper Storing and Handling 4 Paper Type EN Recommended Action Try using Tray 1 and output the paper to the left output bin The recommended printing surface of the page is usually marked on the end of a ream of paper
220. heck for proper cable connection in the flipper area 4 If the problem persists replace the Flipper Assembly See Flipper Assembly on page 227 for instructions 5 Replace the Mailbox Controller PCA See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions EN Printer Messages 361 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Log Category Message 65 22 02 65 22 03 65 22 04 362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting An elevator problem home not found elevator problem scanning bins error or slider jam occurred in the Multibin Mailbox Recommended Action 1 Make sure that the blind cover and scan bar are installed properly 2 Check for paper jam in the delivery head assembly 3 Make sure that the delivery head assembly moves freely 4 Make sure that all the paper bins are seated correctly 5 Make sure that the paper bins and blind covers are not broken 6 Perform a paper path test See Paper Path Test on page 415 7 Check for damaged sensors in the delivery head assembly 8 Check the fingers in the head assembly They must be over the ejector rollers 9 Replace the delivery head assembly See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 10 Replace the delivery head
221. hen REST appears briefly on the display The display will read Press GO to bring the printer online The Cold Reset is now complete Cold Reset 85 86 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN EN Maintenance and Adjustments Chapter Contents Cleaning the Printer and Accessories 88 Preventative Maintenance 91 Tray Adjustment Procedure 92 Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure 94 Chapter Contents 87 Cleaning the Printer and Accessories WARNING CAUTION To maintain print quality and paper performance thoroughly clean the printer and the paper handling accessories Every time you change the toner cartridge e After printing approximately 15 000 images Whenever print quality problems occur Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly dampened cloth Clean the inside with only a dry lint free cloth Use the guidelines listed in table 4 1 Observe the warnings and cautions below Before you begin these steps turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area It may be HOT To avoid permanent damage to the toner cartridge do not use ammonia based cleaners on or around the printer Do not touch the transfer roller with your fingers This can cause print quality problems 88 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments EN Cleaning the Printer 1 Before you b
222. i meee will aes one ais lay panel If the toner cartridge is missing 1 will be displayed Print Density Adjustment The HVPS also controls the image density by varying the voltages applied to the developing cylinder in the toner cartridge These voltages determine the amount of toner applied to the photosensitive drum Print density is adjusted from the control panel Print Quality Menu or from the driver software Primary Charging Roller Toner Registration Toner Sensor Drum Ground Developing Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 5 4 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts EN Power Distribution System 101 Formatter System The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following Controlling the PowerSave mode e Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces e Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status information through the Control Panel and the Bi Directional I O e Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine e Storing font information Communicating with the host computer through the Bi Directional Interface The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the bidirectional parallel port IEEE 1284 and separates it into image information and instructions which control the printing process
223. ic software commands are sent to the printer Control Panel Menus 67 Table 3 8 Configuration Menu continued ltem Values 68 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Explanation This item dedicates printer memory to save each language s permanent resources You might need to add memory to the printer in order for this item to appear The amount of memory set aside can be different for each installed language Some languages might have memory set aside for resource saving without requiring all languages to do so Any time the amount of memory dedicated to a specific language is changed all languages will lose all saved resources including any unprocessed print jobs 3 No language resource saving is performed and language dependent resources such as fonts and macros are lost when language or resolution changes h An item will appear for each installed language that allows the user to allocate a particular amount of memory to that language s resource saving area See ve items below FLITE The printer automatically determines the amount of memory to use for each installed language s resource saving area Set the amount of time that a clearable warning is displayed on the printer s control panel 3 Warning messages display on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated CN Warning messages display on the control panel until GO is pressed This item determines how the
224. ications Guide The printer is suited for the use of recycled paper according to DIN 19 309 It is advisable to place printers with a sound power level of Lwad of 6 3 Bel A or higher into a separate or divided up room EN Environmental Conformity 39 Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45014 Manufacturer s Name Hewlett Packard Company Manufacturer s Address 11311 Chinden Boulevard Boise Idaho 83714 1021 USA declares that the product Product Name HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN HP Mopier 240 Model Numbers C4085A C4086A C4087A C4228A Product Options ALL conforms to the following Product Specifications Safety IEC 950 1991 A1 A2 A3 EN 60950 1992 A1 A2 A3 IEC 825 1 1993 EN 60825 1 1994 Class 1 Laser LED EMC CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class B CISPR 22 1993 A1 EN 55022 1994 Class A EN 50082 1 1992 IEC 801 2 1991 prEN 55024 2 1992 4 kV CD 8 kV AD IEC 801 3 1984 prEN 55024 3 1991 3 V m IEC 801 4 1988 prEN 55024 4 1992 0 5 kV Signal Lines 40 Chapter 1 Product Information EN 1 0 kV Power Lines FCC Title 47 CFR Part 15 Class B ICES 003 Issue 2 VCCI B AS NZS 3548 1992 CISPR 22 1993 Class B Supplementary Information The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the CE marking accordingly the EMC directive 89 336 EEC the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC The product was t
225. iew with Tray 1 Open Left Output Bin Control Panel Standard Output Bin Adjustable Paper Stop Top Cover Envelope Feeder optional Tray 1 multipurpose Tray 1 Extensions Tray 1 Paper Width Guides 10 Front Door O AN O oa FF WO N 16 Chapter 1 Product Information EN EN 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Tray 2 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 not shown 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 amp 5 Tray 3 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler On Off Switch Duplexer internal Stapler Product Overview 17 Figure 1 4 Formatter Assemblies Rear and Left Side View 1 2 3 4 oa o ON QO Formatter Pan Assembly Parallel IEEE 1284 Interface Port EIO Slot 3 Location EIO Slot 2 Location Hard Disk Accessory Location optional for LJ 8000 N DN and standard for HP Mopier 240 External Paper Handling Controller Port behind EIO Slot 2 Hard Disk Accessory Location EIO Slot 1 Location Firmware DIMM DIMM Slots 3 AC Power Connector 10 Model and Serial Number Label 18 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Accessories and Options The accessories and optional equipment for the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N and 8000 DN printers is shown in figure 1 5 and described in table 1 7 For the HP Mopier 240 C4228A all the accessories in figure 1 5 and in table 1 7 are standard features except for the Envelope Feeder and the Multibin Mailbox replaced with the 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler
226. in with a capacity of 100 sheets for a total capacity of 1350 non stapled sheets The Multibin Mailbox 8 bin and the 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler have similar functionality performance and parts The stapler fits into the Multibin Mailbox by removing the three upper bins The assemblies and subassemblies of the stapler are listed in table 5 4 The motors sensors and switches are illustrated and described in figure 5 21 and table 5 5 Table 5 4 Stapler Major Assemblies and Subassemblies Major Assembly Subassemblies Stapler bed Assembly Retainer Assembly Sliders Assembly Top Cover Assembly Stapler Assembly Rack Assembly Registration Pusher Off Set Pusher Exit Flap Assembly Housing Output Bin Bin Full Sensor Actuator Wire Frame Stapler Controller PCA N A EN Paper Paths and Components 131 PS Rack STL Sensor IR Sensor PS Bin Full swi PS Retainer PS Slid ider ea m4 Next Bin Full Sensor Figure 5 21 Stapler Motors Sensors and Switches Table 5 5 Stapler Motors Sensors and Switches Control Title Location Device M1 Stapler DC Motor Stapler Assembly M2 Rack Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M3 Slider Stepper Motor Top Cover Assembly M4 Retainer DC Motor Stapler bed Assembly IR Sensor Infra Red Sensor Stapler bed Assembly STL Sensor Stapler Sensor Stapler Assembly PSRack Rack Sensor Top Cover Assembly PSSlider Slid
227. indicated by a small arrow and the phrase print this side first Load paper in Tray 1 with the recommended printing surface facing up facing down in Trays 2 3 4 and 5 Over time paper assumes the characteristics of its storage environment in a humid environment paper absorbs moisture in a dry environment paper loses moisture Paper with higher moisture content will tend to curl more Evaluate the storage conditions of the paper All paper is manufactured differently different textures moisture content drying processes composition etc Change the type of paper being used and re evaluate the paper curl results General Troubleshooting Information 431 Diagrams This section contains the following diagrams Figure 7 14 Printer Sensors and Switches on page 433 Figure 7 15 Printer Motor Clutches and Solenoids on page 434 Figure 7 16 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 1 of 5 on page 435 Figure 7 17 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 2 of 5 on page 436 Figure 7 18 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 3 of 5 on page 437 Figure 7 19 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 4 of 5 on page 438 Figure 7 20 DC Controller Inputs and Outputs 5 of 5 on page 439 Figure 7 21 Mailbox with Stapler Wiring Diagram on page 440 432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN fe conteterrch Controller PCA siete Pick Pickuppoa PCA ila Ba Plies Po SO
228. ing a print job This setting allows you to adjust time out for best performance If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job increase the time out value Press VALUE once to change settings by increments of 1 or hold down VALUE to scroll by increments of 10 Allocate memory for I O buffering ci The printer automatically reserves memory for I O buffering Additional configurations are not required and the i menu item does not appear i The tem appears see below Specify the amount of memory to be used for I O buffering I O bufferi is not performed and the item does not appear When the I O buffer setting is changed any downloaded resources such as fonts or macros will need to be downloaded again unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM Select the speed at which data is transmitted to the printer The printer accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers Ht The printer accepts slower parallel communications used for connections with older computers 70 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Table 3 9 I O Menu continued Item Values Explanation Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on or off The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port IEEE 1284 This setting allows the printer to send status messages to the computer Turning the parallel advanced functions on might slo
229. ink protocol Input devices 2000 sheet Input Tray 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray e Output devices 8 bin Multibin Mailbox Multibin Mailbox with Stapler includes a finisher 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox While the engine DC controller driven devices draw power 24V DC and control signals from the engine the C link devices have their own power supply and controller board The information from the paper handling controller is carried by the C link cables that connect the controller board of all the C link protocol supported devices The C link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a daisy chain Each device controller has an input or output port that provides flexible connections in different configurations However it is recommended to use the configuration shown in figure 7 8 on page 346 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusions when evaluating the Event Log 344 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 4 Printer Devices Troubleshooting Device Action if installed and not detected Duplexer Turn the power off reseat the Duplexer verify that the connector is not broken and turn the printer on If the connector is broken or turning the printer on and off does not work then replace the duplex cable and or duplexer Envelope Feeder Turn the power off reseat the envelope feeder and turn the printer on If this does not work replace the envelope feeder
230. int out as well The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the printer The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the printer The file directory shows information for all of the installed mass storage devices The event log lists printer events or errors This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the control panel display Press VALUE to scroll through the event log entries The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is working properly or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper Choose the input tray output bin duplexer if available and number of copies Control Panel Menus 59 Paper Handling Menu When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel you can print by choosing the type and size of paper from the printer driver or software application Some items in this menu such as duplex and manual feed can be accessed from a software application or from the printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings Table 3 5 Paper Handling Menu ltem Values Explanation Determine how the printer will use Tray 1 F If paper is loaded in Tray 1 the printer will pull paper from that tray first A paper size must be assigned to Tray 1 option the next item in this This allows using the menu wh
231. inting excess toner is removed from the drum surface and stored in the waste toner receptacle inside the toner cartridge 7 A 7 Laser beam si Cartridge Primary charging roller Developing cylinder N Photosensitive drum Transfer charging roller Static charge eliminator Figure 5 8 Drum Cleaning 110 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Drum Conditioning After the drum is physically cleaned it is conditioned by applying a uniform negative charge across the surface of the drum with the primary charging roller located in the toner cartridge The primary charging roller is coated with conductive rubber charged with an AC current that erases any residual charges and produces a uniform drum surface potential The AC current is centered around a negative DC bias which changes according to the Print Density setting Primary charging _ roller Photosensitive Drum DC bias Figure 5 9 Primary Charging Roller EN Image Formation System 111 Figure 5 10 Image Writing During the writing process a modulated laser diode projects a beam onto a rotating six sided scanning mirror As the scanning mirror rotates the beam is directed through a set of focusing lenses to another mirror that reflects it through a slot on the top of the toner cartridge and onto the photosensitive drum The beam sweeps across the drum and discharges the negative potential wherever it strikes the surface This creates a laten
232. is chapter documents the removal and replacement of major assemblies Replacement is generally the reverse of removal Occasionally directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included Unplug the power cord from the power outlet before attempting to service the printer If this warning is not followed severe injury may result Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the Laser Scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes This printer has some sharp sheet metal edges that can cause injury The printer contains parts that are electrostatic discharge ESD sensitive Always service printers at an ESD protected workstation Watch for the ESD reminder shown at left while performing removal procedures Removal and Replacement Strategy 145 Required Tools Figure 6 1 Note CAUTION 2 magnetized Phillips screwdriver 6 inch shaft Small flat blade screwdriver Small pair needle nose pliers e T 15 Torx driver 6 inch shaft All components in the printer the 2000 sheet Input Tray and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray use Phillips head screws that require a 2 size Phillips screwdriver Figure 6 1 shows the difference between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver Note that the Phillips tip has more beveled surfaces All screws used in the field replaceable Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler and 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox components requir
233. isk is protected and no new files can be written to it 354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error The duplexer has an error 1 Remove the paper jam 2 Reseat the Duplex Assembly and check the connection 3 If necessary replace the Duplexer See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions Status The EIO disk device in slot is No action required initializing Status The EIO disk device in slot is The disk accessory card spinning up its platter takes a long time to initialize The first parameter is the accessory slot number for this accessory card The EIO disk is not working Replace the EIO disk correctly Error The envelope feeder does not Put the requested paper in have the requested paper the envelope feeder EN Printer Messages 355 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Error Warning Error Status Warning Description There is no envelope in the feeder the wrong size is loaded in the feeder or the type and size is set incorrectly in the control panel The envelope feeder is empty Printing of the current job is not interrupted Displays when the user tries to view an empty Event Log by selecting the control panel When an external paper hand
234. ith any part of the printer A wide selection of suitable labels may be ordered through Hewlett Packard Available sizes are listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide 12 Chapter 1 Product Information EN CAUTION EN Transparencies Tray 1 is required for printing transparencies Print transparencies to the Left Output Bin only Transparencies used in HP LaserJet printers must be able to withstand the 392 F 200 C temperature encountered in the printer s fusing process for 0 1 second Suitable transparency film is available through Hewlett Packard See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide for details Storing Print Media Follow these guidelines when stacking and storing print media e Store paper in its wrapper until ready to use e Re wrap partially used packages of media before storing e Stack each carton upright and squarely on top of the other Store envelopes in a protective box to avoid damaging the edges of the envelopes e Keep stored media away from temperature and humidity extremes e DO NOT store cartons or reams directly on the floor where they will absorb a higher moisture content Instead place cartons ona pallet or on shelves e DO NOT store individual reams in a manner that causes them to curl or warp along the edges e DO NOT stack more than six cartons on top of each other e DO NOT place anything on top of media regardless of whether the pap
235. ity carefully tilt the bottom of the Main Gear Assembly away from the chassis and down to free the gear mechanisms To Reinstall Figure 6 29 Main Gear Assembly 2 of 3 Note A slight gentle rocking motion will help install the Main Gear Assembly as it is rotated into place 1 Observe the gear assembly position from inside the toner cartridge cavity figure 6 29 callout 2 192 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 30 Main Gear Assembly 3 of 3 2 Tilt the top of the assembly inward and insert the upper back part of the assembly in place figure 6 30 callout 3 Continue rotating the assembly upwards into place Make sure that the locating pins are properly aligned and that the gear assembly fits tightly against the chassis before replacing the screws figure 6 28 callout 4 EN Main Gear Assembly 193 Main Motor Assembly Figure 6 31 CAUTION Main Motor 1 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 2 Remove the HVPS see figure 6 41 on page 205 3 Unplug the connector figure 6 31 callout 1 Be careful when removing the Main Motor The steel drive shaft can damage the plastic gears 4 Remove 4 screws figure 6 31 callout 2 To Reinstall Align the Main Motor to the chassis with the locator tab figure 6 31 callout 3 and the machined ring around the output shaft 194 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Paper Input Unit PIU Figure 6 32 CAUTION EN Paper
236. ize and type of paper loaded matches the size and type specified in the software configuration 1 Make sure the size source and type of paper selected from the software configuration is correct 2 Pull the tray out and make sure the size and type of paper loaded matches the size and type specified in the software configuration 1 Make sure the size source and type of paper selected from the software configuration is correct 2 Pull the tray out and make sure the size and type of paper loaded matches the size and type specified in the software configuration Re insert the duplexer EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message Error The toner cartridge is missing Status Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer s file alternates with system At bootup time these entities are loaded into RAM These entities can take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number of entities being loaded The specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified size paper Error Tray 1 does not contain an envelope Error Tray 1 does not contain the specified type of envelope Error One of the following occurred A manual feed was requested e There is no paper in Tray 1 The wrong size paper is loaded e The control panel is not set for
237. l port connection and be sure to This error can occur if the driver use a high quality cable you are using is not IEEE 1284 Some non HP parallel compliant For best results use cables might be missing pin an HP driver that came with the connections or might printer otherwise not conform to the IEEE 1284 specification This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE 1284 compliant For best results use an HP driver that came with the printer 2 Press GO to clear the error message Data will be alternates with lost Error Too much data was sent tothe 1 Make sure that the correct serial port serial pacing option is selected from the I O Menu in the printer s control panel 2 Print a Menu Map and verify that the serial pacing item from the I O Menu in the printer s control panel matches the setting on the computer 3 Press GO to clear the error message Data will be lost alternates with 386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error The printer encountered anerror 1 Verify the cable while transferring data from the connections Make sure that alternates wit computer The error might have the printer s serial TO occurred for several reasons configuration is set the e The computer was powered on same as the computer from or off while the printer was
238. lbox Depress the release bar on the front of the mailbox B Pull the mailbox away from the printer until the tray is fully extended C Place your thumb on the blue locking mechanism and pull it away from the printer to release the alignment guide Remove the wingnuts from the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand Slide the mailbox away from the printer Raise the alignment bar and tape it in place before moving the mailbox EN EN To Reinstall 1 5 Install the alignment guide under the printer securing the right side first A Push the left side of the alignment guide under the printer B Push the blue locking mechanism on the left side of the alignment guide until it clicks two times and locks in place Place the mailbox onto the stand by aligning the threaded studs on the connector plate with the two holes on the top of the stand With the tray on the stand fully extended lower the alignment bar onto the alignment guide Slide the mailbox toward the printer Note Use your thumbs to do this and keep the tray on the stand fully extended User Installable Accessories 155 156 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement 6 Secure the mailbox to the stand by tightening the wingnuts onto the studs beneath the tray extension on the stand 7 Push the mailbox toward the printer until it snaps in place 8 Connect the cables and plug the power cord into the mailbox and a
239. le 8 1 on page 446 table 8 1 on page 446 C3766 60501 Top Cover Assembly table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60503 Stapling Bed Assembly table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60505 Back Plate table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60506 Hinges Set of table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60507 Wire Frame table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60508 Brushes table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60509 Stapler Packaging table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60510 Kit Plastic staple cover scan bar shown bin full sensor actuator and flag not shown table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60511 Kit T10 Torx screws 10 table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60512 C link Cable Assembly 97 cm Multibin Mailbox to Stapler table 8 1 on page 446 C3766 60512 C link Cable 97 cm table 8 7 on page 460 C3766 60516 Mailbox with Stapler Packaging table 8 7 on page 460 C4077 60102 C4186 67901 3 Way Power Adapter Formatter Assembly table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 1 on page 446 C4781 60500 Power Box Includes bracket clip table 8 8 on page 462 C4781 60501 Jumper Cable Short table 8 8 on page 462 C4781 60502 Jumper Cable Long table 8 8 on page 462 C4782 60501 C4783 70000 Duplexer C4782A C link Cable 80 cm table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 9 on page 465 C4784 60500 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Stand C4784A table 8 1 on page 446 C4784 60500 7 bin Tabletop
240. ling device is connected to the printer it must have 10 seconds to initialize after boot or after coming out of PowerSave mode The finishing device is running out of its finishing material 356 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting from Recommended Action 1 Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder 2 Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer s control panel 3 Press Go if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder 4 Press VALUE to scroll through the available types and sizes 5 Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size Refill the envelope feeder No action required No action required Refill the finishing device EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message Error Warning Status alternates with Warning Warning Warning EN Description The external paper handling finisher device is out of binding agent The flash DIMM had a critical failure and can no longer be used The new flash DIMM installed in slot is initializing The requested operation could not be performed You might have attempted an illegal operation such as trying to download a file to a non existent directory The flash DIMM is full The flash DIMM is protected and no new files can be written to
241. lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and EIO slot Memory lists the printer memory PCL Driver Work Space DWS and I O buffering and resource saving information Security lists the status of the printer s control panel lock control panel password and disk drive Paper Tray and Options lists the size settings for all trays and lists any optional paper handling accessories installed 82 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN HP LaserJet 8000 series printers L HEWLETT PACKARD INFORMATION MENU PAPER HANDLING PRINT QUALITY PRINTING MENU Menu Continued MENU MENU 9 PRINT MENU MAP PRINT CONFIGURATION PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST PRINT EVENT LOG SHOW EVENT LOG PRINT PAPER PATH TEST TRAY i MODE RESOLUTIONS FIRST FASTRES 1200 TRAY 2 TYPE RET MEDIUM PLAIN ECONOMODE OF F TRAY 3 TYPE TONER DENSITY 3 PLAIN CREATE PAPER DEST CLEANING PAGE STANDARD QUTBIN MANUAL FEEO OFF OVERRIDE A4 LETTER NO CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU NO CONFIGURATION VO MENU EIO 3 RESETS MENU MENU JETDIRECT MENU POWERSAVE 30 MINUTES PERSONALITY AUTO RESOURCE SAVE OFF CLEARABLE WARNTNG5 J0B AUTO CONTINUE ON TONER LOW CONTINUE RAM DISK OFF JAM RECOVERY AUTO SMALL PAPER SPEED NORMAL COPIES 1 PAPER LETTER CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO FORM 60 LINES ORTENTATION PORTRAIT PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL PCL FONT NUMBER 0 PCL FONT PETCH 10 00 PCL SYMBOL SET PC 8 COURT
242. lled in the printer The printer driver or software application can override many of these values See figure 7 6 on page 341 fora sample Menu Map 340 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN PRINT MENU MAP PRINT CONFIGURATION PRINT PCL FONT LIST PRINT PS FONT LIST PRINT EVENT LOG jag S EVENT LOG PRI PAPER PATH TEST HP LaserJet 4000 series printers O HEWLETT PACKARD INFORMATION MENU PAPER HANDLING J MENU TRAY i MODE FIRST TRAY 2 TYPE PLAIN TRAY 3 TYPE PLAIN PAPER DEST STANDARD QUTBIN MANUAL FEEO OFF OVERRIDE AA LETTER NO CONFIGURE FUSER MODE MENU NO POWERSAVE 30 MINUTES PERSONAL ITY C OURCE SAVE CLEARABLE WARNINGS J08 AUTO CONTINUE ON TONER LOW CONTINUE RAM DISK OFF JAM RECOVERY AUTO SHALL PAPER SPEEDSNORMAL RESOLUTIONS FASTRES 1200 RET MEDIUM ECONCMODE 0F F TONER DENSITY 3 CREATE CLEANING PAGE PRINTING MENU 3 Menu Continued COPIES 1 PAPERS LETTER CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER NO FORN 60 LINES ORTENTATION PORTRAIT PCL FONT SOURCE INTERNAL at FONT NUMBER PCL FONT PETCH 10 00 PCL SYMBOL SET PC 8 COUREER REGULAR WIDE A4 NO APPEND CR TO LFS NO PRINT PS ERRORS OFF E O TIMEQUT 15 1 0 BUFFER AUTO PARALEFL HIGH SPEED YES PARALLEL ADY FUNCT IONS SERIAL PACING OTR DSR SERIAL BAUD RATE 9500 SERIAL DIR POLARITY HIGH CFG NETWORK NO CONFIGURATION VO MENU EIO 3 RESETS MENU MENU JETDIRECT MENU
243. ly To verify whether the drum is rotating 1 Open the top cover 2 Remove the toner cartridge 3 Mark the cartridge s drive gear with a felt tipped marker Note the position of the mark 4 Install the toner cartridge and close the top cover The start up sequence should rotate the drum enough to move the mark 5 Open the printer and inspect the gear that was marked in step 3 Verify that the mark moved If the mark did not move inspect the Main Drive assembly to make sure that it is meshing with the toner cartridge gears If the drive gears appear functional and the drum does not move replace the toner cartridge Note This test is especially important if refilled toner cartridges have been used High Voltage Power Supply Check The High Voltage Power Supply PCA provides the necessary voltages for the electrophotographic processes see figure 7 11 on page 411 A method for verifying the high voltage system is given below Toner cartridge connection points Visually inspect the four connection points on the inside right end of the toner cartridge If they are dirty or corroded clean the connections Clean using only alcohol If damaged replace the toner cartridge High voltage contacts The high voltage contact springs mount on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude through the toner cartridge cavity to contact the toner cartridge Verify that the contacts are not dirty or corroded and that the spring action is fu
244. ly and push gently to release the latches in the front of the stapler bed see figure 6 87 on page 256 callout 2 8 Remove 3 Torx screws that join the stapler bed with the rest of the unit See figure 6 87 on page 256 callout 3 9 To remove the Stapler Bed Assembly lift the edge of the assembly where the stapler unit resides then gently lift the entire Stapler Assembly To Reinstall Replace the Stapler Bed Replace the Stapler Controller Replace the actuator for the paper bin empty sensor Make sure that the actuator is in its proper place before replacing the Stapler Bed Assembly see figure 6 88 on page 258 callout 3 Stapler Assembly 257 Figure 6 88 Hinges 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly see figure 6 80 on page 249 Remove the Top Cover Assembly see figure 6 86 on page 255 Remove the Stapler Bed Assembly see figure 6 87 on page 256 4 Release the brushes bar from the retaining notches and lift upwards 5 Remove 2 screws joining each hinge to the housing see figure 6 88 callout 1 6 Disconnect the 2 cables in the hinge containing cables from the Stapler Controller PCA see figure 6 84 on page 253 callout 2 258 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Back Top Left Bottom Figure 6 89 Orientation of the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Note Before you begin any removal or replacement procedure turn off all equipment and unplug the mailbox power supply cable EN
245. m the LVPS to the DC Controller PCA figure 6 41 callout 1 and move it out of the way 3 Unplug the connector from the bottom of the HVPS figure 6 41 callout 2 4 Remove 1 self tapping screw figure 6 41 callout 3 and 3 screws figure 6 41 callout 4 To Reinstall Make sure that the plastic alignment pin figure 6 41 callout 5 the connector pins and the high voltage contacts are properly aligned before replacing the screws Power Supply High Voltage HVPS 205 Power Supply Low Voltage LVPS Figure 6 42 Low Voltage Power Supply Remove the Formatter Assembly see figure 6 25 on page 186 Remove the back cover see figure 6 5 on page 162 Remove Fan 3 and its Housing Assembly see figure 6 21 Unplug 3 LVPS connectors figure 6 42 callout 1 Unplug the LVPS fan FM1 cable from the DC Controller figure 6 42 callout 2 6 Remove 7 screws figure 6 42 callout 3 a A WON 206 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Registration Assembly Figure 6 43 Registration Assembly 1 of 3 1 Open the top cover door and remove the toner cartridge 2 Remove the Transfer Roller Assembly see figure 6 52 on page 219 3 Remove the Main Gear Train Shield Release the retainer clip figure 6 43 callout 1 and lift the forward end up EN Registration Assembly 207 Figure 6 44 Registration Assembly 2 of 3 4 Unplug the clutch cable from the clutch on the right end of the Registration Assembly
246. motor See the Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 11 Replace the Mailbox Controller PCA See the Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Event Log Category Message Message Warning Status Status Status Status Status Status EN Description To ensure optimum print quality the printer prompts you to perform routine maintenance every 350 000 pages The printer is in the process of emptying data so it can go offline or go into the menus The printer is in PowerSave mode The configuration page is printing The printer returns to the online RERE state when the printing is completed An engine self test is printin The printer returns to the state but remains offline when printing is completed The Event Log is printing The printer returns to the online state when printing is completed The mass storage directory page is printing The printer returns to the online F state when printing is completed Recommended Action Install the Printer Maintenance Kit You must reset the maintenance page count after performing maintenance by pressing ITEM and VALUE while turning the printer on No action required This message is cleared when an error condition occurs the printer receives printable data or you press
247. must be released Slide the formatter board back into the printer and tighten the two screws Plug in the power cord and connect all cables Turn the printer on User Installable Accessories 147 Disk Drive Figure 6 2 Disk Drive To remove the disk drive 1 Turn the printer off and unplug it 2 Loosen the 2 captive screws and remove the disk drive from slot 2 figure 6 2 callout 1 To reinstall the disk drive 1 Turn the printer off 2 Install the disk drive in slot 2 figure 6 2 callout 1 and tighten the 2 captive screws 3 Print a configuration page to verify the settings 148 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN Duplexer 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged open the Diverter door on the left side of the printer Push down the green release lever located at the lower right of the Duplexer and slide it straight out of the printer User Installable Accessories 149 150 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement Envelope Feeder 1 With the printer turned off and unplugged slide the Envelope Feeder up and out of the printer EN EN 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 1 With the printer turned off and the power cable unplugged disconnect all interface cables from the Formatter Assembly and from Tray 4 WARNING The printer weighs approximately 100 pounds Use four people to lift it 2 Lift the printer clear of the Tray 4 ass
248. n AC power outlet EN Hardware Table Note The screws listed in table 6 1 are also listed in Chapter 8 with their respective assemblies Table 6 1 Hardware Table Example Reference Description Part Number Usage CH101 and CH102 Screw w washer M3x8 XA9 0872 000CN General Metal to metal Tray general use E CH103 Screw M4X8 XB6 7400 807CN Main Motor CH104 Screw CT M3X3 XB5 6303 007CN Fan 1 Fan 2 CH105 Screw w washer XA9 0817 000CN Laser Scanner M3X20 CH106 Screw tapping XB4 7401 809CN HVPS DC truss head M3X8 Controller CH107 Screw tapping pan XB4 7401 009CN Diverter Assembly head M4X10 Face up Solenoid Od Assembly CH108 Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 606CN 2000 sheet Input N Hardware Table 157 Table 6 1 Hardware Table J T20 M4X10 Example Reference Description Part Number Usage CH109 Screw TP M4X6 XB6 7400 607CN 2000 sheet Input Tray right cover CH110 Screw TP M3X6 XB6 7300 607CN 2000 sheet Input Tray Transfer 3 Assembly CH111 Screw Torx T20 Included in Multibin Mailbox M4X12 Hardware Kit 5 bin Mailbox with o j C3764 67901 Stapler Elevator DY Head CH112 Screw Torx T20 Included in Multibin Mailbox M4X10 Hardware Kit 5 bin Mailbox with T C3764 67901 Stapler general use CH113 Screw tapping Torx Included in Multibin Mailbox Hardware Kit C3764 67901 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler Controller PCA
249. n If it displays any other message repeat this procedure starting from step 1 338 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Hint EN Interpret the Event Log See figure 7 5 on page 337 for a sample Event Log The errors on the control pana and the Event Log codes may not tba the same For example i3 ii on the control panel may be i in the Event Log The 1B providas more information about the error Likewise ifa F is displayed on the Control Panel the Event Log will record a 31 error with the amp signifying that 2 sensors were blocked Make sure that you refer to the correct number in table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 When an error is detected in an Optional Paper Handling Device a 13 MF z will be displayed on the Control Panel Whenever a i2 xx appears on the Control Panel a good practice is to clear the jammed paper from the printer press Go to take the printer offline and print the Event Log If you cannot print the Event Log you can still display it on the Control Panel The last error is the error at the top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the left most column Write the error next to the last error logged To interpret the Event Log e Each individual entry in the log is called an error while all errors occurring at the same page count are called an event See the Recommended Action
250. n 5 by 7 5 in 127 by 191 mm Other media types transparencies envelopes and labels Note It is best to use Tray 1 when printing envelopes transparencies and labels Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 Legal JIS B4 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 Legal JIS B4 ISO A3 11 x 17 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 Legal JIS B4 ISO A3 11 x 17 4 Chapter 1 Product Information Weight 16 to 53 Ib Bond 60 to 199 g m Two sided 16 to 20 Ib Bond 60 to 75 g m 16 to 28 Ib 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib 60 to 105 g m 16 to 28 Ib 60 to 105 g m EN Table 1 3 Paper Capacities and Sizes continued Tray or Bin Capacity Paper Weight Optional up to 2 000 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 16 to 28 Ib 2000 sheet sheets Legal JIS B4 ISO A3 11x17 60 to 105 g m Input Tray Tray 4 Standard Output up to 500 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 A5 Bin sheets Executive Legal 11 x 17 ISO A3 face down JIS B5 JIS B4 Left Output Bin up to 100 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 A5 face up sheets Executive Legal 11 x 17 ISO A3 JIS B5 JIS B4 5 bin Mailbox up to 250 Paper sizes Letter ISO A4 16 to 28 Ib with Stapler and sheets per Legal JIS B4 ISO A3 11 x 17 60 to 105 g m Multibin Mailbox bin envelopes transparencies and 8 bins labels Note Envelopes transparencies and labels are only supported in the left output bin The staple bin only supports A4 and Letter paper sizes 7 bin Tabl
251. n an optional duplexer is installed Set the value t to print on both sides duplex or FF to print on one side simplex of a sheet of paper Choose to print on letter size paper when an A4 job is sent but no A4 size paper is loaded in the printer or to print on A4 size paper when a letter job is sent but no letter paper is loaded in the printer Control Panel Menus 61 Print Quality Menu Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software application or from the printer driver if the appropriate driver is installed Printer driver and software application settings override control panel settings Table 3 6 Print Quality Menu Item Values Explanation Select the resolution from the following values Produces draft print quality at the printer s maximum speed 24 ppm 300 dpi dots per inch is recommended for some bitmapped fonts and graphics and for compatibility with the HP LaserJet III family of printers Produces high print quality at the printer s imum speed 24 ppm Produces optimum print quality comparable to 1200 dpi at the printers maximum speed 24 ppm Note It is best to change the resolution from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings Use the printer s Resolution Enhancement technology REt setting to produce print with smooth angles curves and edges All print resolutions including FastRes
252. n page 458 table 8 9 on page 465 Plate Stopper RA2 2527 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Power Box Includes bracket clip C4781 60500 table 8 8 on page 462 Power Supply RH3 2205 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Power Supply Cable PSU Power Supply Fuse RG5 3909 000CN VD7 1893 151CN table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 8 on page 462 Rail Rear Cover RA2 3842 000CN RF5 1402 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 2 on page 449 Registration Assembly RG5 1833 040CN table 8 3 on page 451 Registration Cable Reversing Mechanism Motor RG5 1928 000CN RF7 1395 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 9 on page 465 Reversing Tray Face up Right Cover RA2 2487 000CN RB2 3666 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 8 on page 462 Right Cover Assembly Printer Engine RG5 1915 040CN table 8 2 on page 449 Right Cover Assembly 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox RG1 3840 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Right Lower Cover Rear Plastic on Sheet Metal RB1 6498 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Scanner Motor Cable RG5 1925 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 Screw CT M3X3 XB5 7303 007CN table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 6 on page 458 Screw M4X8 XB6 7400 807CN table 8 3 on page 451 Screw tapping M4X8 XA9 0605 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Screw tapping pan head M4X10 XB4 7401 009CN table 8 5 on page 456 Screw tapping truss head M3X
253. nctional If dirty clean using only alcohol If damaged replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA see Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions 410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Primary Charging Roller Toner Registratior Toner Sensor Developing Drum Ground Roller Bias Post Transfer Bias Transfer Roller Fuser Bias Figure 7 11 High Voltage Power Supply Contacts EN Image Quality 411 Troubleshooting Checks Paper Jams Paper jams occur most often when e Paper trays are not correctly loaded Make sure the paper is loaded with the arrow pointing up in Tray 1 and down in Trays 2 3 4 and 5 e The print media does not meet the specifications listed in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide e The media is in poor condition The printer needs cleaning The printer monitors the timing of four sensors to determine that a paper jam has occurred PS2 PS1 PS1403 and PS1402 If a paper jam occurs the printer will display a 13 iM message on the Pont T See table 7 6 on page 373 for detailed descriptions of the 1 3 messages and the recommended actions to resolve the errors Figure 7 12 shows the possible locations for most of the paper jams 412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Figure 7 12 Paper Path Jam Locations Toner cartridge area Tray 1 pickup roller and feed area Right door
254. nd DB 9 Fast Ethernet 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Order Number J3110A J3111A J3112A only J3113A Power Box For connecting a multibin C4789A mailbox to the printer when the printer is on a printer stand This item is included with the 2000 sheet Input Tray and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Maintenance Preventive Maintenance For 110V units C3971B Accessory Kit C3971 69002 For 220V units C3972B C3972 69002 Documentation HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide PCL 5 PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package Documentation HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers User Guide 24 Chapter 1 Product Information A guide to using paper and other print media with HP LaserJet printers A guide to installing and using the JetDirect Print Server software with HP LaserJet printers Contains information for multiple operating systems A guide to using printer commands with HP LaserJet printers This is an online user guide provided on compact disc 5010 8956 J2552 90051 5021 0377 C4085 60101 EN Table 1 7 Accessories and Options continued Item HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Getting Started Guide HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Ready Reference Guide User Documentation Bundle HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Pri
255. nd or feed motor malfunction occurred in the 2000 sheet Input Tray A malfunction occurred in the solenoid for the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox A malfunction occurred in the solenoid for the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action 1 Make sure that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand 2 Make sure that the paper size plates are installed correctly and are not bent 3 Make sure that the Pickup roller is installed properly 4 Check the Pickup Assembly and replace if necessary See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions 5 Replace Tray 4 See 2000 sheet or 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray on page 151 for instructions 1 Perform a motor test 2 Replace the solenoid if it is damaged 3 If the problem persists replace the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA See 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA on page 269 for instructions 1 Perform a motor test 2 Replace the solenoid if it is damaged 3 If the problem persists replace the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA See 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Controller PCA on page 269 for instructions EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message 66 22 08 66 22 09 66 22 xx 66 22 xx EN Description A malfunction occurred in the Flipp
256. ng by inserting the top of the housing into position and snapping the housing down into place Make sure that the tape is in direct contact with the Transport Belt by routing it underneath the small plastic guide 2 Insert the top end of the tape into its retainer slot and gently push it upward to engage the retainer tab Before replacing the tape holder make sure that the tape is in direct contact with the Transport Belt EN Mailbox With Stapler 239 Motor Delivery Head Position 1 Remove the left cover see figure 6 54 on page 223 Unplug the cable connector figure 6 71 callout 1 Remove 2 screws figure 6 71 callout 2 slide the motor downward to release it from the frame and lift it straight out of the frame To Reinstall Make sure that the motor is positioned in the frame with the cable grommets facing down Make sure that the motor cable connector is plugged into the correct mating connector 240 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Motor Transport Belt and Encoder Assembly Figure 6 72 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Motor Screws 1 Remove the left cover see figure 6 54 on page 223 2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 Remove the Controller PCA see figure 6 76 on page 245 Remove 2 screws from the motor assembly figure 6 72 callout 1 EN Mailbox With Stapler 241 ail ae Figure 6 73 Mailbox with Stapler Transport Belt Drive Gear 5
257. nt Door Storage Area Figure 6 151 Front Door Storage Area 1 Remove the storage tray page 320 2 Release the tabs on both ends 3 Release the storage tray s door from the center tab EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 321 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Outriggers Leveling Feet Figure 6 152 Outriggers Leveling Feet 1 Remove the engine 2 Place the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the outriggers Remove the cap from the outrigger 3 Grasp the end of the shaft and push it toward the printer callout 1 4 Pull out the foot assembly callout 2 Note Do not forget to reinstall the cap 322 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Casters Figure 6 153 Casters 1 Remove the engine 2 Place the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the casters 3 Remove 2 screws that hold the caster to the frame Note Be sure to tighten the screws securely when you re install the new caster EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 323 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip Figure 6 154 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip 1 Remove the engine 2 Place the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray on its left side and locate the Adjustable Foot Tip 3 Push the end of the shaft on the Adjustable Foot Tip until the pin releases callout 1 Slide the Adjustable Foot Tip out of the bracket callout 2 Remove 2 screws that hold the stationary Foot Tip to the frame
258. nters Service Manual Service Documentation Bundle Description or Use An additional copy of the getting started guide An additional copy of the ready reference guide An additional copy of the getting started guide and the ready reference guide An additional copy of the service manual An additional copy of the service manual and HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N and 8000 DN Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories Order Number C4085 90901 English C4085 90921 English C4085 90941 English C4085 91017 C4085 99021 English EN Accessories and Options 25 Hard Disk The printer hard disk accessory is optional for the HP LaserJet 8000 N DN printers The hard disk is a standard feature of the HP Mopier 240 It can be used to permanently store downloaded fonts and forms in the printer Unlike the standard printer memory permanently downloaded items remain in the printer even when the printer is powered off Fonts downloaded to the hard disk are available to all users of the printer Macintosh users can use the HP LaserJet Utility and Windows users can use the HP printer driver to download fonts The printer hard disk can also be write protected through software for additional security See the online help associated with your HP software for more information If you are a PostScript language programmer see Adobe s PostScript Language Reference Manual
259. o providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner The printer has been designed to minimize impacts on the environment The printer design eliminates Ozone Production The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas 05 CFC Usage Class U S Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone depleting chemicals chlorofluorocarbons CFCs for example have been eliminated from the manufacturing of the printer and packaging The printer design reduces Energy Consumption Energy usage drops from 500 505 110V 220V units watts W during printing to as little as 35 40 110V 220V units W while in low power Power Save mode This saves energy without affecting the high performance of the printer This product qualifies for the ENERGY STAR Program U S and Japan ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage the development of energy efficient office products The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the U S Environmental Protection Agency As an ENERGY STAR partner Hewlett Packard Company has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency Toner Consumption EconoMode uses about 50 less toner thereby extending the life of the toner cartridge Paper use The printer s optional duplexing feature which provides for two sided printing reduces paper usage and the resulting demands on natur
260. of copies 11 Press SELECT SOURCE Items Paper Path Test DUPLEX AND OUTPUT Configuration Menu Items Destination Standard Output Bin Left Output Bin Stapler MailBox 1 MailBox 2 MailBox 3 i Tray4 MailBox 4 i 2000 sheet Optional MailBox 5 a Mailboxes 6 8 Optional i Tray 5 2x 500 sheet i H i Optional Mailbox Ge E Optional Figure 7 13 Paper Path Test Source and Output Selection Customer Print Job Ask the customer to send a print job from the problem source s to the problem destination s Try to recreate the paper jam errors by having the customer do typical print jobs and the type of print job that has been causing the paper jams When verifying print jobs make sure that all of the settings are selected as desired Keep in mind that application settings take priority over driver settings which take priority over the printer control panel settings If a single setting is not present in the application but is set in the driver that will override the front panel settings Note JetAdmin does have capabilities to override paper types and sizes and certain conditions See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers User Guide for more information 416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Note EN Clearing Paper Jams Open and close all printer covers to clear the paper jam message After removing a sheet of paper you may need
261. oid Figure 5 19 C link Connection E Paper Paths and Components 129 The information from the paper handling controller is carried by the C link cables that connect the controller board for all of the C link protocol supported devices The C link protocol supports up to 5 devices connected to the paper handling controller in a Daisy Chain Each device controller has an input and output port that provides them the flexibility of connection in different configurations However HP recommends using the configuration shown in figure 5 20 to avoid rearrangements in the supported device numbering and confusion when evaluating the event log Short C Link Cable 24 inches 61 cm Formatter External ge Paper o Control a PCA a 2000 Multi Bin Sheet Mailbox Input Tray ee 06 ee e ia Long C Link Cable Medium C Link Cable4 70 inches 178 cm 39 inches 97 cm Figure 5 20 C Link Configuration Recommended 130 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN Stapler Components The 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler is a multi function stand output paper handling device designed to work with different HP LaserJet printers It has both mailbox and stapling capability The stapler unit output bin staples up to 20 sheets 20 Ib paper and has a total capacity of 350 stapled sheets In addition this component has 5 standard output bins with a capacity of 250 sheets and 1 left output b
262. on Menu 67 Table 3 9 I O Menu 70 Table 3 10 EIO Menu 72 Table 3 11 Resets Menu 74 Table 3 12 Service Mode Menu Items 76 Table 3 13 Key to Figure 3 2 82 Table 3 14 Key to Figure 33 84 Table 4 1 Cleaning the Printer 90 Table 5 1 Printer Sensors Solenoids Clutches Motors and Fans 119 Table 5 2 2x 500 sheet Input Tray Switches 122 Table 5 3 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors Switches and Motors 125 Table 5 4 Stapler Major Assemblies and Subassemblies 131 Table 5 5 Stapler Motors Sensors and Switches 132 Table 5 6 Paper Size Switches 136 Table 5 7 Printer Timing 138 Table 6 1 Hardware Table 2 2 2 157 Table 7 1 Major Steps for Troubleshooting 328 Table 7 2 Power On 332 Table 7 3 Fans 334 Table 7 4 Printer Devices Troubleshooting 345 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages 352 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages 373 Table 7 7 Image Quality 394 EN xxi EN Product Information Chapter Contents Printer Features 2 Paper Capacities and Sizes 4 Identification 6 S
263. on required No action required Refill the stapler device Refill the stapler device Printer Messages 367 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Warning The TOMER LOk setting in the Remove and shake the toner Configuration Menu is set to cartridge to distribute the and a low toner toner The toner cartridge situation is encountered should print approximately 200 pages after the first message i Error The setting inthe No action required Once this alternates with Configuration Menu is set to message is overridden either Ci and a low toner situation is by the printer automatically encountered continuing past it or by the user pressing Go it is then treated as a clearable warning Warning The external paper handling Staple the pages manually stapler device received too many pages to staple The pages will be ejected unstapled Warning The media type in the specified Load known media or set tray cannot be determined the correct media type 368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message EN Event Log Category Message Warning Description The paper tray is empty Paper is sensed in the tray by black plastic flags and photosensors If paper is not in a tray the flags will rotate through an access in the upper tray When paper is present the
264. oner from the drum to the paper 6 Laser Scanner door is not opening properly 7 High voltage contact springs are dirty or defective The high voltage contacts are mounted on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity 8 High Voltage Power Supply PCA is defective 9 DC Controller PCA is defective The DC Controller supplies the proper voltage to the High Voltage Power Supply PCA Table 7 11 Dropout Possible Cause 1 Single sheet of paper is defective 2 Paper does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process 3 DC Controller is defective low primary voltage 398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Inspect the Transfer Roller for proper installation and contact If the Transfer Roller is damaged replace it See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 219 for instructions 1 Remove and reseat the toner cartridge 2 Check the Laser Scanner shutter door for proper operation If defective replace the Laser Scanner Assembly See Laser Scanner Assembly on page 189 for instructions Check the contacts for functionality If dirty clean using alcohol if damaged replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA See Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions Replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA See Power Supply High Voltage HVP
265. oner cartridge and consists of a metallic cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core The developing cylinder is charged with an AC current that is centered around a negative DC bias The AC current improves density and contrast by decreasing the attraction between the toner particles and the magnetic core of the cylinder This increases the repelling action of the toner against the areas of the drum not exposed to laser light The negative DC bias applied to the developing cylinder is also changed according to the Print Density setting Both the primary charging roller and developing cylinder DC bias voltages are changed in response to the density setting These changes in DC bias cause either more or less toner to be attracted to the drum thus increasing or decreasing print density The toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin bound to iron particles The toner particles are attracted to the magnetic core of the developing cylinder A rubber blade brushes the toner on the developing cylinder to a uniform thickness Image Formation System 113 The toner particles obtain a negative static charge by rubbing against the developing cylinder which is charged with a negative DC bias The negatively charged toner is attracted to the discharged exposed more positive areas of the drum and repelled from the negatively charged non exposed areas Developing cylinder Ges Magnet DC bias Figure 5 11 Image
266. ontrol photosensors and flags Clutches registration tray pickup and Tray 1 feed Engine Test e Motors Main Drive Scanner and Fans Figure 5 2 shows the Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System See the wiring diagrams at the end of Chapter 7 for detailed listings of the DC Controller inputs and outputs Laser and Scanner Drive Based on information received from the Formatter the DC Controller sends signals to the Laser Scanner Assembly to modulate the laser diode on and off and to drive the Laser Scanner motor See Image Formation System later in this chapter for more information Paper Motion Monitoring and Control The DC Controller PCA controls paper motion by continuously monitoring the various paper sensors and coordinating paper movement with the other print processes Clutches The drive signals for the Registration Assembly Clutch CL1 Paper Input Unit Clutch CL2 and the Tray 1 Feed Clutch are provided by the DC Controller PCA The control signals for the clutches in the 2000 sheet Input Tray Multibin Mailbox 5 bin Mailbox with Stapler 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray and 7 Bin Tabletop Mailbox are provided by the External Paper Handling PCA mounted on the Formatter Assembly EN DC Controller System 105 Engine Test Microswitch The Engine Test Microswitch located on the DC Controller PCA is activated manually through the square access hole at the right rear of the printer see Chapter 6 This swit
267. op cover or paper access door sensors you need to press the interlock switch and simultaneously open and close each cover A self test should be performed and the LED should remain on Be sure to turn the power supply off and set all the DIP switches to the off position normal settings when you finish the diagnostics or the printer will not work properly Replace the back cover Table 7 29 Patterns of Flashing LEDs Long Short Meaning Recommended Action 3 1 Paper exit solenoid Perform the motor test to check the solenoids malfunction Perform the sensor test Replace the sensor bin full PCA solenoids or controller board 2 1 Initial jam Open the top cover and paper access door to remove any remaining paper then perform a sensor test Replace the sensor bin full PCA or controller PCA 2 2 Jam without delivery Open all covers and doors in the device and notice remove any jammed paper Check for paper jammed in the printer Try printing again 424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 29 Patterns of Flashing LEDs continued Long Short Meaning Recommended Action 2 3 Entry sensor delay Open all covers and doors in the device and remove any remaining media Check each bin output 2 s Face up sensor delay Perform a sensor check Check the sensor flag the optical sensor or 2 7 Reversing area delay cabling Replace the sensor PCAs Replace the controller PCA 2 9
268. or Arm PS1 RB1 6417 000CN 1 8 04D 13 Sensor Cable RG5 1843 000CN 1 8 04D 14 Compression Spring Front RS5 2463 000CN 1 8 04D 16 Compression Spring Rear RS5 2466 000CN 1 8 04D 18 Photo Interrupter WG8 0291 000CN 1 8 04 E Paper Input Unit PIU C3166 69011 8 04E 10 Torque Limiter RB1 6588 000CN 2 8 04E 103 PIU PCA RG5 1860 000CN 1 8 04E 20 Feed Separation Rollers RF5 1426 000CN 4 8 04E 21 Pickup Roller RF5 1427 000CN 2 8 04E 48 Sensor Arm PS2 RB1 6557 000CN 1 8 04E 49 Sensor Arm Spring RB1 6558 000CN 1 8 04E 51 Sensor Cable RG5 1859 000CN 1 8 04E 52 Photo Interrupter WG8 0291 000CN 1 8 04E 86 Paper Pickup Cable RG5 1861 000CN 1 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 453 Table 8 4 Printer Internal Components 2 of 4 continued RH7 5120 000CN Fig Ref Description Part QTY 8 04E 87 Pickup Motor RH7 1262 000CN 1 8 04E 88 Electromagnetic Clutch Paper Feed 454 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN CH106 i CH107 ILA zD o DY J2007 AL ar op ANG Pr N J205 R218 ae CH101 ben 14018 A 18 7 PS1402 ee CH101 PS1401 91402 SW2 3202 PS1403 30 Figure 8 5 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 EN Illustrations and Parts Lists 455 Table 8 5 Printer Internal Components 3 of 4 Ref Description Part Number QTY 06 Laser Scanner Assembly RG5 1895 000CN 1 06A Laser Scanner Assembly Exchange C3166 69006
269. ormatter 180 interface accessories ordering 23 interfaces standard 3 EN EN interlock switch mailbox 231 internet technical assistance 32 IP addresses 82 item key 52 I O menu 70 I O troubleshooting 346 J jam access door assembly mailbox 232 JetSend see HP JetSend K keys control panel 52 L labels adhesive guidelines 12 paper jams 428 printer identification 6 languages personalities 147 removing and replacing 147 standard printer 2 status 80 verifying installation 342 languages control panel 55 laser statement for Finland 43 laser scanner 189 drive 105 fan 177 motors 106 latching mechanism 7 bin tabletop mailbox 293 latch 7 bin tabletop mailbox cover 294 leading edge halo troubleshooting 400 LED front PCA 2 x 500 sheet input tray 326 PCA 7 bin tabletop mailbox 282 troubleshooting 421 left cover 2 x 500 sheet input tray 297 left lower cover 165 left output bin specifications 5 left output bins 7 bin tabletop mailbox diverter assembly flipper 286 sensors pca 283 leveling feet outriggers 2 x 500 sheet input tray 322 light print troubleshooting 397 428 lights control panel 53 lines troubleshooting 399 edge of paper 402 white 405 LocalTalk cable ordering 23 locating pins 2 x 500 sheet input tray 325 2000 sheet input tray 95 location printer 46 low voltage power supply distribution system 99 fan 179 removing and replacing 206 lower elevator pulley assemblies mailbox 235 I
270. ors BES1 to 7 Paper Paths and Components 127 Power on Sequence During the power on sequence the mailbox runs an initialization routine The motor will perform a complete cycle and solenoid S2 S3 and S4 will be activated in that order At the end of this routine the front cover LED will display a fixed green light but if there is a problem the LED will flash red Communication Link Communication Link C link devices include C link Input Devices e 2000 sheet Input Tray e 2x 500 sheet Input Tray e C link Output Devices e 8 bin Multibin Mailbox e 5 bin Multibin Mailbox with Stapler Includes a Finisher e 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Communication and control of the C link devices is through the paper handling controller mounted on the printer s formatter PCA The C link devices C link protocol have their own power supply and controller board that receives signals and commands from the paper handling controller This communication is illustrated in figure 5 19 128 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN J1 1 gt to PBA Control paye J1 6 p Entry Sensor PBA J9 1 Face Up to Sensor J9 11 PBA User LED Joint Test Full Sensor Swi J ka sil Sensors Face o Cover J11 2 a Swe Full Sensors Solenoid Switch Back a Check Solenoid J3 2 Sensor Path Sensor 1 Face Up oa Path Down Sensor 2 Solenoid J2 3 Odd Bins Power 1 3 5 Suppl Solenoid J4 1 PPY to Even Bins J4 4 2 4 6 Solen
271. output bin holds 100 sheets of paper Designed for tabletop use Multibin Mailbox Each of the 8 output bins holds C4785A 250 sheets of paper 5 bin Mailbox with Each of the 5 output bins holds C4787A Stapler 20 Chapter 1 Product Information 250 sheets of paper Provides job separation by stapling jobs EN Table 1 7 Accessories and Options continued Item Description or Use Order Number Printer Stands Printer Stand Used in place of the C2975A 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 or the 2 x 500 sheet Tray Trays 4 and 5 when a mailbox accessory is attached Stand for 7 bin Allows 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox C4784A Tabletop Mailbox to be used when printer is mounted on 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 2000 sheet Input Tray or printer stand EN Accessories and Options 21 Table 1 7 Accessories and Options continued Item Printing HP Multipurpose Supplies Paper Other HP media is available where office products are sold HP LaserJet Paper Other HP media is available where office products are sold Toner Cartridge 15 000 pages Toner Cartridge 15 000 pages 22 Chapter 1 Product Information Description or Use Order Number HP brand paper for a variety HPM1120 of uses 1 box of 10 reams 500 sheets each To order a sample in the U S call 1 800 471 4701 Premium HP brand paper for HPJ1124 use with HP LaserJet printers 1 box of 10 reams 500 sheets each To order a sample in the U S c
272. over If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA these numbers should be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print engine The procedures for setting these values are listed in table 3 12 Before removing the old Formatter PCA print a Configuration Page to verify the current values if possible Note If it is not possible to print a Configuration Page try to verify the values before replacing the Formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 3 below After verifying the page count maintenance count and printer serial number from the old Formatter PCA replace it with the new PCA 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter 2 When Service Menu is displayed press MENU to access the and 3 Press ITEM to display Enter the appropriate values for each item Press Go to exit Service Mode 78 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN EN Setting the Cold Reset Default Paper Size When replacing a Formatter PCA with a default paper size setting of A4 set to A4 1 Enter the Service Mode as previously described in this chapter 2 Press MENU to access the Service Menu 3 Press ITEM to step through the menu until P is displayed 4 Press to toggle between Letter and A4 paper 5 Press SELECT to activate your choice 6 Press Go to exit Service Mode 7 Perform a Cold Reset to activate new choice Service Mode 79 Testing the Printer Paper P
273. p cover PPS1 Paper path sensor 1 Inside the unit down the entry rollers PPS2 Paper path sensor 2 Paper path back cover ILSW Interlock switch Bottom back left side EN Paper Paths and Components 125 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Operation The 7 Bin Tabletop Mailbox MBM 7 is a low cost output device designed to support different printer platforms at variable engine input speeds and to increase office productivity The mailbox has a total capacity of 940 sheets distributed in 7x120 standard output bins and a 1x100 left output bin and works with four intelligent and configurable operating modes An additional optional product the Stand for the 7 bin Mailbox allows the customer to attach the mailbox in a floor stand configuration when an input device is attached to the printer Operating Modes Configurable Mailbox Default Configuration In this mode each bin can be addressed individually as the output destination and can have a name assigned to it by the network or mopier administrator All the jobs are placed in the standard output bins If the assigned bins are full the printer halts or sends the next pages to the overflow bin as defined by the MIS manager Job Separation This mode automatically separates incoming jobs and assigns a bin to each job which may include multiple copies It uses all mailbox bins for this purpose starting at the first standard output bin at top but is seen in the mopier software as on
274. page 191 for instructions From 2000 sheet Input Tray 1 Check the white plastic bushing on Tray 4 The bushing is located on the Tray 4 main drive assembly The bushing accepts the Tray 4 pilot pin when Tray 4 is closed Replace if broken 2 Replace 2000 sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Assembly 3 Replace the 2000 sheet Input Tray Main Drive Assembly See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessories for instructions From Multibin Mailbox 1 Verify pawls are riding above the output rollers see figure 7 14 on page 433 426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN EN Will not feed from Tray x when printing from application paper path test works fine Verify the correct paper size 1 Tray 1 From Control Panel Paper Handling Menu 2 Tray 2 3 4 or 5 Remove and reseat the paper fences in the correct position in the failing tray Excessive Image Skew 1 Remove and reseat the paper fences front fence in paper trays 2 Image Skew Specifications e 1mm over 260 mm length e First line to leading edge 5 0 2 5 mm e Text Stretching 1 simplex 1 5 duplex Envelope e Skew 6 0 over 260 mm length e First line on envelopes to leading edge left margin 15 4 5 mm Loses Page Counts Serial Number Make sure that the serial number listed on the Configuration Page is AAXXYY9999 Print the Event Log and look for a 68 error with a page count of z
275. paper physically damaged or torn Is the customer loading the paper trays correctly Is the customer overfilling the paper trays 414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Action Verify with the customer Print or display the Event Log to determine paper jam history See Display on page 336 and Printer Messages on page 351 and evaluate the Event Log See Troubleshooting Checks on page 412 and use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem Use Paper Path Test on page 415 to isolate the problem Try known good media See the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Attempt to duplicate See Paper Path Test on page 415 Inspect the paper path and all paper path mechanical assemblies prior to the leading paper jam Observe the customer loading the paper Do not fan the paper See proper paper handling procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Make sure that the paper is NOT over the maximum fill marks in the paper trays Observe the customer loading paper in the trays EN Table 7 25 General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions continued Problem Are the paper tray g correctly Action uides set Make sure that the Tray 2 and 3 left side paper fence is set correctly at both the front and rear of the tray Make sure that the front fence is locked into the correct position For Tray 4 make sure that all adjustments are set correctly front back and si
276. paper pickup assembly Open the VTU door and remove the media Close the door Close the tray s Check the sensors Load the correct size of paper Check the sensors Load paper Check the sensors If the LEDs will not come on replace the paper deck PCA or the Long Short Meaning 1 sec 0 3 sec 3 1 Lifter malfunction Tray 4 or 5 2 1 Registration sensor delay jam 2 2 Registration sensor stationary jam initial jam 2 3 Jam sensor delay jam 2 4 Jam sensor stationary jam initial jam 1 1 The VTU door is open 1 2 Trays 4 5 are open Wrong paper size loaded 1 3 No paper in trays 4 5 Note universal power supply assembly EN Diagnostics on Accessories 421 7 Bin Tabletop Mailbox Standalone Diagnostics The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the accessory s motors functionality and sensors You will need a power cord a 2 Phillips screwdriver and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches Note To change from one test to another or change the DIP switch settings push the blue power supply switch in off position then set to the new test positions 1 Identify the back cover The paper trays are on the right Remove the back cover by removing the 2 screws 2 Identify the interlock switch This black switch is set when the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox comes into contact with the printer Look on opposite side from the paper trays This interlock can be defeated by holding it in with a fing
277. paper size cold reset 54 75 79 PCA removing and replacing 202 paper size switches 2 x 500 sheet input tray 122 trays 2 amp 3 136 paper source default 54 paper tray capacities 4 settings status 80 storage 2 x 500 sheet input tray 320 parallel cables 142 ordering 23 partial blank page troubleshooting 406 EN EN parts 441 diagrams 441 locations 14 ordering 28 442 PCL fonts 2 memory requirements 27 PCL 5e and PCL6 2 PCL 5 PJL Technical Reference Documentation Package ordering 24 personalities see languages phone numbers ordering parts 28 technical assistance 31 PhoneNET cable ordering 23 photosensitive drum 109 pickup 2 x 500 sheet input tray 123 309 pickup motors 106 pickup rollers 2 x 500 sheet input tray 313 cleaning 90 trays 2 amp 3 212 pin configuration parallel 142 pins locating 2 x 500 sheet input tray 325 2000 sheet input tray 95 PIU see paper input unit plus key 52 PM kit see preventative maintenance PostScript Level 2 emulation PS 2 fonts 2 memory requirements 27 power box ordering 24 power distribution system 99 power rating 6 power supply 2 x 500 sheet input tray 123 317 7 bin tabletop mailbox 270 see also high voltage power supply or low voltage power supply PowerSave mode 9 troubleshooting 428 powersave mode 102 ppm see pages per minute preventative maintenance 91 count 78 185 kit ordering 24 print resolution 2 speed 2 print density adjustment 101 print media see paper
278. paper with correct finish smoothness see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide EN OBboCc OBboCc OBoCc OBoCc OBoCc EN Table 7 17 Misshapen Characters Voids continued Possible Cause 2 Printing on wrong side of paper The label on the ream of paper indicates which side to print on The different surface properties of some papers may cause problems if loaded wrong side up 3 Paper surface is too smooth for proper toner adhesion 4 Transparencies are bad Transparencies can have this problem because they are not designed for proper toner adhesion 5 Transfer Roller is bad If the Transfer Roller has finger oils on its surface is dirty or is worn out this problem can result 6 Laser Scanner Assembly is bad Table 7 18 Faulty Registration Possible Cause 1 Paper tray is overloaded If the tray is overloaded the Pickup Rollers may not pick correctly 2 Paper guide on the paper tray is incorrectly adjusted If the guide is pushing too tightly against the paper it may be delayed in being pulled into the printer If the guide is too loose it may cause image skewing Recommended Action Turn EconoMode off Check for the arrow on the paper wrapper Be sure paper is loaded with the arrow pointing up in Tray 1 or down in Trays 2 3 4 and 5 Turn EconoMode off Use paper with correct finish smoothness see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Speci
279. pecifications 555rnnnu 7 Media Selection Guidelines 11 Product Overview 14 Service Approach 28 Technical Assistance 31 Warranty eee eee 33 Regulatory Information 35 Declaration of Conformity 40 Chapter Contents 1 Printer Features Table 1 1 Common features between the HP LaserJet 8000 HP LaserJet 8000 N HP LaserJet 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Feature Print Speed Duplex Speed Text amp Graphics Resolution Standard Printer Languages Duty Cycle Monthly Usage Internal Typefaces Cartridge Slots Power Control Control Panel EconoMode toner saving 2 Chapter 1 Product Information Description 24 ppm letter or A4 13 ppm ledger 11 x 17 or A3 15 ppm legal or B4 9 5 ppm letter or A4 6 5 ppm ledger or A3 7 5 ppm legal or B4 FastRes 1200 provides 1200 dpi quality at full speed plus Resolution Enhancement technology REt Enhanced PCL 6 PCL 5e for compatibility Postscript Level 2 emulation Up to 130 000 images 45 PCL 35 PostScript None PowerSave Mode 6 Keys LCD Display 2 line 16 characters per line Yes EN Table 1 2 Comparison of Printer Features Features HP LaserJet 8000 HP LaserJet 8000 N HP LaserJet HP Mopier 240 C4085A C4086A 8000 DN C4228A C4087A Memory 16 MB 16 MB2 24 MB 24 MB3 Standard IEEE 1284 E
280. per Path Test on page 415 and make sure the feed rollers are advancing the paper 4 If the rollers do not rotate verify the connections at the Main Drive Assembly Pickup Assembly Controller PCA and Power Supply If the rollers still do not rotate or do not drop down replace the Pickup Assembly 5 If the rollers rotate and drop down but do not advance the paper replace the feed rollers using the Maintenance Kit 6 If the problem persists replace the VTU 378 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message 13 120D A page did not arrive at the Duplexer s second sensor 13 12 01 One of the following occurred on 13 1211 the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 13 1212 An unexpected page at the 13 1215 entry sensor 13 1217 The page did not reach the 13 12 21 entry sensor paper path sensor 13 1222 1 paper path sensor 2 or the 13 12 25 left output bin delivery sensor on 13 1227 time 13 12 31 e The page stayed at the entry 13 12 32 sensor paper path sensor 1 13 1235 paper path sensor 2 or left 13 1237 output bin delivery sensor A page was found at the entry sensor paper path sensor 1 paper path sensor 2 or left output delivery sensor during the power on sequence EN Recommended Action 1 Open the front and left doors and remove any paper 2 Remove the paper from the Duplexer 3 Make sure that paper is
281. per movement 7 From the front of the unit support the door assembly while sliding the shaft to the left until it is clear of the frame The retaining springs and tape retainer will fall free EN Mailbox With Stapler 233 gt 3 mi Figure 6 65 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door String Connection 8 Release the upper ends of the Paper Guide Strings figure 6 65 callout 3 from the assembly To Reinstall 1 Attach the upper ends of the Paper Guide Strings to the door assembly before installing it into the frame 2 Make sure that the retaining springs and the tape retainer are properly positioned as you insert the shaft into the frame 3 Make sure that the retaining springs e clip and copper grounding plate are properly replaced on the shaft in the same position in which they were removed 234 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Lower Elevator Pulley Assemblies Figure 6 66 Mailbox with Stapler Elevator Pulley Tension Spring 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 2 From the front of the unit disconnect 2 tension springs figure 6 66 callout 1 EN Mailbox With Stapler 235 Figure 6 67 Mailbox with Stapler Pulley Housing Release 3 From the back of the unit release 2 lower pulley assemblies by pushing down on the assembly and then pushing it forward figure 6 67 callout 2 Note that the protrusion on the side of the pulley housing is positioned
282. print quality cleaning printer 88 troubleshooting 394 print quality menu 62 printer comparisons of features 3 dimensions 7 47 electrical specifications 9 features 2 paper paths and components 117 part locations 441 parts and diagrams 451 specifications 7 testing 80 weight 7 printer stand dimensions and weight 7 bin tabletop mailbox 8 ordering 21 printing menu 64 printing supplies 22 PS1 see registration sensor PS2 see paper input unit sensor PS see PostScript Level 2 emulation R ready light 53 ready reference guide ordering 25 recycling toner cartridges 30 registration assembly removing and replacing 207 roller cleaning 89 sensor 216 registration faulty troubleshooting 403 regulatory information 6 remanufactured assemblies 29 removal and replacement strategy 145 tools required 146 repair process 28 repetitive defects troubleshooting 401 repetitive defects troubleshooting ruler 408 required tools 146 reset cold 85 printer 55 resets menu 74 resolution 2 resolution enhancement REt 2 103 reversing mechanism motor 7 bin tabletop mailbox 284 solenoid 7 bin tabletop mailbox 290 right cover 2 x 500 sheet input tray 301 right door assembly 7 bin tabletop mailbox 271 right lower door assembly 174 Index 489 490 Index rollers 2 x 500 sheet input tray 313 cleaning 90 transfer 219 tray 1 210 trays 2 amp 3 212 S saving power 9 102 toner 104 scanner see laser scanner screwdrivers required 1
283. r Choose envelopes that are well constructed They should lie flat and be sharply creased They should not be wrinkled nicked or otherwise damaged Envelope adhesive must be compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing process Media Selection Guidelines 11 CAUTION Adhesive Labels Use the following guidelines when selecting labels Tray 1 is required for printing adhesive labels Print labels to the Left Output Bin only This printer does not support use of labels with any exposed spaces Do not attempt to print on label sheets after any of the labels have been removed from the sheet Damage to the printer may result Labels must be arranged on the carrier sheet so that there are no exposed spaces on the sheet Using label stock with spaces between rows or columns of labels can often result in labels peeling off during printing causing serious jamming and possible damage to the printer The top sheet printing surface must be of copier quality and provide good toner adhesion The carrier sheet backing sheet must be compatible with the temperature and pressure of the fusing process and must be coated for easy release of the top sheet The adhesive must be stable at the 392 F 200 C temperature encountered for 0 1 second in the fusing process and must not produce emissions that exceed exposure levels or threshold limits established by OSHA and other safety agencies Adhesives must not come into direct contact w
284. r Door Assembly see figure 6 15 on page 174 Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above and the sensor is removed and replaced from below Figure 6 49 Paper Input Unit Sensor PS2 2 Release the retaining tabs figure 6 49 callout 1 on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end 3 Unplug the connector from the sensor 214 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN To Reinstall 1 Plug in the connector before reinstalling 2 Holding the sensor flag out of the way first hook the tabs on the left end in first Snap the right end of the sensor upward into place Sensor Paper Input Unit PS2 215 Sensor Registration PS1 1 Remove the following components in the order listed Toner Cartridge Trays 2 and 3 Transfer Roller see figure 6 52 on page 219 Registration Assembly see figure 6 44 on page 208 Front Cover see figure 6 6 on page 163 Tray 1 Assembly see figure 6 53 on page 221 Right Lower Door Assembly see figure 6 15 on page 174 Paper Input Unit see figure 6 32 on page 195 Note The sensor retaining tabs are released from above and the sensor is removed and replaced from inside the Paper Input Unit cavity Figure 6 50 Registration Sensor PS1 2 Release the retaining tabs figure 6 50 callout 1 on the right end of the sensor and rotate the sensor down to free the tabs on the left end of the sensor 3 Unplug the connector from the
285. r using a dry lint free cloth DO NOT touch the Transfer Roller with your fingers If the problem persists replace the Transfer Roller Assembly See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 219 for instructions Adjust the print density to a higher setting Background Scatter at Leading Edge Only Leading Edge Halo 1 Toner buildup in the Fuser Inlet Guide Table 7 15 Repetitive Defects Possible Cause 1 Toner cartridge is damaged If the defect repeats at any of the following intervals and in the direction of paper movement it is associated with a component inside the toner cartridge See figure 7 10 on page 408 2 Transfer Roller has toner on it If defects occur on the back of the page at intervals of 61mm 2 3 8 inches the Transfer Roller may be dirty This problem sometimes corrects itself after a few pages Clean Fuser Inlet Guide See Cleaning the Printer and Accessories on page 88 for instructions Recommended Action Inspect the drum for scratches or damage Replace the toner cartridge Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler figure 7 10 on page 408 Clean the Transfer Roller using a dry lint free cloth DO NOT touch the Transfer Roller with your fingers If the problem persists replace the Transfer Roller Assembly See Transfer Roller Assembly on page 219 for instructions Image Quality 401 Recommended Action Examine and clean the rollers in the paper path See
286. rear of the printer Printing an Engine Test To print an engine test use a non metallic object such as a pencil to press the engine test button see figure 7 4 A single test page will print ES Engine Test Printout Engine Test Button Power On 335 Display Event Log Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and intermittent failures You can either print or display the Event bagi from the Control Panel s Information Menu Select FE LOG or 16 The Configuration Page lists the r maximum number of entries in the Event Log See figure 7 5 on page 337 for a sample Event Log The Event Log shows the current page count at the left side of the page with the printer s serial number directly to the right of the page count The left column is the error sequence number with the error listed on the right the highest sequence number is the most recent event logged The next column is the page count at the time of the error and the last column is the Personality PCL or PostScript column or the Jam Cause at the time of the error See table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 for more information about correcting Event Log messages in the printer 336 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN H CA HEWLETT P LaserJet 8000
287. remove 1 screw figure 6 10 callout 3 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Standard Output Bin Full sensor flag figure 6 10 callout 4 when removing the top cover 4 Lift and hold the top cover door up and carefully pull out on the cover to release the retaining tab figure 6 9 callout 5 5 Hold the Standard Output Bin figure 6 9 callout 6 down while carefully and slowly lifting the top cover straight up until it clears the Standard Output Bin Full sensor flag and the Delivery Unit EN Covers 167 To Reinstall CAUTION Be careful not to damage the Standard Output Bin Full sensor flag figure 6 10 callout 4 when replacing the top cover 1 Hold the top cover door up and the Standard Output Bin figure 6 9 callout 6 down while lowering the cover into position 2 See figure 6 10 callout 4 Slide the Standard Output Bin under the Standard Output Bin Full sensor flag and make sure that the cam figure 6 10 callout 4 at the rear of the top cover door is properly positioned while lowering the top cover into place 3 Make sure that the top cover is seated properly and that the retaining tabs are in place before replacing the screws 168 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Delivery Unit for Standard Output Bin Figure 6 11 Delivery Unit 1 of 2 1 Remove the following components e Formatter Assembly see figure 6 25 on page 186 e AC Access Cover see figure 6 4 on page 160 Top Cover see figure 6 9 on pa
288. rface Conditioning placing a uniform electrical charge on drum Writing laser strikes surface of drum to create latent image Development formation of the toner image on drum Transfer charge to transfer the image to paper Fusing heat and pressure to produce a permanent image See Chapter 5 for more information The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which process is malfunctioning Perform the test as follows 1 Print a Configuration Page See Configuration Page on page 342 for instructions 2 Open the top cover after the paper advances half way through the printer about five seconds after the Main Motor begins rotating The leading edge of the paper should have advanced past the toner cartridge Remove the toner cartridge Open the toner cartridge s drum shield to view the drum s surface If a dark and distinct toner image is present on the drum s surface assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process are functioning cleaning conditioning writing and developing see Chapter 5 and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing problem If NO image is present on the photosensitive drum perform the functional checks on the following pages EN Image Quality 409 Drum Rotation Functional Check The photosensitive drum located in the toner cartridge must rotate for the print process to work The photosensitive drum receives its drive from the Main Drive assemb
289. ridge 2 Light is leaking into the printer 3 High voltage contact springs are dirty or defective The high voltage contacts are mounted on the High Voltage Power Supply PCA and protrude into the toner cartridge cavity 396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Make sure that the application software is not sending incorrect page length requests or extra page eject commands Check with the network administrator Remove the paper from the tray and fan the paper edges to separate the pages see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Remove the sealing tape Recommended Action Replace the toner cartridge Make sure that all covers are in place Inspect and clean the high voltage contacts If damaged replace the High Voltage Power Supply PCA See Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions EN AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc EN Table 7 9 Black Pages continued Possible Cause 4 High voltage power supply circuit is defective not supplying the correct negative voltage 5 DC Controller PCA is defective If the DC Controller turns on the laser beam continuously the entire surface of the Photosensitive drum is neutralized causing a completely black page 6 Laser Scanner Assembly is faulty turning laser on continuously 7 Connectors between the Laser Scanner unit and DC Controller are not seated properly or are defective
290. rotate the right side down to snap the hinge pins into position 2 Reconnect the support struts to the chassis EN Door Assembly Diverter 173 Door Assembly Right Lower 2 at i ta Ps Figure 6 15 Right Lower Door Assembly 1 of 3 1 Remove the back cover assembly see figure 6 5 Remove Tray 2 and Tray 3 Open the Right Lower Door and release the lower end of the support strap figure 6 15 callout 1 174 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 16 Right Lower Door Assembly 2 of 3 4 Remove 4 screws figure 6 16 callout 2 EN Door Assembly Right Lower 175 Figure 6 17 Right Lower Door Assembly 3 of 3 5 Release two retainer tabs from the inside of the Tray 3 cavity figure 6 17 callout 3 6 Slide the door assembly away from the printer chassis 176 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing Fan Housing Figure 6 18 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 1 of 2 1 Remove the toner cartridge Remove the top cover see figure 6 9 on page 166 Remove and re route the cables away from fan housing figure 6 18 callout 1 4 Release the housing retainer clip located inside the toner cartridge cavity figure 6 18 callout 2 and lift the housing up and out of the chassis EN Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing 177 Fan Motor Figure 6 19 Fan 1 Laser Scanner 2 of 2 1 Unplug the fan cable from the DC Controller PCA 2 Remove 2
291. rough the access hole figure 6 61 callout 2 230 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Interlock Switch VAATAMA ka asil Figure 6 62 Mailbox with Stapler Interlock Switch 1 Remove the left cover see figure 6 54 2 Disconnect 2 wires from the Interlock Switch figure 6 62 callout 1 3 Press the retainer tabs together figure 6 62 callout 2 to release the switch and remove it from the rear of the unit EN Mailbox With Stapler 231 Jam Access Door Assembly Figure 6 63 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door Springs 1 Remove the left and right covers see figure 6 54 on page 223 2 Remove the Delivery Head Position Motor see figure 6 71 on page 240 3 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 4 Release the upper end of the Metallic Tape see figure 6 68 on page 237 5 Release 2 retaining springs figure 6 63 callout 1 232 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 64 Mailbox with Stapler Jam Access Door E Clip 6 From the front of the unit remove 1 e clip from the right end of the shaft figure 6 64 callout 2 CAUTION Use caution when removing the e clip because the clip might eject towards you or another person Note Before removing the Jam Access Door six sided shaft note the position of the plastic retainer that holds the metallic tape located at the center of the door It must be replaced on the shaft in the same position for proper pa
292. rride or change any Printing Menu setting through most software applications and from the printer driver When you change a setting from the printer control panel the new setting becomes the printer default value Paper Source Default The printer paper source is specified by the print job not the printer control panel The following paragraphs apply when the current job does not specify a paper source Unless changed or not specified by the current job the software application or the printer driver the paper source default is determined by the Cold Reset Paper Size letter or A4 set in the Service Mode Menu f Tray 1 is set to cassette it will look for the default size If there is no paper in Tray 1 and Tray 4 is installed and loaded with the Cold Reset Paper Size the printer will pull from Tray 4 The printer pulls paper from Tray 5 first if the Optional 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is installed elf there is no paper in Tray 1 and Tray 4 is not installed the printer will pull from the first tray containing the Cold Reset Paper Size If none of the trays contain the Cold Reset Paper Size the printer will prompt the user to put letter or A4 paper in Tray 1 54 Chapter 3 Operating Overview EN Resetting the Printer Cold Reset Cold Reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the defaults back to the factory settings CAUTION Performing a Cold Reset resets the JetDirect configuration To avoid
293. s Note EN This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If this equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the instructions it may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase separation between equipment and receiver e Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is located e Consult your dealer or an experienced radio TV technician Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user s authority to operate this equipment Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules Regulatory Information 35 Environmental Product Stewardship Protecting the Environment Hewlett Packard Company is committed t
294. s about 116 troubleshooting 429 G go key 52 H half self test functional check 409 handle 7 bin tabletop mailbox 292 hard disk about 26 ordering 23 removing and replacing 148 standard or optional 3 status 80 verifying installation 342 hardware table 157 Hardware Technical Support Center HTSC 32 height printer and accessories 7 47 high voltage power supply check 410 contacts 101 108 distribution 101 removing and replacing 205 hinges stapler 258 HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program 31 HP CompuServe Forum 32 HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology 31 HP JetDirect print server card see ElO cards HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide ordering 24 HP JetSend IP addresses 82 HP LaserJet paper ordering 22 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide ordering 24 HP multi purpose paper ordering 22 HP reseller sales and service support 32 HP Support Line 28 HP s Distribution Center 28 HTSC see Hardware Technical Support Center humidity printer 49 hvps see high voltage power supply identification printer 6 illustrations and parts lists 444 image formation block diagram 107 developing 113 fusing 116 system 107 transferring 115 writing 112 image quality troubleshooting 394 image skew troubleshooting 404 427 images per month 2 indicator lights 53 information menu 59 input paper guide mailbox 230 input sources 136 intake fan 3 f
295. s connected and the connector is not damaged 3 Replace the duplexer See Duplexer on page 149 for instructions 1 Re install the optional tray 2 Make sure the optional tray is connected and the connector is not damaged 3 Replace the optional tray No action is required If the message displays for over five minutes turn the printer off and then turn the printer on A large print job with detailed graphics might take up to five minutes to cancel EN Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error A stapler jam or a paper jamin 1 Clear the paper from the the occurred stapler alternates with 2 Open the top cover of the E JOM stapler and clear the stapler i i jam 3 Resend the print job The paper is not aligned 1 Remove the paper from correctly in the stapler the stapler alternates with 2 Resend the print job Error The optional input tray cannot Check the doors and paper feed paper to the printer guides alternates with because a door or paper guide is 7 at open The paper path between the Close the paper path printer and the external paper handling output device is open and must be closed before printing can continue The engine is advancing its Stand by If the message rollers to check for possible does not clear turn the paper jams printer off and then turn the printer on Warnin
296. s best to set the page orientation from the printer driver or software application Driver and software settings override control panel settings EN Table 3 7 Printing Menu continued Item Values Explanation Internal fonts r Permanent soft fonts or 3 Fonts stored in one of the three La The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them on the PCL Font List The font number appears in the Font column of the printout This item might not appear depending on the font selected Press VALUE once to change setting by increments of 0 01 for pitch or hold down VALUE to scroll by increments of 1 Select any one of several available symbol sets from many others the printer s control panel A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font PC 8 or PC 850 is recommended for line draw characters Select the version of Courier font to use The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III series printers Both fonts are not available at the same time The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper 1 Up to 78 10 pitch characters can be printed on one line Up to 80 10 pitch characters can be printed on one line Select 3 to append a carriage return to each line feed encountered in backward compati
297. s not broken 3 Replace the registration assembly if necessary See Registration Assembly on page 207 for instructions alternates with 13 5 XX Fuser output paper late jam Remove the toner cartridge Paper never reached PS1403 at and check the path between the fusing assembly the registration and fusing assemblies PS1403 on the sensor PCA may be faulty 13 6 XX Fuser output paper stopped 1 Check the fuser flag at the jam Paper never exited the sensor board area fusing assembly 2 Check the fuser access door 3 Make sure that the flag is not broken PS1403 on the sensor PCA may be faulty 13 9 XX Standard output bin paper late Paper did not arrive at jam PS1402 when expected Inspect the path between the fuser and delivery assemblies Check the diverter assembly 376 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message 13 A XX Paper stopped at the standard output bin 13 1015 A page did not arrive at the Duplexer s first sensor 13 10 XX Duplex turnaround paper late jam The paper did not reach the duplex turnaround when it should have 13 1104 A page stayed too long at the Duplexer s first sensor EN Recommended Action Check the paper path This jam is sensed by PS2401 on the sensor PCA 1 Open the top cover and remove any paper 2 Open the left door and remove any paper
298. s to locate the software or support of your choice URL for Access HP http www hp com URL for Software and Support http Awww hp com go cposupport FTP address ftp hp com Login anonymous Password your Internet name or user identification FTP Path for Drive Software pub printers FTP Path for Network Software pub networking World Wide Web Download printer driver software using www hp com cposupport eschome html HP Reseller Sales and Service Support Line The Hardware Technical Support Center HTSC is available for technical support to assist Hewlett Packard authorized service technicians The HTSC can be reached at 1 800 544 9976 between 7 00 A M and 6 00 PM Mountain Standard Time Monday Tuesday Thursday and Friday On Wednesdays the office closes at 4 00 P M Other Areas Outside of North America and Europe contact your local HP sales office for assistance in obtaining technical support 32 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Warranty This warranty entitles you to standard warranty services for your printer and accessories and is available from HP worldwide However there may be local variations in the level of warranty service You should contact the local HP Service Center to check for the applicable local warranty in your country or province One Year On Site Limited Warranty Hewlett Packard warrants its computer hardware products against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year
299. s when the paper arrives in the stapler The Retainer a shaft holding two rubber flexible fingers or anti curl fingers rotates once to apply pressure down and backward This action forces the paper to register against the rear wall of the stapler bed as well as reduces paper curl The Registration Pusher located in the right side of the Top Assembly registers the paper against the left wall of the stapler bed This cycle is repeated until the amount of sheets to be stapled is reached with a maximum of 20 Stapling Cycle The Sliders move the stack of sheets to the stapling position The Registration Pusher applies slight pressure to the stack of sheets toward the left wall of the stapler bed where the stapler is located Then the stack of sheets is stapled Eject Cycle The stapler bed sliders offset the stacks or jobs The Off Set Pusher located in the left side of the Top Cover Assembly pushes the stack towards the right side of the stapler bed whenever it applies The Sliders move the stack of paper from stapling position to eject position which is out of the stapler bed reaching the Wire Frame level The Wire Frame directs the stack of paper The Exit Flap Assembly moves down to prevent the job from returning to the stapler bed The Sliders retract to home position letting the stack of sheets fall into the output bin The capacity of the output bin is 300 stapled sheets in jobs of five sheets or equivalent combinations 134 Ch
300. screwdriver then lift the bar 250 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 82 Back Plate 2 of 2 3 Remove the Torx screw joining the Back Plate with the Stapler see figure 6 82 callout 2 4 Release the ground cable that is connected to the Back Plate see figure 6 82 callout 1 To Reinstall CAUTION Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage could occur the next time the cover is opened if the cables are reinstalled too tightly Do not overtighten the screws when replacing the Back Plate CAUTION Do not touch the metallic plate edges EN Stapler Assembly 251 Stapler Controller PCA Stapler Controller PCA 1 of 3 1 Remove the Stapler Assembly see figure 6 80 Remove the Back Plate see figure 6 81 Remove 2 screws located on the right side of the Stapler see figure 6 83 callout 1 252 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN Stapler Controller PCA 2 of 3 4 Unplug the cables that are connected to the PCA Identify their color and size and the ground cables see figure 6 84 callouts 1 and 2 Stapler Assembly 253 Figure 6 85 Stapler Controller PCA 3 of 3 5 The board is supported by a hooked tab at the top of the card see figure 6 85 callout 1 Slide the board to the left and then down To Reinstall Slide the board up and then to the right CAUTION Keep the Top Cover Assembly open while reconnecting the cables Cable damage coul
301. se one notch 2 If distance A is less than distance B by more than 0 5 mm 0 02 inch move the adjustment lever counter clockwise one notch 3 After adjusting EN Reinstall the tray Re run the Paper Path Test Recheck the measurements Re adjust as necessary Tray Adjustment Procedure 93 Tray 4 2000 sheet Input Tray Adjustment Procedure This procedure applies to the 2000 sheet Input Tray Tray 4 To adjust Trays 2 and 3 the standard paper trays in the printer and the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Trays 4 and 5 see page 92 In some cases the registration from the 2000 sheet Input Tray causes print to start too close to the edge of the paper This situation is nota typical occurrence In most cases the 2000 sheet Input Tray offset is fine Although this may or may not be within specification it is unacceptable to some users Perform the following adjustment procedure to correct the situation 1 With the 2000 sheet Input Tray stand alone remove left right and rear covers from the tray Remove the vertical transfer unit Open the 2000 sheet Input Tray paper tray Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on the right side of the 2000 sheet Input Tray see figure 4 3 Locking Bracket Hole Screw 1 Locating Pin O Screw 2 2000 sheet Input Tray Locking Closing Lever Bracket Figure 4 3 Tray 4 Position Adjustment 94 Chapter 4 Maintenance and Adjustments EN Note EN 10 1
302. series printers PACKARD Event Log Page 1 Current Page Count 0 Serial Number USMT173335 Number Error Page Count Description or Personality 1 13 3 13 1 PAPER FEED 2 PAPER LATE JAM Waaa ee Most recent error Ha H Figure 7 5 Sample Event Log EN Display 337 Print the Event Log The printer s internal Event Log stores the most recent errors and can be printed at any time To print the Event Log 1 Press Menu until 244 2 Press Item until 3 Press Select to print the Event Log Display the Event Log If the printer cannot print or move any paper follow these steps to display the Event Log Otherwise print the Event Log 1 Press Menu until Press Item until Press Select to show the Event Log Press Value to scroll through the Event Log ao fF o N Write down the error messages For example Error number Error code Page count Appears on display panel Appears in the Event Log 6 Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10 000 printed pages 7 Ask the customer for any observed error trends For example do paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer 8 Record any specific error trends See table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages on page 352 and table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages on page 373 and follow the recommended action 10 If the Control Panel displays OF OH go to the next sectio
303. sfer too many macros soft fonts or complex graphics The data dense text rules raster or vector graphics sent to the printer was too complex Recommended Action Clear the jammed staple 1 Remove the media and perform a device reset cycle 2 If the problem persists replace the Stapler Controller PCA See Stapler Controller PCA on page 252 for instructions Replace the Stapler See Stapler Assembly on page 249 for instructions 1 Press Go to print the transferred data some data might be lost 2 Simplify the print job or install additional memory See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions 1 Press Go to print the transferred data Some data might be lost 2 To print the job without losing data from the Configuration Menu in the printer control panel set 4 print the job and then return to Do not leave FA bit might degrade performance If this message appears often simplify the print job Printer Messages 385 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error Too much data was sent to the 1 Press Go to clear the EIO card in the specified slot message Data will be lost An improper communications 2 Check the host alternates with protocol may be in use configuration Error Too much data was sent to the 1 Check for a loose cable paralle
304. sonnel Receiving a fax requires a type 3 facsimile machine or fax card Service related information includes e Service notes HP Authorized dealers Application notes Product Data Sheets Material Safety Data Sheets MSDS Typeface and accessory information Printer support software information Toner information Driver request form and Software Matrix HP FIRST U S Call the HP ASAP system 1 800 333 1917 and follow the voice prompts to enter HP FIRST HP FIRST Europe Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers U K 0800 96 02 71 Netherlands 06 02 22 420 Belgium Dutch 078 11 19 0 Germany 0130 810061 Switzerland German 155 1527 Austria 0660 8128 For English service outside the above countries 31 20 681 5792 Technical Assistance 31 HP CompuServe Forum CompuServe members can download a variety of support materials including product data sheets software application notes and printer drivers for many popular software applications Members may also post and reply to questions in an interactive format To access the HP Forum type GO HP at any prompt For more information or to join CompuServe call 1 800 524 3388 Internet Anonymous FTP library service is available for around the clock access to drivers software and technical support information for HP peripheral and computer products Please note that paths may change without notice Access the Internet or FTP address and use the menu
305. sted A ones Ow Made in USA of Foreign and Domestic Components us Figure 1 1 Sample Model and Serial Number Label for the Printer The identification labels for the 2000 sheet Input Tray and 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray are located on the back panel directly below the identification labels on the printer To locate the identification labels for the 8 bin Multibin Mailbox and 5 bin Multibin Mailbox with Stapler detach the accessory from the printer The identification labels are located on the bottom right of the front side side that attaches to printer To locate the identification labels for the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox detach the accessory from the printer The identification label is located on the bottom side of the back cover 6 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Specifications Table 1 4 Printer and Accessory Dimensions Item This section contains information on physical and electrical characteristics of the printer For information on the printer site and environmental requirements such as operating temperature and humidity ventilation etc see Chapter 2 Width Depth Weight Printer only 46 75 in 20 50 in 106 Ibs 48 kg 1187 mm 520 mm without toner cartridge and with paper trays Printer with 40 20 in 46 75 in 20 50 in 160 164 Ibs 2 x 500 sheet 1021 mm 1187 mm 520 mm 72 6 74 4 kg Input Tray or 2000 sheet Input Tray Toner cartridge n a Full 106 oz
306. stomer must have the following e Support in software applications for these features e A parallel cable with the correct pin configuration see figure 5 25 Parallel Cable Pin Configuration For best results use the C2946A 3 meter or C2947A 10 meter cable or equivalent Ensure that all power and interface cables on the printer and host computer are properly grounded in compliance with local codes Signal Name Printer Pin IBM Port Pin nSTROBE 1 1 DATA 1 2 2 DATA 2 3 3 DATA 3 4 4 DATA 4 5 5 DATA 5 6 6 DATA 6 7 7 DATA 7 8 8 DATA 8 9 CY nACKNLG 109_ dN BUSY 14 CALL PE 12 dD SELECT 13 1B nAutoFd 149_ 14 No Connect 15 34 n O VDC GND 16 19 THRU 30 _______ 18 THRU 25 nIP 31 OU nFAULT 32 15 Vcc 33 Vcc 35 Parallel Cable Pin Assignments C2946A 142 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN Removal and Replacement Chapter contents Removal and Replacement Strategy 145 Required Tools 146 User Installable Accessories 147 Hardware Table 157 Control Panel 159 Covers eee eee eee eee 160 Delivery Unit for Standard Output Bin 169 Diverter Assembly 172 Door Assembly Diverter 173 Door Assembly Right Lower 174 Fan 1 Exhaust Laser Scanner and Housing 177 Fan 2 Exhaust LVPS
307. sts replace the Formatter PCA 1 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on 2 If the problem persists check the C link and power cables 3 If the problem persists check the device power connector and power supply internal or external Replace if damaged 4 If the problem persists replace the PCA Controller board for the device 5 If the problem persists replace the Formatter PCA 1 Turn the printer off and then turn the printer on 2 If the problem persists replace the PCA Controller board for the device 3 If the problem persists replace the Formatter PCA EN Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message 66 00 26 A page count error occurred 1 Turn the printer off and 66 00 27 then turn the printer on 66 00 28 2 If the problem persists replace the PCA Controller board for the device 3 If the problem persists replace the Formatter PCA 66 00 31 Device or engine is not Verify the supported devices 66 00 32 supported The configuration for 66 00 33 js invalid 66 00 34 66 00 35 66 00 36 66 00 37 66 00 38 66 00 39 66 00 40 66 00 41 66 00 42 66 00 43 66 00 44 66 00 45 EN Printer Messages 391 Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages continued Event Log Message Category Message 66 11 01 66 11 02 66 11 03 66 12 32 66 22 32 Description A lifting a
308. t invisible electrostatic image which is developed into a visible image as the drum rotates see figure 5 10 Cylindrical lens Laser driver Scanner motor BD mirror Mirror Scanning mirror Focusing lens BD PCA Photosensitive drum Image Writing Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the drum and the drum is rotating the entire surface area of the drum can be covered The speed of the laser scanner motor which turns the scanning mirror and the speed of the main motor which turns the drum are synchronized and each successive sweep of the beam is offset 1 600th of an inch The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot of light every 1 600th of an inch This is how the printer achieves its 600 x 600 dpi resolution After the writing process the drum surface has a latent invisible electrostatic image At the end of each sweep the beam strikes the beam detect lens generating the Beam Detect BD signal The BD signal is sent to the DC Controller where it is converted to an electrical signal used to synchronize the output of data VDO for one sweep scan line and to diagnose problems with the laser diode or laser scanner motor 112 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN EN Image Developing The developing process changes the latent electrostatic image into a visible image by depositing negatively charged toner particles on the exposed areas of the drum The developing station is located inside the t
309. table 8 7 on page 460 Stapler Packaging C3766 60509 table 8 7 on page 460 Stapling Bed Assembly Storage Paper Tray C3766 60503 RB2 3669 000CN table 8 7 on page 460 table 8 8 on page 462 Support Plate RA2 2500 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Switch Sensor PCA RG5 1846 000CN table 8 5 on page 456 Tension Spring RS5 2490 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Thermal Control PCA Thermal Control PCA Cable C3125 60002 C3125 00001 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 5 on page 456 Toner Cartridge C3909A Top Cover Includes label RF5 2766 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 table 8 8 on page 462 Top Cover Assembly C3766 60501 table 8 7 on page 460 Top Cover Assembly Upper Guide Torque Limiter RG1 3838 000CN RB1 6588 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 table 8 4 on page 453 Transfer Guide Transfer Guide Bushing RF5 1394 000CN RB1 6441 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 Transfer Roller RF5 1412 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Transfer Roller Assembly RG5 1887 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 EN Alphabetical Parts List 473 Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Tray 1 Door Tray 1 Feed Roller RG5 1883 000CN RB1 6730 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 3 on page 451 Tray 1 Internal Cover Shield RB1 6749 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Tray 1 PCA RG5 1884 000CN table 8 3 on page 451
310. table 8 8 on page 462 Paper Height Lever RB1 6693 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Paper Input Unit PIU RG5 1852 160CN table 8 3 on page 451 Paper Input Unit PIU C3166 69011 table 8 4 on page 453 Paper Input Unit PIU Exchange C3166 69011 table 8 3 on page 451 Paper Pickup Assembly Paper Pickup Cable RG5 4410 000CN RG5 1861 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 4 on page 453 Paper Sensing Lever RB1 6692 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Paper Size Guide Trays 2 and 3 RF5 1484 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 Paper Size Guide Label Trays 2 and 3 RS5 8605 000CN table 8 1 on page 446 Paper Size Sensing PCA Trays 2 and 3 RG5 1845 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Photo Interrupter WG8 0291 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Pickup Motor RH7 1262 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Pickup Roller 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray RF5 2708 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 EN Alphabetical Parts List 471 Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Pickup Roller Paper Input Unit Pin Positioning Bushing RF5 1427 000CN RA2 2439 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 9 on page 465 PIU PCA RG5 1860 000CN table 8 4 on page 453 Plate Motor Cover RA2 2541 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Plate Guard RB1 6522 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Plate Shield Plate Latch RF5 1464 000CN RF1 4005 000CN table 8 6 o
311. te type or size Printer Messages 371 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Log Category Message Status The RAM disk setting has been changed from the printer s control panel This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes Error The printer fuser is heating up and printing will continue as soon as it is done Error The envelope feeder you are trying to install will not work for this printer 372 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Wait for the printer to reinitialize If you change the mode of the external device turn the printer off turn the printer on and wait for the printer to reinitialize No action is required Install the correct envelope feeder EN The following is an example of the format for numerical control panel messages Device number in Input or output the daisy chain device Table 7 6 Numerical Printer Messages Message Event Description Log Category Message Error A printer error has occurred Error A page is jammed alternates with Error A page is jammed Error A page is jammed alternates with EN Recommended Action Press Go in the printer s control panel to clear the error message Check the front door of the printer Opening and closing the top cover will cause the printer to go back online Check the left door of the printer Check
312. tep A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next major step A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed Proceed to the referenced location and follow the directions for that area After completing the additional testing proceed to the next major step The following list describes the basic questions for the customer and the corresponding troubleshooting step to help you quickly define the problem s Table 7 1 Major Steps for Troubleshooting Display on page 336 Information Does the display panel indicate Contains the procedures for correcting control panel messages and displaying and correcting Event Log codes Will the printer print a configuration page successfully Pages on page 340 Contains the procedures for printing the configuration page and evaluating and correcting system configuration Image Quality on Does the print quality meet customer expectations page 394 Event Log on page 336 Communication on page 346 Troubleshooting Checks on page 412 Contains the image quality comparison tables cleaning procedures toner cartridge checks and High voltage Power Supply checks Are there recurring problems in the Event Log Contains information about printing the Event Log and evaluating the error history Can the customer print from the host system successfully Describes how to determine if the printer is communicating properly wit
313. ter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Up Sensors PCA Figure 6 113 Face Up Sensors PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 Remove 1 screw callout 1 Unplug J306 from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA and remove the Empty Bin Sensor PCA callout 2 EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 283 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Reversing Mechanism Motor Figure 6 114 Reversing Mechanism Motor 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 2 Remove 1 screw from the metal plate 284 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 115 Reversing Mechanism Motor 2 of 2 3 Unplug the motor s connector callout 1 4 Remove 2 screws callout 2 and the motor CAUTION Do not damage the belt as you remove the motor EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 285 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper Figure 6 116 Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 1 of 3 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 and the Back Cover page 263 Open the Top Cover as shown Remove the grounding screw at the top back side figure 6 116 286 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN EN Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 2 of 3 4 Using pliers release the springs at each end of the assembly 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 287 Figure 6 118 Face Up Diverter Assembly Flipper 3 of 3 5 Rotate the assembly upward and then release side 1 first and side 2 second Remove the assembly as shown 288 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacem
314. the high level of reliability of a new HP LaserJet toner cartridge or HP LaserJet staple cartridge Also Hewlett Packard cannot predict the long term reliability effect on the printer when using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges e The print quality of HP LaserJet toner cartridges influences the customer s perception of the printer Hewlett Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a refilled toner cartridge Recycling Toner Cartridges In order to reduce waste Hewlett Packard uses a recycling program for used toner cartridges Cartridge components that do not wear out are recycled as are plastics and other materials Hewlett Packard pays the shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant For each cartridge returned HP donates one U S dollar to be shared by the Nature Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation To join this recycling effort follow the instructions inside the toner cartridge box 30 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Technical Assistance EN HP ASAP Automated Support Access Program provides free technical support information 24 hours a day 7 days a week The ASAP system includes HP FIRST explained below The ASAP service requires a touchtone phone HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology HP FIRST Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology is a phone in fax service providing technical information for HP LaserJet users as well as service per
315. the 4 screws in the Back Cover Remove the Back Cover 2 Pull open Trays 4 and 5 and open the Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 3 Setthe DIP switches on the Controller PCA to Motor Test Mode See table 7 26 on page 418 for an explanation of the DIP switch settings 4 To turn the power supply switch to Diagnostic Mode pull out on the blue handle e f the motors are working properly you will hear them as they rotate continuously f the motors do not rotate replace the corresponding field replaceable unit either the Paper Pickup Assembly the VTU or the Paper Deck Drive Assembly 5 To stop the test set the power supply switch back to Operational Mode push in and reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA to the off position see table 7 26 on page 418 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Standalone Running Test This test verifies that the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is functioning properly For this test use the LED located on the Controller PCA See table 7 27 on page 421 for an interpretation of the LED patterns If the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is underneath the printer paper jams may occur because the printer will not pick up the paper To prevent excessive paper jams during this test feed only 6 to 8 pages 1 Make sure that there is paper in both trays 2 Set the DIP switches on the Controller PCA for standalone running mode see table 7 26 on page 418 for an explanation of the settings 3 To test Tray 5 open Tray
316. the Stacker Mode to ensure the paper path is working properly 1 The top cover and paper access door must be closed to perform this test Set the DIP switches for the standalone running test in either Mailbox Mode or the Stacker Mode see table 7 28 on page 422 Pull out the power supply switch to the test position Press and hold in the interlock switch Perform a self test Then manually start feeding paper e In Mailbox Mode the unit will deliver paper to all bins starting with the left output bin then down to the bottom bin e In Stacker Mode the unit will stack paper starting at the bottom bin until the top of stack is reached on each bin If problems are found the possible cause will be indicated by the Service LED see table 7 29 on page 424 Push in the power supply switch to the normal position Diagnostics on Accessories 423 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensor Test This test allows you to check if all unit sensors are working properly By activating any unit sensor flag the service LED should turn on 1 Make sure that all bins are empty to perform the sensor test 2 Set the DIP switches for the sensor test see table 7 28 on page 422 Do NOT press the interlock switch in at this time Pull out the power supply switch to the test position Make sure that the service LED is off oa Aa Q Manually activate any sensor flag The service LED should turn on if the sensor is functional Note To test the t
317. the chassis To Reinstall 1 Align the left rear corner of the tray and the locating track at the lower rear center of the tray with their respective guides and insert the tray no more than two inches into the chassis Carefully lift up on the outer end of the tray while pulling the tray stop mechanism located at the right rear of the tray opening out and over the tray roller and guide assembly Carefully slide the tray into the printer until it latches into place 222 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Mailbox With Stapler Covers Pa Figure 6 54 Mailbox with Stapler Covers The procedure for removing the left and right covers is the same 1 Using a small flat blade screwdriver release 3 retaining tabs figure 6 54 callout 1 along the rear edge of the cover and rotate the cover clear of the frame To Reinstall Make sure that the retaining tabs along the front edge are in place and snap the rear edge of the cover into position EN Mailbox With Stapler 223 Delivery Head Assembly Figure 6 55 Mailbox with Stapler Delivery Head Ribbon Cable 1 Remove the left cover see figure 6 54 on page 223 2 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 or the stapler see figure 6 80 on page 249 3 Release the top of the Metallic Tape see figure 6 68 on page 237 4 Unlock the cable clip figure 6 55 callout 1 and unplug the ribbon cable figure 6 55 callout
318. the kind of paper loaded EN Recommended Action Re install the toner cartridge Wait for the program to load Load the specified type of paper into Tray 1 Load an envelope into Tray 1 Load the specified type of envelope into Tray 1 1 Load the requested paper into Tray 1 2 Press Go if the desired paper is already loaded in Tray 1 3 Press VALUE to scroll through the available types and sizes 4 Press SELECT to accept the alternate type or size Printer Messages 359 Table 7 5 Alphabetical Printer Messages continued Message Event Description Recommended Action Log Category Message Error There is no available memory in You might want to add more the printer The current job might memory to the printer or not print correctly and some simplify the print job See resources such as downloaded Memory and Personality fonts or macros might have Upgrade on page 147 for been deleted instructions Error The printer changed its memory You might want to change settings because it did not have memory settings for I O enough memory to use the Buffering and Resource previous settings for I O Saving although default Buffering and Resource Saving settings are usually best or This usually occurs after add more memory to the removing memory from the printer printer adding a duplexer or adding a printer language Warning The printer did not have enough 1 Press Go to continue fre
319. the signal is high the power supply provides 24V and 5V to the paper deck driver The 24V is used to drive the lifter Feed Pickup motors clutches and solenoids 5V drives sensors and PCA electronics Paper Paths and Components 123 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components Components of the 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox paper path including mailbox sensors switches and motors are illustrated in figure 5 17 and figure 5 18 and described in table below Ry S3 S4 ILSW y SIN WU NESS NIN NA AN NN ON Figure 5 17 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components 1 of 2 124 Chapter 5 Functional Overview EN FUBFS FUDS PPS1 ES BFS1 BFS2 BFS3 PPS2 BFS4 BFS5 BFS6 BFS7 Figure 5 189 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Components 2 of 2 Table 5 3 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Sensors Switches and Motors Control Device Title Location M Motor Upper left side Si Face up Down diverter solenoid Upper right side s2 Reversing mechanism solenoid Right side of the motor S3 Diverters solenoid 1 3 and 5 Bottom left side s4 Diverters solenoid 2 4 and 6 Bottom left side BES1 to 7 Bin empty sensors 1 to 7 Surface of every standard output bin BFS1 to 7 Bin full sensors 1 to 7 Upper left side of every standard output bin entrance FUBFS Face up bin full sensor Upper center of the left output bin entrance ES Paper entry sensor Paper entrance FUDS Face up delivery sensor Rev assembly to
320. ting of the High Voltage Power Supply HVPW and the HVPS ground contacts on the toner cartridge 2 Check for proper seating of toner cartridge 3 Replace the toner cartridge Replace the High Voltage Power Supply See Power Supply High Voltage HVPS on page 205 for instructions Replace the toner cartridge Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Table 7 21 White Stripes Parallel to Path Possible Cause 1 Toner cartridge is nearly empty This can cause uneven toner distribution 2 Toner cartridge has been exposed to too much light Recommended Action Remove the toner cartridge and shake it gently The cartridge will soon require replacement Store the toner cartridge in a darkened environment for several days This may restore the photosensitive potential Image Quality 405 A anDL AA MAVIY AARBWOR IWANAN NANG a mi Z a rimara ro wawa ww AnD Cn mavo jibCce WCC joCc OCC OCC AaBoCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCe AgBoCe Table 7 21 White Stripes Parallel to Path continued Possible Cause 3 Foreign objects in beam path Any foreign objects will block the light from developing an image on the Photosensitive drum Table 7 22 Partial Blank Page Possible Cause 1 Page is too complex The printer cannot create the image fast enough to keep pace with the print engine 2 Not enough memor
321. tion Try a different paper lot or other media see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Remove and inspect the Fusing Assembly for excessive toner build up Clean using alcohol Clean the Anti Static Brush using compressed air Replace the Fusing Assembly See Fusing Assembly on page 187 for instructions If a new Fusing Assembly does not resolve the problem replace the DC Controller PCA See PCA DC Controller on page 197 for instructions Recommended Action Try a different media or paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Clean inside of printer see Cleaning the Printer and Accessories on page 88 Install a new toner cartridge if leaking EN AaBbCc AaBbCce AaBbCce AaBbCce AGBOC amp EN Table 7 14 Background Scatter continued Possible Cause Recommended Action 3 Printing on envelope seams Printing on Move the text to an area without seams If an envelope seam can cause a background scatter problem 4 Toner cartridge is defective 5 Transfer Roller is dirty or worn A worn Transfer Roller can cause background scatter due to improper bias voltages 6 Print Density is set too low causing background scatter particularly with envelopes and heavier papers not printing on seams try a higher print density setting see item 6 below Install a new toner cartridge Clean the Transfer Rolle
322. tistics NETWORK STATESTICS UNICAST PACKETS RCVB TOTAL PACKETS RCVD BAD PACKETS RCYD FRAMING ERRORS RCVD PACKETS TRANSMITTED UNSENDABLE PACKETS XMIT COLLISIONS XMIT LATE COLLISIONS 399166 455443 587 0 397864 0 43428 0 PROTOCOL INFORMATION SNMP SET CMTY NAME NONE APPLETALK STATUS READY ETALK NET 301 NODE 004 P2 TCP IP STATUS READY IP address r NAME HP LaserJet 800 eres ETALK ZONE ile te HOST NAME NP19BC11B CONFIG BY DHCP IP_ADDRESS 205 168 111 43 SUBNET MASK 255 255 255 0 BLC LLC STATUS CONNECTED DEF GATEWAY 205 158 111 10 SERVER ADDRESS 00805FA97ADE SYSLOG SERVER NOT SPECIFIED IDLE TIMEQUT SECONDS 90 BOOTP DHCP SERVER 205 168 111 2 CONFIG FILE NOT SPECIFIED IPX SPX status WEBJA SERVER NOT SPECIFIED IPX SPX STATUS 16 IPX SPX RETRANS g NOT CONFIGURED NETWORK FRAME TYPE RCVD MODE QUEUE SERVER UNKNOWN EN 802 2 346 NODE NAME UNKNOWN ENTIT 630 we NP19BC11B 00093020 EN 802 3 44977 Node name Figure 7 9 Sample JetDirect Configuration Page EN Communication 349 e Ifthe ElO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and completed its internal diagnostics the I O CARD READY message will appear If communication is lost an I O NOT READY message appears followed by a two digit error code Consult the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and recommended action e The Network Statistics column indicates the status of network
323. toward the outside of the frame 4 Release the elevator belt from the pulley assembly by pushing downward on the pulley until the pulley shaft falls free Note that the flattened end of the pulley shaft is positioned toward the outside of the frame To Reinstall 1 Make sure that the locating tabs in the pulley halves fit exactly into their mating notches When properly assembled the pulley halves will not rotate relative to each other 2 Make sure that the pulley housings are positioned with the shaft protrusion toward the outside of the frame 3 Make sure to reconnect the lower tension springs 236 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Metallic Tape and Housing Assembly Figure 6 68 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Retaining Pin 1 Remove all paper bins and the blind cover see figure 6 75 on page 244 Lower the Delivery Head to the bottom of the frame Release the tape retainer by pushing the tab see figure 6 68 callout 1 EN Mailbox With Stapler 237 Figure 6 69 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Release 4 Carefully rewind the tape into its housing Do not allow the tape to freely snap back into the housing see figure 6 69 callout 2 238 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN mass ee F Figure 6 70 Mailbox with Stapler Metallic Tape Housing 5 Remove the tape housing by releasing the retaining tabs figure 6 70 callout 3 and rotating it upward To Reinstall 1 Replace the tape housi
324. ts and Diagrams Table 8 10 Alphabetical Parts List continued Low Voltage Power Supply 110 120V Exchange C3166 69007 table 8 6 on page 458 Low Voltage Power Supply Universal RG5 1878 000CN table 8 6 on page 458 Low Voltage Power Supply Universal Exchange Mailbox with Stapler Packaging C3166 69008 C3766 60516 table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 7 on page 460 Main Cable RG5 4440 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Main Gear Assembly RG5 1847 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Main Motor RH7 1260 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Main Motor Cable RG5 1919 000CN table 8 3 on page 451 Maintenance Kit 100 120V C3971B table 8 1 on page 446 Maintenance Kit 220 240V C3972B table 8 1 on page 446 Odd Face down Bin Assembly RG1 3836 000CN table 8 9 on page 465 Open Close Stopper RB1 6484 000CN table 8 2 on page 449 Outrigger RG5 3852 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Packaging Kit 2000 sheet Tray C3763 60500 table 8 1 on page 446 Packaging Kit duplexer C3762 60500 table 8 1 on page 446 Packaging Kit Envelope Feeder C3765 60500 table 8 1 on page 446 Packaging Kit Multibin Mailbox C3764 60500 table 8 1 on page 446 Packaging Kit Printer C3166 67905 table 8 1 on page 446 Paper Deck Drive Assembly RG5 4416 000CN table 8 8 on page 462 Paper Feed Assembly VTU RG5 4403 000CN
325. uide Label Trays 2 and 3 table 8 1 on page 446 RS5 8611 000CN VD5 0056 301CN Cassette Size Labels Fuse LVPS 110 120V table 8 8 on page 462 table 8 6 on page 458 VD7 0646 301CN VD7 1893 151CN Fuse LVPS Universal Power Supply Fuse table 8 6 on page 458 table 8 8 on page 462 VS1 5057 007CN Connector 7P table 8 6 on page 458 WG8 0291 000CN Photo Interrupter table 8 4 on page 453 table 8 4 on page 453 EN Numerical Parts List 481 Table 8 11 Numerical Parts List continued XA9 0872 000CN Screw with Washer M3X8 table 8 2 on page 449 table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 6 on page 458 XA9 0605 000CN Screw tapping M4X8 table 8 3 on page 451 XA9 0817 000CN Screw w washer M3X20 table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 5 on page 456 XB4 7300 809CN Screw tapping truss head M3X8 table 8 5 on page 456 XB4 7401 009CN XB5 7303 007CN Screw tapping pan head M4X10 Screw CT M3X3 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 5 on page 456 table 8 6 on page 458 XB6 7400 807CN XZ9 0379 000CN Screw M4X8 Front Door Latch table 8 3 on page 451 table 8 2 on page 449 XZ9 0379 000CN Latch 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray table 8 8 on page 462 XZ9 0442 000CN Caster table 8 8 on page 462 482 Chapter 8 Parts and Diagrams EN EN Index Numerics 2 x 500 sheet input tray electrical specifi
326. uirements 47 specifications acoustic emissions 10 electrical 9 guide ordering 24 paper trays bins and accessories 4 print media 11 printer and accessories 7 speed pages per minute 2 stand dimensions and weight 7 bin tabletop mailbox 8 ordering 21 standard output bin 7 bin tabletop mailbox 275 standard output bins delivery unit 169 specifications 5 stapler dimensions 8 non HP cartridges 30 operation 133 paper jams 428 paper paths and components 131 parts and diagrams 460 removing and replacing 249 stapler bed assembly 256 verifying installation 342 weight 8 EN EN storage 2 x 500 sheet input tray front door 321 paper tray 320 print media paper 13 printer environment 49 strings anti curl mailbox 246 supplies ordering information 20 parts and diagrams 443 Support Materials Europe SME 28 442 Support Materials Organization SMO 28 442 switches 2 x 500 sheet input tray paper size 122 diagram 433 mailbox with stapler interlock 231 multibin mailbox interlock 231 trays 2 amp 3 paper size 136 technical assistance 31 temperature printer 49 test accessories 418 printer 80 342 415 timing printer 138 toner cartridge cleaning spills 90 contacts 101 108 detection 101 image formation 108 life expectancy 29 ordering 22 recycling 30 refilled 30 troubleshooting 395 warranty 30 weight 7 toner smear troubleshooting 400 tools required 146 top cover 166 7 bin tabletop mailbox 265 stapler 2
327. ure 6 143 Figure 6 144 Figure 6 145 Figure 6 146 Figure 6 147 Figure 6 148 Figure 6 149 Figure 6 150 Figure 6 151 Figure 6 152 Figure 6 153 Figure 6 154 Figure 6 155 Figure 6 156 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 7 8 Figure 7 9 Figure 7 10 Figure 7 11 Figure 7 12 Figure 7 13 Figure 7 14 Figure 7 15 Figure 7 16 Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 Figure 7 19 Figure 7 20 Figure 7 21 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 EN Paper Deck Drive Assembly 1 of 2 311 Paper Deck Drive Assembly 2 of 2 312 Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 313 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Controller PCA 314 Cassette Size Sensing PCA 1 of 2 315 Cassette Size Sensing PCA 2 of 2 316 Power Supply 317 Main Cable 1 of 2 318 Main Cable 2 of 2 319 Storage Paper Tray 320 Front Door Storage Area 321 Outriggers Leveling Feet 322 Casters ee ee ee ee eee 323 Foot Tip and Adjustable Foot Tip 324 Locating Pins 325 Front LED PCA 326 HP LaserJet Troubleshooting Process 1 of 2
328. utput Paper Sensor PCA 2 of 4 199 Output Paper Sensor PCA 3 of 4 200 Output Paper Sensor PCA 4 of 4 201 Paper Size PCA 1 of 3 AE AA Bo kA ee 202 Paper Size PCA 2 of 3 eet e ee Re ee oe 203 Paper Size PCA 3 of 3 eke HA eS eS AG 204 High Voltage Power Supply e lt sca Fee ae ae 205 Low Voltage Power Supply seven ete ears arenes 206 Registration Assembly 1 of 3 ee cee ee ee ees 207 Registration Assembly 2 of 3 208 Registration Assembly 3 of 3 5 aye ese Saye es 209 Tray 1 Feed Roller BATAS AG es 210 Figure 6 47 Figure 6 48 Figure 6 49 Figure 6 50 Figure 6 51 Figure 6 52 Figure 6 53 Figure 6 54 Figure 6 55 Figure 6 56 Figure 6 57 Figure 6 58 Figure 6 59 Figure 6 60 Figure 6 61 Figure 6 62 Figure 6 63 Figure 6 64 Figure 6 65 Figure 6 66 Figure 6 67 Figure 6 68 Figure 6 69 Figure 6 70 Figure 6 71 Figure 6 72 Figure 6 73 Figure 6 74 Figure 6 75 Figure 6 76 Figure 6 77 Figure 6 78 Figure 6 79 Figure 6 80 Figure 6 81 Figure 6 82 Figure 6 83 Figure 6 84 Figure 6 85 Figure 6 86 Figure 6 87 Figure 6 88 Figure 6 89 Figure 6 90 Figure 6 91 Figure 6 92 Figure 6 93 EN Tray 1 Separation Pad Tray 2 and 3 Pickup Feed and Separation Rollers 212 Paper Input Unit Sensor PS2 21
329. ve purchased However if an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be attributable directly to the use of a non HP toner cartridge HP will not repair the printer free of charge In this case standard time and materials charges will be applied to service your printer for that particular failure or damage Operation of the printer beyond the limit of its duty cycle printing greater than the equivalent of 130 000 images per month shall be deemed printer abuse and all repairs thereafter will be billed on a time and materials basis If you are using a mechanical switch box ensure that it is equipped with a surge protector Damage to your printer could occur from the use of unprotected mechanical switch boxes Warranty Limitations The warranty set forth above is exclusive and no other warranty whether written or oral is expressed or implied Hewlett Packard specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Service During the Warranty Period If your hardware should fail during the warranty period contact an authorized HP dealer or an HP Customer Service Center Service After the Warranty Period If your hardware fails after the warranty period contact an authorized HP dealer or your local Customer Service Center If you have an HP Maintenance Agreement request service under your agreement 34 Chapter 1 Product Information EN Regulatory Information FCC Regulation
330. vps see low voltage power supply Macintosh network cable kit ordering 23 mailbox with stapler electrical specifications 9 identification label 6 operation 133 ordering 20 paper jams 428 removing and replacing 153 223 specifications 5 troubleshooting 428 verifying installation 342 wiring diagram 440 main cable 2 x 500 sheet input tray 318 main gear assembly 191 removing and replacing 191 main motor assembly 106 removing and replacing 194 maintenance count setting 78 185 kit ordering 24 preventative 91 manuals ordering 24 mass storage see hard disk drive media separation 115 media see paper memory installing see also memory ordering 23 removing and replacing 147 requirements 26 standard 3 status 80 verifying installation 342 menu key 52 menu map page 83 341 menus see control panel menus metallic tape and housing assembly mailbox 237 minus key 52 model number 6 monthly usage 2 Index 487 488 Index motors controlled by DC controller 106 delivery head position mailbox 240 diagram 434 fan1 178 fan 3 180 locations 117 main assembly 194 reversing mechanism 7 bin tabletop mailbox 284 transport belt and encoder assembly mailbox 241 multibin mailbox paper path 121 removing and replacing 153 223 multi bin mailbox dimensions 8 48 electrical specifications 9 identification label 6 ordering 20 paper jams 428 power box ordering 24 space requirements 48 specifications 5 stapler operation 133 troubl
331. w language switching EN Control Panel Menus 71 EIO Menu EIO enhanced input output Menus depend on the particular accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer If the printer contains an HP JetDirect print server ElO card you can configure basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu These and other parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin Table 3 10 EIO Menu Item Values 72 Chapter 3 Operating Overview Explanation The JetDirect Menu is not accessible The JetDirect Menu appears Select whether the IPX SPX protocol stack in Novell NetWare networks for example is enabled on or disabled off Select whether the DLC LLC protocol stack is enabled on or disabled off Select whether the TCP IP protocol stack is enabled on or disabled off Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol stack is enabled on or disabled off The IPX SPX Menu is not accessible The IPX SPX Menu appears In the IPX SPX Menu you can specify the frame type parameter used on your network The default is to automatically set and limit the frame type to the one detected For Ethernet cards frame type selections include For Token Ring cards frame type selections include In the IPX SPX Menu for Token Ring cards you can also specify NetWare Source Routing parameters which include default Or ALL ET EN Table 3 10 EIO Menu continu
332. will result 2 Paper lot is bad Paper that is manufactured poorly or inconsistently or that has too smooth or too rough a surface texture can cause an image skew problem 3 Pickup and or Registration Rollers are worn Paper is not being picked up consistently 404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Replace the defective gear or Main Drive assembly See Main Gear Assembly on page 191 for instructions Inspect all paper path rollers looking for wear cracks or glazing Replace the worn rollers Recommended Action Remove paper from the tray and install paper correctly Position the paper guide correctly for the paper size being used Try a different paper lot see HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide Inspect all paper path rollers looking for wear cracks or glazing Replace the worn rollers EN ASDLASS MAVIY Anan Wawa ww a mi Z Aa rrr wara r 1 waww w w NADAPA PAU EN Table 7 20 Bubble Print Possible Cause 1 Photosensitive drum inside toner cartridge is not grounded 2 High Voltage Power Supply is defective 3 Toner cartridge is leaking 4 Paper does not meet specifications The moisture content conductivity or surface finish may not work correctly with the electrophotographic process Recommended Action 1 Check for proper moun
333. x 293 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Cover Latch Figure 6 124 Cover Latch 1 Remove the handle 2 Remove 1 screw and remove the Cover Latch 294 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Bottom Figure 6 125 Orientation of the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 295 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Back Cover Figure 6 126 Back Cover 1 Remove 4 screws 2 Release and pull out the Back Cover 296 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Left Cover Figure 6 127 Left Cover 1 Unplug the power cord and C link interface cables and remove the Back Cover page 296 2 Remove 2 screws callout 1 3 Release the tab next to the power supply callout 2 4 Tip the cover outward to release the screw holders callout 3 5 Lift the cover up to clear the bottom tabs callout 4 Note Align the screw holes with their holders when you replace the cover EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 297 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Vertical Transfer Unit VTU Figure 6 128 Vertical Transfer Unit VTU 1 of 3 1 Open the Vertical Transfer Unit VTU on the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray 2 Unplug the 3 cables that connect the VTU to the chassis callout 1 WARNING Do not release the plastic cams from the secure position while the VTU is off The springs on the cams are very strong and may cause injury 3 Slide the 2 plastic cams on the VTU hinges to the secure position callout
334. y The page is too complex for standard printer memory 3 Printing on legal size paper from Tray 4 when software is specifying letter size this will also cause paper jams Table 7 23 Compressed Print Possible Cause 1 Toner cartridge bushings are too tight This may occur on refilled toner cartridges 2 Gear is broken or worn 406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Recommended Action Remove the toner cartridge and check for damage Replace the toner cartridge if it is damaged Remove the printer cover and inspect the path from the Laser Scanner to the toner cartridge drum looking for foreign objects in the beam path Recommended Action Set Page Protect to on or auto Add printer memory See Memory and Personality Upgrade on page 147 for instructions As an alternative simplify the print job Review software selection Make sure that printing is on selected size Recommended Action Replace the toner cartridge Inspect and replace the worn gear or assembly EN At 3bCce At 3bCce Ac 3bCce Ac 3bCce Ac 3bCce EN Table 7 24 Blank Portion in the Middle of the Page Tray 4 Input only Possible Cause 1 Bad clutch in vertical transfer door 2 Bad clutch in paper pickup assembly Recommended Action Replace the Tray 4 vertical transfer door See the HP LaserJet 8000 8000 N 8000 DN and HP Mopier 240 Printers Service Manual Supplement for Paper handling Accessori
335. y 5 are set for the size of paper installed and that the tray is not overloaded with paper Troubleshooting Checks 417 Diagnostics on Accessories 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Standalone Diagnostics The standalone diagnostics are designed to test the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray s motors functionality and sensors You will need a power cord a 2 Phillips screwdriver and a small flatblade screwdriver for the DIP switches Table 7 26 DIP switch settings for troubleshooting test procedures DIP Switch Normal Setting Motor Test Standalone Sensor Tests Running Test 1 Off On On Off 2 Off On Off Off 3 Off Off Off On 4 Off On On On If the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray is working properly it picks paper up from the tray and feeds it into the VTU while the bottom service LED flashes regularly every 0 5 seconds The DIP switch is on if it is set to the top The DIP switch is off if it is set to the bottom Note To go from one test to another or to change the DIP switch settings set the blue power supply switch to Operational Mode push in Reset the DIP switches on the Controller PCA and then switch the power supply back to Diagnostic Mode pull out to enable the new diagnostic test 418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting EN CAUTION EN 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray Motor Test This test verifies that the three motors on the 2 x 500 sheet Input Tray are functioning properly 1 Identify the Back Cover opposite side from tray door Remove
336. y bin sensor and the gear of the tray into place as shown 2 Make sure that the holes for the 3 screws align with the holes of the tray EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 277 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Empty Bin Sensor PCA ra ES Nan iy fear AA Figure 6 108 Empty Bin Sensor PCA 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 2 Unplug J305 the topmost connector from the Empty Bin Sensor PCA callout 1 3 Remove 2 screws and the metal plates that hold the Empty Bin Sensor PCA callout 2 278 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN PLD UMIS Figure 6 109 Empty Bin Sensor PCA 2 of 2 4 Lift up the Empty Bin Sensor PCA to free it from the sensor flags and pull it out as shown EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 279 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA Figure 6 110 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA 1 of 2 1 Remove the Back Cover page 263 and the Empty Bin Sensor PCA page 278 Unplug J301 J302 J303 and J304 callout 1 Remove 4 screws from the PCA and the screw in the harness callout 2 280 Chapter 6 Removal and Replacement EN Figure 6 111 Full Bin and Interlock Sensor PCA 2 of 2 4 Rotate the PCA toward the right and then pull it out as shown EN 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox 281 7 bin Tabletop Mailbox LED PCA Figure 6 112 LED PCA 1 Remove the Front Cover page 260 Remove 1 screw callout 1 Unplug J307 from the LED PCA and remove the LED PCA callout 2 282 Chap

HP LaserJet 8000 Service Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents